Upload
alfredo-dagostino
View
259
Download
29
Embed Size (px)
DESCRIPTION
mm
Citation preview
I N T R O D U C T I O N T O THE
D E V A N A G A R I S C R I P T FOR STUDENTS OF
SANSKRIT, HINDI, MARATHI GUJARATI AND BENGALI
INTRODUCTION TO THE
DEVANAGARI SCRIPT F O R S T U D E N T S O F .
S A N S K R I T , H I N D I , M A R A T H I G U J A R A T I A N D B E N G A L I
B Y
H. M. LAMBERT, M.A.Cantab. Senior Lecturer in Marathi (Maharaja Gaekwad's Lectureship)
in the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
W I T H A F O R E W O R D B Y
P R O F E S S O R J . R . F I R T H , O . B . E . , M . A .
Professor of General Linguistics in the University of London
GEOFFREY CUMBERLEGE
O X F O R D U N I V E R S I T Y P R E S S
Oxford University Press, Amen House, London E.C 4 GLASGOW NEW YORK TORONTO MELBOURNE WELLINGTON
BOMBAY CALCUTTA MADRAS KARACHI CAPE TOWN IBADAN
Geoffrey Cumberlege, Publisher to the University
First published 1953
PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN
F O R E W O R D
I T is a commonplace of linguistics to acknowledge the debt we owe to the ancient Indian grammarians and to couple wi th it the name of Sir Wil l iam Jones. It was he who first set a proper value on the Devanagari and Arab i c scripts in his dissertation as President of the Asiatic Society of Bengal on the Or thography of Asiatic Words in Roman Letters . His chart of suggested symbols for the transliteration of the Devanagari, with the addition of letters for Arabic and Persian, is the first presentation of what may be called a phonetic alphabet on such a scale. H e finds the Arabic alphabet almost perfect for Arabic itself:— 'Not a letter could be added or taken away without manifest inconvenience. The same may
indubitably be said of the Devanagari system, which, as it is more naturally arranged than any other, shall here be the standard of my particular observations on Asiatic letters. Our English alphabet and orthography are disgracefully and almost ridiculously imperfect.' He aims at using diacritics common in Europe rather than new letters—and symbols from 'fluxions' or mathematics—so as to equal the Devanagar i itself in precision and clearness.
A system of writing and spelling is the foundation of a system of grammar. Meillet went so far as to say that the foundations of the science of grammar were laid by the Indians. For all languages employing forms of the Devanagari script, the writing system and the spelling carry implications of phonologica l analysis and statement. T h e y are at once practice and theory and deserve the first attentions of all students. T h i s is well illustrated in Miss Lambert ' s work on the Devanagar i script, and it will be agreed that the presentation of the phonological patterns, such as ' junctions' occurring in words or arising out of 'sandhi' in Sanskrit, and other characteristic patterns in the modern languages, is clear, systematic, and original, and particularly interesting in Bengali. The treatment of conjunct characters in the third chapter of each section is new, and apart from its intrinsic interest may be taken as an indication of what is lost when the structure of the Devanagari sys tem is superseded by the usual roman trans-literations. In addition to this study of the wri t ing system, attention is rightly given here to calligraphy, for the practice of the hand is an obligation no less compelling than that of the tongue and both are expressions not only of courteous relations but of disciplined knowledge.
Miss Lambert has consistently applied the Al l - Ind ia Roman Alphabet to all five languages in order to make comparison possible whether the languages are known to the student or not. Th i s treatment could be extended to the Dravidian languages. By this
vi FOREWORD means it has been found possible to make a systematic statement of the various conven-tions governing the use of the Sanskritic writ ing system for the modern languages.
T h e Sanskrit and Hindi sections are published separately in one volume since they employ one script and wil l presumably be more generally required, but the appeal of the entire work is to those whose interests range from India through Fur ther India to the Indonesian Islands fol lowing the Sanskritic system of wri t ing.
I have been acquainted wi th Miss Lamber t ' s work in Indian studies since 1937, first in Western India and later as a colleague in London . It gave me great pleasure to be asked to write this brief foreword to her work on a subject which I have always held to be of high importance and the results of which are now offered to students of Sanskrit and the four principal Sanskritic languages of India.
J. R. FIRTH
P R E F A C E
G O O D writing, the understanding of the wr i t ing system and the formation of a good hand, is as important a part of the study of the writ ten language as good pronunciation is of the study of the spoken language. Y e t too little time is usually given to the teaching of writing to students of Sanskrit and of the modern Indian languages; writing is generally left for the student to teach himself as best he can. T h e result is that many students neither have an adequate understanding of the wri t ing system and the difference between a syllabic and an alphabetic method of representation, nor know how the characters of the script are written and what features are important for the formation of a cultured literate hand. It is hoped that this book wil l provide not only a guide to students learn-ing to write the scripts which are described in each section, but will also give them a fuller understanding of the special nature of the scripts and the adjustments which are made in the Sanskrit system in order to use it for writ ing the modern languages of northern India.
T h e notation used for the transcription of the scripts in this work is the All - India Roman Alphabet devised by Professor J. R . F i r th of the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, and used already in several publications—A. H. Harley, Colloquial Hindustani, T . Grahame Bai ley , Teach Yourself Hindustani, and my own Marathi Language Course. T h e use of this transcription necessitates the use of certain conventions, particularly that of the representation of the 'inherent vowel ' , in final characters when listing the contents of each section of the work. T h e transcription of the Sanskrit terms in the Sanskrit section is entirely systematic; but owing to the varying realization of the characters of the script in certain positions in words in the modern languages, it has been necessary to use in the Contents of the other sections certain con-ventions which are discussed in the text . A n example of such conventions occurs in the writing of such Sanskrit terms, used b y grammarians in the modern languages, as 'antasth' and 'uusm', in which the realization of the 'inherent vowel ' of the final character varies from a short glide-vowel to a full syl lable. A s it is beyond the scope of this work to make a fine analysis of the varying realization of such final characters, it is necessary to establish certain conventions wi th regard to the transcription of them. These con-ventions are of necessity anticipated in the Contents .
Some degree of repetition has been inevitable in order to preserve the basic unity of the description of the Devanagari sys tem of wri t ing while allowing for specialization
viii PREFACE in each of the languages. Whi le this repetition may at times seem irksome to the reader, it has the advantage of facilitating comparison of one section wi th another.
T h e words given in each section to illustrate the writing and reading of the various scripts have been selected in order to provide examples of every character or combina-tion of characters wh ich occurs in the language under consideration. Some characters occur only in colloquial forms o r in loanwords from other languages, including Engl ish. In order to illustrate the use of all the characters, examples are drawn, therefore, from the whole range of vocabulary, from colloquial forms occurring in modern speech to learned Sanskrit loanwords occurring only in literary texts. A n y word which occurs in a standard dictionary is a word which the student may have to read and illustrates the use of the characters of the script.
T h i s study of the Devanagar i script owes its inspiration to the suggestion and en-couragement of Professor Fir th , to w h o m m y thanks are first due. But a work of this nature could not have been accomplished without reference to experts in the languages discussed, and I am greatly indebted to m y colleagues of both the Depar tment of India, Pakistan and Ceylon , and the Department of Phonetics and Linguist ics , of the School, for their co-operation and guidance. I am especially indebted to Miss G . M . Summers , formerly Lecturer in Bengali in this School, for her collaboration in the Bengali section, without which the study of the Bengali script could not have been included in this work. T h e two scribes who have writ ten the script portions of the book, Miss W . Westover and Mr . P . Pritchard, must also be given recognition for their careful and accurate work .
Finally I wish to express m y appreciation of the great generosity of the School of Oriental and African Studies for their subvention towards the publication of this book; and of the help and advice given by the Oxford University Press on all matters concern-ing its production.
H . M . L .
C O N T E N T S page
Foreword v Preface vii
Introduction: The Devanagari Script 1 Notation 2 Calligraphy 5
SANSKRIT SECTION
Chapter 1 . Arrangement of the Syllabary 1 1 Sanskrit syllabary in roman notation 1 2 Sanskrit phonetic terms 1 3
Chapter 2 . Characters of the Syllabary 1 5
1 . Consonant Characters 1 5 i„ Characters of the vargiiya group 1 6
ii. Characters of the antahstna group 1 8 iii. Characters of the uusman group, and Vedic \o 1 9
2 . Vowel Characters and Vowel Signs 2 1 i. Vowel characters 2 1
ii. Vowel signs 2 3 3 . Modifiers 2 6
• i. anusvaran 2 6 ii. visargah 3 0
1 + . The Complete Syllabary 3 1 5 » Numerals 3 2 6 . Punctuation 3 2
Chapter 3 . Conjunct Characters 3 3
1 . Construction of Conjunct Characters 3 3 2 . Contexts of Conjunct Characters 3 5 3 . Classification of Conjunct Characters 3 7
Class 1 . Two similar characters joined 3 8 Class 2 . Two vargiiya characters joined 3 9 Class 3 . Characters joined with antahstha characters 1 + 3
i. witn following ya 1 + 3 ii. with following va 1+1+
iii. with preceding or following ra 1 + 5 iv. with preceding or following la and \Q 1 + 7
Class 1+ . vargiiya characters joined with preceding or following uusman characters 1 + 8 i. witn Ja , sa and sa 1 + 8
ii. with ha 5 0
Transcription of reading examples 5 1
X C O N T E N T S
HINDI SECTION
page Chapter 1. Arrangement of the Syllabary 57
Hindi syllabary in roman notation 59
Chapter 2. Characters of the Syllabary 6 l
1. Consonant Characters 61 Realisation of akar consonant characters 6 2 i. Characters of the vargiiy group 63
ii. Characters of the antasth group 61+ iii. Characters of the uusm group 65
2. Vowel Characters and Vowel Signs 67 i. Vowel Characters 67
ii. Vowel Signs 67 Realisation of characters in special contexts 69
3 . Modifiers 70 i. anusvar and candr-bindu 70
ii. visarg 73 1+. The Complete Syllabary 73 5. Numerals 71+ 6. Punctuation 71+
Chapter 3« Conjunct Characters 75
1. Contexts of Conjunct Characters in Hindi 75 2. Realisation of Conjunct Characters in Hindi 76 3 . Classes of Conjunct Characters 76
Class 1. Two similar characters joined 77 Class 2. Two vargiiy characters joined 78 Class 3 . Characters joined with antasth characters 79
i. with following ya 79 ii. with following va 80
iii. with preceding or following ra 80 iv. with preceding or following la 81
Class 1+. vargiiy characters joined with preceding or following uusm characters 82 i. with J" a , sa and sa 82
ii. with ha 83
Hindi prose passage 81+
Transcription of reading examples 85
C O N T E N T S x i
MARATHI SECTION
page Chapter 1. Arrangement of the Syllabary 91
Marathi syllabary in roman notation 92
Chapter 2. Characters of the Syllabary 9k
1 . Consonant Characters , 9 5 Realisation of akar consonant characters 9 6 i. Characters of the vargiiy group 9 6
ii. Characters of the antasth group 99 iii. Characters of the uusm group, and \e 1 0 0
2 . Vowel Characters and Vowel Signs 1 0 2 i. Vowel Characters 1 0 2
ii. Vowel Signs 1 0 3 Modern forms of Marathi vowel characters 1 0 3
Realisation of characters in special contexts 1 0 5 Realisation of characters of the ca-varg 106
3 . Modifiers 1 0 8 i. anusvar 108
ii. visarg 1 1 1 h. The Complete Syllabary 112 5 . Numerals 1 1 2 6 . Punctuation 1 1 2 Rules of Marathi Orthography 1 1 3
Chapter 3 . Conjunct Characters 118
1 . Contexts of Conjunct Characters in Marathi 1 1 8 2 . Realisation of Conjunct Characters in Marathi 119 3 . Classes of Conjunct Characters 1 1 9
Class 1 . Two similar characters joined 1 2 0 Class 2 . Two vargiiy characters joined 1 2 1 Class 3 . Characters joined with antasth characters 1 2 2
i. with following ya 1 2 2 ii. with following va 1 2 3
iii. with preceding or following ra 12k iv. with preceding or following la 1 2 6
Class k- vargiiy characters joined with preceding or following uusm characters 1 2 7 i. withr J"a , sa and sa 1 2 7
ii. with ba 128
Marathi prose passage 129
Transcription of reading examples 1 3 0
x i i C O N T E N T S
GUJARATI SECTION
page Chapter 1 . Arrangement of the Syllabary 1 3 5
Gujarati syllabary in roman notation 1 3 6
Chapter 2 . Characters of the Syllabary 1 3 8
1 . Consonant Characters 1 3 8 Realisation of akar consonant characters 1 3 9 i. Characters of the vargiiy group 1 1 + 0
ii. Characters of the antasth group 1 1 + 2 iii. Characters of the uusm group, and \Q 1 1 + 3
2 . Vowel Characters and Vowel Signs 1 1 + 1 + i. Vowel Characters 1 1 + 1 +
ii. Vowel Signs 1 1 + 5 Realisation of vowels ' e' and ' o' 1 1 + 6
Realisation of characters in special contexts 1 1 + 8 Realisation of ' c a' and ' qha' 1 5 0 Orthography of 'i* and 'u' 1 5 0
3 . Modifiers 1 5 2 i. anusvar 1 5 2
ii. visarg 1 5 1 + 1+. The Complete Syllabary 1 5 5 5 . Numerals 1 5 6 6 . Punctuation 1 5 6 Rules of Gujarati Orthography 1 5 6
Chapter 3 » Conjunct Characters 1 5 7
1 . Contexts of Conjunct Characters in Gujarati 1 5 7 2 . Realisation of Conjunct Characters in Gujarati 1 5 8 3 . Classes of Conjunct Characters 1 5 9
Class 1 . Two similar characters joined 1 5 9 Class 2 . Two vargiiy characters joined 1 6 0 Class 3 « Characters joined with antasth characters l 6 l
i. with following ya l 6 l ii. with following va 1 6 2 iii. with preceding or following ra 1 6 2 iv. with preceding or following la 161+
Class 1+. vargiiy characters joined with preceding or following uusm characters 1 6 5 i. with Jo , sa and sa 1 6 5
ii. with ha 1 6 6
Gujarati prose passage 1 6 7
Transcription of reading examples 1 6 8
C O N T E N T S x i i i
BENGALI SECTION
page Chapter 1. Arrangement of the Syllabary 173
Notation 17k Bengali syllabary in roman notation 175 Calligraphy 177
Chapter 2. Characters of the Syllabary 179
1. Consonant Characters i. Characters of the vargiiya group 181
Realisation of akar consonant characters 183 ii. Characters of the antastha group 186
iii. Characters of the uusma group 188 Realisation of akar consonant characters in verbal forms 190
2. Vowel Characters and Vowel Signs 192 i. Vowel Characters 192
ii. Vowel Signs 191+ Realisation of consonant and vowel characters in special contexts 195 a. Realisation of akar consonant characters 195 b. Realisation of vowel characters in
special contexts 197 Realisation of antastha ya 199
3. Modifiers 201+ i. candra-bindu and anus vara 2 0 1 +
ii. visarga 2 0 6 1 + . The Complete Syllabary 2 0 6 5. Numerals 2 0 7 6. Punctuation 207
Chapter 3. Conjunct Characters 2 0 8
1. Construction of Conjunct Characters 2 0 8 2. Contexts and Realisation of Conjunct Characters 2 0 9 3. Classes of Conjunct Characters 211
Class 1. Two similar characters joined 211 Class 2. Two vargiiya characters joined 212 Class 3» Characters joined with antastha characters 211+
i. with following ya 2 1 1 + ii. with following va 2 1 6
iii. with-preceding or following ra 2 1 8 iv. with preceding or following la 220
Class 1 + . vargiiya characters joined with preceding or following uusma characters 221 i. with Ja , sa and sa 221
ii. with ha 223
Bengali prose passage 2 2 5
Transcription of Reading Examples 2 2 6
I N T R O D U C T I O N Tne Devanagari Script
The script traditionally referred to as the Devanagari Script
is used in writing Sanskrit and, of the modern, languages of northern
India, Hindi, Marathi and Nepali. The script used in writing Gujarati
is a slightly modified form of the Devanagari script, and the scripts
used in writing Bengali and Panjabi are related to the Devanagari
script, though this relation is apparent in only some of the charact-
ers. The writing system, based on the character representing the syll-
able, is the same for all these languages. However, in order to use
this system for writing the modern languages, which have each develop-
ed in their own particular way from the original Sanskrit, a number
of conventions have become necessary in reading from the script, con-
ventions which vary with the special features of each language. The
realisation of the characters as they are used for writing Hindi,
Bengali, Marathi and Gujarati, and the conventions which have become
established in each language, are described in the various sections
of this work. Though the Bengali script differs considerably from
the Devanagari script in the form of most of the characters, the
study of it is included in this work because the writing system is
the same as the Sanskrit writing system, and the conventions by which
2 I N T R O D U C T I O N
1 . See Preface.
this system is adapted for writing Bengali have much in common with
the conventions used in the other modern languages. An examination
of these conventions makes possible an interesting comparison both
between the writing of these four languages and that of Sanskrit,
and between the writing of the modern languages themselves.
The origin of the name 'Devanagari' is obscure. The shorter
form of the name is 1Nagari'(nagarii), which has been variously inter-
preted. It is thought by some to be tbe name given to the writing of
'tbe people of the city'(nagaram, 'a city'); by others it is said to
derive its name from the Nagar Brahmans of Gujarat.
Notation
The system of roman notation used in this text for transcribing
the Devanagari characters is the All-India Roman Notation^. Three
minor modifications have been introduced in this text in order to
adapt the notation for transcribing both Sanskrit and the modern
languages.
These modifications are :-
i. The use of the vowels i ('short' i) and ii ('long' ii) instead
of the vowels y and i ; and of the vowels u ('short' u )
and uu ('long' uu ) for the vowels w and u .
ii. The use of the letter rrj instead of n for representing the
mark of nasalisation known as the anusvar.
iii.The placing of a micron above the letter y in the diphthong ay ,
and above the letter v in the diphthong av , thus: ay , av .
I N T R O D U C T I O N 3
1. For the use of this term, see Sanskrit section, Chapter 1.
This mark distinguishes the transcription of the diphthongs from
the transcription of combinations of characters which are real-
ised in certain contexts as s-y and 9-v , not distinguishable
in ordinary speech, in the modern languages, from the diphthongs.
Besides these modifications, it is necessary to make certain
additions to the notation in order to represent characters used in
writing the modern, languages but not used in Sanskrit, and certain
modified characters used in Hindi and Bengali. The complete notation
used in the Sanskrit syllabary is this:
Vowels: a a i ii u uu e ay o ov
and r rr 1 11 , for the syllabic consonants.
Modifiers1: rrj (representing the onusvara) and
h (representing the visarga)
Consonants: k kh g gh n
c ch j jh ji
t t* a <ih n t th d dh n
p ph b bh m
y r l v ; J* s s h
\ , used in transcribing Vedic Sanskrit
The additional letters used in the syllabaries of the modern
languages are these:
r and rh for transcribing the modified forms of the characters
representing ^ and cjh , in Hindi and Bengali, and for
4 I N T R O D U C T I O N
1 . See Sanskrit Section, Chapter 2 , 3 . i . a . anusvara. 2 . ibid., Chapter 1.
indicating the intervocallic realisation, in certain words, of
the Gujarati character representing c[ .
q , x , y , z and f , for transcribing certain modified Devanagari
characters used in Hindi in writing Persian and Arabic loanwords,
ts , z and zh , for transcribing characters of the 'palatal' class
in Marathi, when they are realised with alveolar articulation.
In modern spoken Gujarati and modern spoken Bengali, certain
vowel sounds occur which are not separately represented in the script.
For indicating the contexts in which such vowel sounds occur, the
three symbols e , o and se are used.
The sign of nasalisation,'"' , is used in transcribing the modifier
representing nasalisation1 when it is realised, in the modern lang-
uages, as the nasalisation of a vowel and not as a nasal consonant.
This roman notation is used for writing all the Sanskrit grammat-
ical terms referring to the syllabaries of Sanskrit and of the modern
languages, the classification of the characters and the phonetic de-
scription of their realisation. The names of the languages, the
scripts, and grammatical terms, such as 'sandhi'(sandhi), which are
in regular use in English, are written in their conventional English
form.
The Sanskrit syllabary, as arranged by the Sanskrit grammarians,
is given in the roman notation in the Sanskrit section^, and serves
as a standard with which the syllabaries of the modern languages can
be compared.
I N T R O D U C T I O N «
Callig£^P^Z
The writing of the Devanagari characters should he practised at
first with a reed or bamboo pen. Such pens are still in use in many-
parts of India, and in many schools Indian children are taught first
to write on a large scale with a broadly cut bamboo pen. Writing in
this way will train the eye to recognise easily details of difference
and will train the hand to write a standard form of the characters
with the broad and thin strokes in the right place and proportion.
These pens are cut in the same way as a quill pen, except that the
point is cut to slant in the opposite direction from that of the
quill used for English writing with the tilted axis. The English pen,
when cut for the tilted axis, looks like this from the back:
writing thus:
The pen cut for the Devanagari script looks like this from the back:
writing thus:
The pen should be neld in such a way that the thin line, made by the
cut edge, falls from left to right at an angle of k5 degrees from a
line drawn horizontally across the page. The broad stroke then forms
a right-angle with the thin stroke and crosses the horizontal line of
the page at an angle of i+5 degrees. Care must be taken not to change
the angle of the pen during the writing of curved or rounded strokes,
as this will change the shape and balance of the character.
Some of the typical strokes of the script should be practised
Until good control of the pen, held at the right angle, is establish-
ed before the characters themselves are written. For example.:
6 I N T R O D U C T I O N
The use of the broad, pen should be continued until a good style
of handwriting is formed; the introduction of writing with an
ordinary pen, and without sufficient attention to the details of line
and form, often interferes with the formation of a good hand.
In the illustrations given below, which may be used as writing
exercises, the characters are grouped so as to show different combin-
ations of strokes, and to draw attention to•similarities and to small
but important differences. It will be seen that some of the characters
have an upright stroke, others are curved or rounded, without an up-
right stroke; but all have the head-stroke, though it is not always
written right across the top of the character. The alignment of the
characters is made by this head-stroke, that is, by the top of the
character, though there is an invisible alignment also by the bottom
of the character. For this reason, it is well to practice writing at
first between two lines; if one line is used, the characters should
be written from the line downwards, not on the line.
The general method of writing the characters is this: first,
the characteristic part of the character, usually on the left side of
the upright stroke; then the upright stroke, if there is one; and
finally the head-stroke. The head-stroke binds the whole character
together, as will be seen when vowel signs and other marks are added.
The general direction of making the strokes is from the top downwards,
and from left to right. But the order of the strokes in some charact-
ers, and their direction, differ from this general rule, and where
this is so, the calligraphy of particular characters is illustrated
when these are introduced in the chapters which follow.
I N T R O D U C T I O N 7
Examples of Devanagari characters, showing the order in which the
strokes are written:
Examples of similarity and difference between characters:
1 0 5
S A N S K R I T S E C T I O N
C H A P T E R 1
ARRANGEMENT OP THE SYLLABARY
When the characters of the Devanagari Script, , are
arranged in the traditional order, they constitute a series of syll-
ables which may be regarded as the basis of the Sanskrit phonological
system. Each character represents a syllable, and is called -*A"ql
(gksorom). The series of characters in the syllabary is called
3"*$HloHl (vornsmala) , and consists of:-
Pourteen vowel characters,
Two modifiers and
Thirtythree consonant characters.
The syllabary used in writing Vedic Sanskrit includes one more con-
sonant character.
In reading aloud from the script, a vowel character is realised
as a syllable consisting of a vowel, " ^ T ^ - : (svarah) , and a consonant
character is realised as a syllable consisting of an initial conson-
ant, oEn3p=JJT (vyojijonam) followed by the vowel o . This vowel,
when realised with a consonant, is generally referred to in English
textbooks as the 'inherent' vowel. The term 'modifier' is used here
to refer to the two signs which indicate some modification in the
realisation of the character with which they are written. These two
signs are usually referred to individually, as the 'anusyarsh' and
the 'visarggh' , as there is no Sanskrit term which is used to refer
to them together.
12 S A N S K R I T S E C T I O N
CONSONANTS with a 1
Velar 2
Palatal 3
Cacum-inal
k Dental
5 Labial
CQ
CD
i> •H V
oiceless
Unaspirated kg ca .t? ta pa CQ
CD
i> •H V
oiceless
Aspirated kha cha tha tha pha
P 1 0 s
Voiced Unaspirated ¥ da ba
P 1 0 s
Voiced
Aspirated gha jha dha dha bha
Nasal rja jia n9 na ma
Semi-vowels ys ra la va
Fricatives sa sa
Aspirate ha
Lateral I 9
VOWELS, associated with consonant-classes
a a i ii
e ay
r rr .1 11 u uu
o av
MODIFIERS Nasal -m Aspirated -h
Each character is referred to, for instance, in spelling, as the
syllable which it represents, and the particle (kara); for
example, ^ f l ^TTT (akara) , ^cf^R(ikara) , c cfTI? (kakara) , rTorTTT (takara).
The roman syllabary given below corresponds in arrangement and
classification with the Devanagari syllabary. As the consonant
characters are discussed first in this work, the table of consonant
syllables is placed first in this syllabary.
A R R A N G E M E N T OF T H E SYLLABARY 13
The character represented "by va in the roman table is usually
realised with labio-dental articulation in reading from a Sanskrit
text. The retroflex lateral consonant T_a occurs only in Vedic
Sanskrit. The vowel 'syllabic 11 1 does not occur in Sanskrit, but the
character representing it is traditionally included in the script
syllabary.
The main feature of the syllabary is the arrangement of the con-
sonant characters in groups according to the position and the manner
of articulation of the sounds which they represent. The following
Sanskrit phonetic terms are used by grammarians in the description of
the characters as they are classified in the syllabary:
i. The consonant characters are placed in three groups: characters
representing syllables with an initial plosive consonant, that is,
a consonant articulated with 'contact', ^-q(spar/ah,'touch') j
characters representing syllables with an initial semi-vowel, that is,
'neither a consonant nor a vowel', "=H«-ri:lF3T (antahstha, 'standing
between'); and characters representing syllables with an initial
fricative consonant, vjo^H*"^ (uusman, 'heat').
ii. The five positions o f articulation are: ct)<«c^( (kanj;hya,'velar')
or t ^ ^ ^ o i t ^ T ( jihvamuuliiya ,' root of the tongue'); cTToToZT
(talavya, 'palatal'); T^j[Z=Zf (muurdhanya,' cacuminal'!) ;
(dontya, 'dental') and 'SHV&O^ (osthya, 'labial'). Labio-dental
articulation is described as cfl ^"U. (dantavs^hya).
1. This term refers to the area of the roof of the mouth with which contact is made by the tongue. Consonants of this class are also de-scribed as 'cerebral'. As the retroflexion of the tongue is an import-ant feature in the pronunciation of consonants of this class in the modern languages, the class is described as 'retroflex' in the roman tables of those languages. Cf. Hindi, p. 5 9 .
14 S A N S K R IT SECTION
1. 'without sound', or 'voiceless'. 2. 'with little breath', or 'unaspirated'. 3.' 'with big breath', or 'aspirated'. h. 'with sound' or 'voiced'. 5. 'nasal'.
iii. The manner of production of the sounds by which the characters
are realised is described in the following terms, and in each class
of plosive consonants the characters are arranged in this order:
voiceless, unaspirated - -M vf]^ (aghosa1), y ( a l p a p r a n a 2 )
voiceless, aspirated - SfJ STfar (aghosa), H^l VI 1 1 (mahapra:na3)
voiced, unaspirated - "^TtWrT (ghosavat^), CM (alpaprana)
voiced, aspirated - ^TtTcr^ (ghosavat) , ^T^TTfW (mahaprana)
nasal - ^ T ^ l l fo^5 (anunasika 5) ,
C H A P T E R 2
CHARACTERS OP THE SYLLABARY
The characters of the script are described in this chapter in the
same order as that in which the syllables are placed in the roman
syllabary: Consonant Characters, Vowel Characters and Vowel Signs,
and Modifiers.
The general style of the characters varies from period to period
and from region to region. In the older editions of Sanskrit works
some characters are found that are now supplanted by newer and more
widely used forms; and there is sometimes a marked difference in the
style used in printing books in Bombay, Calcutta and other parts of
India. The most commonly used of the alternative forms of some of
the characters are given below, among the characters of each group.
The calligraphy of any characters which are not written according to
the general order of strokes given in the Introduction is illustrat-
ed when the characters are introduced.
1. Consonant Characters.
The consonant characters of the syllabary represent syllables
consisting of an initial consonant followed by the vowel a . Conson-
ant characters realised with the vowel a are described as ^ c f t K
(akara). If a character is to be realised as the consonant element
only of the syllable, this is shown by writing the mark known as
f ^TTPT- (viramah) at the foot of the character. The writing of this
mark with a character is illustrated below, after the first table.
16 S A N S K R I T S E C T I O N
k9-v9rg9h 35 k9 kh9 gh9
3>
ca-varggh C9 Ch9 Dh9 J19
-|;9-V9rg9h t 9 th9 3h9 n9
t9-varg9h t9
«r th9 d9 dhg n9
pg-varggh P9 ph9 b9
*r bh9 mo
The Bombay form of the character for jhg is § T > and the forms
35 and 7 are found in older books printed in Calcutta. The Bombay
Characters written with the viramgh are described as ^tyr^rT (hslants),
'ending in a consonant'.
i. Characters of the vorgiiys group ( ofTffcr ).
The twentyfive characters of this group are arranged, as in the
roman table given above, in five classes, (vergah), representing
the five positions of 'contact', Cf^f: (sparJsh), used in the articul-
ation of the plosive consonants. Each class consists of five charact-
ers, arranged in order according to the manner of production of the
consonant of the syllable which they represent.
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY 1 7
1. The first stroke in these characters is written from right to left. 2. See below, under 3. Modifiers, ii.
c
form of the character for no is . The Bombay forms of these
characters are used in Hindi writing, but the Hindi forms are not
used in Marathi writing, or in Sanskrit books printed in Bombay.
Calligraphy.
All the characters in the above table are written in the way
described in the introductory notes on calligraphy, except the
following three characters: jo \> 1 \r \j| \jf
jh9 »- *J *b *R to r
1 c ri rT
The writing of the viramoh to indicate the realisation of a con-
sonant character as a consonant without the vowel a is illustrated
by these characters:
<*5 ^ ^ ^ k- c- t~ t- p-
When writing words, which may be of one or more characters, each
character is written and completed with the head-stroke before the
next character is written. In the reading examples which are given
below, words which are usually written with the modifier known as
f o f ^ ' f : (visargeh)^ are written in the form in which they occur in
various contexts without this modifier. The visorgah is written with
reading examples after the modifiers have been discussed. Verbal
roots, in the form in which they are given in grammars and diction-
aries, are included in the examples in order to illustrate the writing
of characters with the viramoh.
18 S A N S K R I T SECTION
ii. Characters of the antahstha2 group ( *5y«rl*.)
^ jJJ* Bombay form
ya ra la va la
Calligraphy
la : Hindi form ^ • ^ Bombay form ^ ^ ^ 7>
These four characters are associated with four of the vargah, as
indicated in the roman syllabary, and with four of the vowels, thus:
T{ , ya, associated with the ca-vargah, and the vowels i and ii
^ , ra, associated with the , and the syllabic r and rr^"
—r k
Cn , la, associated with the ta-vargah, and the syllabic 1 and 11
of > va, associated with the pa-vargah, and the vowels u and uu 1. Transcription of examples is given on p.51. 2 . 'standing between.' 3 . This stroke is written from right to left. U. See below, under 2 . Vowel Characters.
Reading examples
1. One character words
2. Two character words
TT5 « R ^ **<5 ^ ^ F T TO^Tv 3*T x b t i vrfs TfiZ " W ^fcT ^ " T ^ TTUT
3 . Three character words
TTTT5R ^PTrT xTCPR H S R -<Tc5cfi 3^*1 «TcT5F) cfi-qe 3qv3foR 7Turop5 cf^x f TT^OFI
i+. Four and five character words
"B^rTxr M^^fflT ' T C T T cRSFR S R F R vSFTCR *T*TH*T " q 3 ^ * T e F P T O * W * B * i r R ^ " ^ ^ r p r
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY 19
1 . Transcription- of examples is given on p „ 5 1 o
2 . 'heat' 3. See Chapter 3.
These characters are all described as olpgprang and ghossvet.
cf , , though associated with the labial class, is. realised with
labio-dental articulation, and described as 3[«-< | (dantovsthys).
Reading examples1
1 . One character words
c T T T 5f *T rT
2. Two character words
o^cf ^ T M cRfv WtT STc5 «TC W TOV
qoT « R c=5 T ^ ^ ^^* N ^5
3 . Three character words •
^ c*opJT * T * T ^ «TSfc55 ^ f 5 T WW S^TT
£5*13 *P*cTx cT^R cTC*T
h. Words of four or more characters
Z(V(cl^ cTCRTT * R c T*T tT$^*??T S F P T S o W W
iii. Characters of the uusman2 group (\53"5EpT )
? ^ - f J9 S9 S9 h9
Calldgraphy
Jg : Hindi form $ $| Bombay form <$ 3l 41 IT
ha : i. ^ |> or ii. 4 ^ f
An older form of is 5j , a form still used in joining this
character to certain other characters. This form is illustrated
later under Conjunct Characters-^.
2o S A N S K R I T S E C T I O N
1. Transcription of examples is given on p. 51.
The first three characters of this group represent syllables
consisting of a fricative consonant with the vowel 9 , and are
described as 9ghos9 and mohaprang. The fourth character is realised
as an aspirate followed by the vowel 9 , and is described as ghosevot
and mehaprar)©. The uusmen characters are associated with the classes
thus: 51 , j"o , with the C9-V9rg9h; , so , with the -[Q-Yorgoh;
, 89 , with the T 9-v9rg9h; and , he , with the ko-vergeh.
The character |T is the last consonant character in the syllab-
ary used in writing classical Sanskrit. In writing Vedic Sanskrit
one more character is used, oS , \B , realised as a retroflex lateral
consonant followed by the vowel 9 .
Calligraphy of 55 : C Or OO 06 55
Reading examples1
1. One character words
2. Two character words
Tsres ^ s r ^ T^r ^
7rTN ^ R r P I TST 1# ^ ^
3- Three character words
b i ^ t ^ C T N opre v *p t* t t t r s t
^ T 5 T ^ n 5 R £ ^ T O c S H^ST $*5f5 t p ^ - * s t h
k» Pour, five and six character words
3"5R*T ^ T ^ H T f S R " ^ 5 p > ^ " H s " S T T F T ^ ^ T c T T T ^
^ T c ^ l T H =ToTSr^P*>lT H ^ T ^ R ^ ^ T T ^ T ^ ^ T ^ * m ? T * T
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY 21
9 M 9
a *> M\ ii t r *> * 1 C
oy 5 0
1. See below, under 3.Modifiers,i.note c.
2. Vowel Characters, with corresponding Vowel Signs.
A vowel which constitutes a syllable is written with a vowel
character; a vowel which is part of a syllable with an initial con-
sonant is written with a vowel sign added to a consonant character,
x. Vowel Characters.
There are fourteen vowel characters in the V9rr|9mala:
w 5 4 3 in o a i ii u uu
% % K Syllabic r rr 1 11
e ay o 9v
The character , and the other characters based on the same
form, Tf , Wl" and , and the characters ^ » » of and
, have these alternative forms:
<3T 3ff <2*t # S R ^ R ^ ^ o a o 8v r rr 1 11
Both forms of these vowel characters are used in Hindi writing;
only the Bombay forms are used in Marathi writing. An older form of
55ft , o , is »3* 1 . The order of writing the strokes in vowel
characters is illustrated by these examples:
22 S A N S K R I T S E C T I O N
The vowel characters are referred to as "swoftlT > a-kara, smooiT ?
a-kara, J j ^ B T ^ i-kara, and so on. They are related to the five posit-
ions of articulation as shown in the table of the roman syllabary.
The vowel 11 does not occur in Sanskrit words, but the character is
traditionally included in the syllabary for the sake of symmetry.
The first ten vowel characters represent five pairs of 'simple'
vowels, each pair consisting of a character realised as a 'short'
vowel, f^^oT , (hrasva) and a character realised as a 'long' vowel,
^t7^ , (diirgha). The remaining four characters represent vowels
which are described as 'compound' or 'conjunct', ^T^rf) > (sarrjyukta-'-).
In the system of modification and combination of vowels known as
'sandhi', f r: , (sandhih), as in the formation of compound words,
derived words, and the joining of final and initial vowels in con-
secutive words in a phrase or sentence, the vowels are grouped thus:
Simple vowels a a i ii u uu r rr 1
T J U T ' * (gunah) 9 a e o ar al
(vrddhih) a ay av ar al
Examples2: ^rpri^ nagaram — 'TI^ T f ^ o B nagarika
diva
?5
bhuuti
kr
kip op><v^HI kalpana cftio/HpJof) kalpanika
1 . See above, Ch.l., and below,3. i. for the modifier represented by rrj. 2 . See below, ii, for the vowel signs used in these examples.
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
Reading examples of words with vowel characters;1
23
1. One character words
TJ 5 3 W
2. Words of more than
5 \ 3<T
w i ^ i
-STt^ 3Tc5
^ { 35 ^ )
ne character
51 ^ft 3£
^ ^ sr 3 $ ^ if 3 r
ii. Vowel Signs
Each of the vowel characters, except , a , has a correspond-
ing vowel sign which may he added to a consonant character to re-
present a syllable consisting of an initial consonant followed by one
of the vowels a - av . As the vowel a is realised with every con-
sonant character unless it is either marked with the viramah or has
one of the vowel signs added to it, there is no sign for this vowel.
The vowel signs, added to the consonant character oft , are:
ku kuu '
k l l 2
5RT ka ki kii
f kr krr kl
% % ke kay ko kav
1 . Transcription of examples is given on p051. 2. See note on the vowel 11 under Vowel Characters, above.
24 S A N S K R IT SECTION
ka cb cbl ku cb 3> ki 1 !<*> kii cb <*>l
dhi 1 I'M ft fa bhi 1 m ft m ke ko oh obi
When the vowel signs are added to consonant characters which
have an upright stroke, the superscribed signs are placed above the
upright stroke, and the subscribed signs are written at the foot of
that stroke. When vowel signs are subscribed to rounded characters
they are written below the mid-point of the lowest curve, thus:
f 5 f £ 5 I
chu pxn d u djiuu du huu
Special forms ^ * 5 1 ^ ru ruu dr Jr hr
An older form of is -, and of i s
The vowel sign of 9f£ is not written with ^ • The character
representing if with ^ is written with the superscribed stroke
used to represent "5 when it is to be realised before another con-
sonant character without an intervening vowel. This stroke is placed
over the vowel character 5fJ , as in Pi•s+ irl , nirrti2.
Mark of 'separation'.
When an initial or sflT occurs after certain final vowels in
the preceding word, the mark S , known as 3T3"3T$|": (avagrohah)^ is
1 . See Ch.2 , l o i i i . 2. See Ch . 3 , 3.Class 3.iii° a- 3 » 'separation'.
Calligraphy
The order of writing the strokes when a vowel sign is added to a
consonant character is illustrated in the following examples:
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY 25
yo - ay am yo-yam te - api te- pi sada - atman sada—
Reading examples^
1. One character words
* ' 1 * I
X ft
2. Two character words
V * ft? ^ 3Tt§ £fcT ^
3 . Three character words
j j facr fa^to s t t c t t « ? o r facj^T ^ f re^r ^ r e
«§5*nfr ^ T f ^ r ^ f t c r ^ r f ^ i§rtW f^«TTcI ^ f t ^ R 5u^t=Ts ^ f f ^SBT | o 5 c l "
U. Four, five and six character words
?of)Tfo>R {jfttofc^r ^ f r f ^ ^ T ^ f i ^ ^ T f^"^f%oHT hUiP|«F> ^ R I * T % ?5^TTft f5F a f o ^ T ^ OTjftf^SFjT *sfa^f t l '«+>
1. , tma , the characters CTn and T combined. See Chapter 3» Class 2. iii. 2. Transcription of examples is given on p. 51.
written after the vowel in which the final and initial vowels are co-
alesced, to indicate the presence of two words in the piece. The mark
is written once when the initial vowel of the second word is *5T , and
twice when the initial vowel is ^\ , as in these examples:
26 S A N S K R I T SECTION
I i 3 *•
T orrj arr) irrj iirrj urrj uurrj em eyrrj orrj avrrj
#> % # f % % # kQirj kairj kirrj kiirrj kurrj kuurrj kerrj koyrrj korrj kevrrj
Calligraphy
The Qnusvareh is generally added to the character after the vowel
sign has been written and before the headstroke is written to complete
the character. It is placed above the middle of the character, or
over the last upright stroke if there is one, and to the right side of
any superscribed vowel sign, for example;
• • • » • *
kgrrj o h Ob eft 3 ^ hsnj ^ ^ |T
gang 4|| 4jj itf girrj \i\ ftj fSf gerrj Jj Jf
dhirrj f$ bhirrj \M R rorrj ^ *i
1 . 'after-sound'.
3. Modifiers
The two modifiers, known as ^ T * J iPfl IT : (onusvarsh) and "fcf^'^f";
(visorgsh), are signs which may be added to a character to indicate
a modification in the realisation of the character. They are placed
in the syllabary after the vowel characters, and, as they cannot be
written alone, they are written-with the character ^ . They may,
however, be written with any character.
io anusvareh, ^"• |T 5 ITT : 1
This modifier is written as a dot above the character of which
it modifies the realisation, thus:
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY 2 7
"J - q
jg " J1
q - n
rrj - m
arrjka (arjka) purrjkha (punkha) lirrjga (linga)
VW
parrjca (panca) varrjch (vajich) sirrjj (sip.3)
kuirj ha (kun^ha) arrjda (an^a) pirrjda (pin_qa)
5 1 3% Jarrjti (janti) irrjdu (indu) barrjdhu (bandhu)
karrjpa (kampa) arrjbu (ambu) kurrjbha (kumbha)
•re usual, method of representing a homorganic nasal
is that of combining the appropriate nasal consonant character with
The anusvarah is written with a character in various contexts,
and is realised in various ways according to the context.
a. When a word of which the final character represents the form-
ative particle occurs in any position except at the end of a line
of verse or a sentence, the character is omitted before an initial
consonant character of a following word and the formative particle is
represented by the anusvarah. This formative particle is usually writ-
ten as only at the end of a line or a sentence. For example:
yetarrj vibhuutirrj yogarr] ca. .. yetam vibhuutim yogam
b. The anusvarah may be written with an initial or. medial
character followed by a vargiiya character. In this context it is
realised as the nasal consonant of the class to which the following
character belongs. Examples:
28 S A N S K R I T S E C T I O N
Before oT , la
Before ^ , va
, as rj , m , n or y ; e.g.
^PTt'T sarjyoga, samyoga, sanyoga or sayyoga
, as rj , m , n or v ; e.g.
^ sarjraga, samraga, sanraga or savraga
, as rj , m , n or 1 ; e.g.
^fo/i^T sarjlaya, samlaya, sanlaya or sallaya
, as rj , m , or v ; e.g.
^ f o | s a n v a d a , samvada or savvada
1. See Chapter 3, Conjunct Characters, Class 2.b.
the vargiiya character that follows it, that is, ^ with characters
of the ka-vargah, \>f with characters of the ca-vargah, and so on.
This method is used also when the formative particle occurs before
an initial vargiiya character in a sentence, where consecutive words
are joined in sandhi. The calligraphy of such combined characters is
illustrated later1. Formative particles, such as *lf~cl , -anti, and
^«-("! , -ante, are usually written by this method and not with the
anusvarah.
The anusvarah is sometimes written to represent -n or -m , in
compounds formed from the prefix ^T*TN > sam-, and words beginning
with R or T * e.g. H*T(T sannata, and TTHf^" sammati.
c. When the anusvarah is written with a character preceding a
character of the antahstha or the uusman group, the realisation of it
varies according to the position of articulation of the character
which follows it, and also with the custom of speakers in different
parts of India. The anusvarah preceding an antahstha character is
realised as follows:
Before If , ya
Before T > ra
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY 29
1 . 'nasal'. 2. See above, under 2.i. 3 . For transcription of examples, see p. 52. . The lines a, b and c correspond to the notes given above under 3»i. L. Gitagovindakavyam, sarga 3 > v . 6 o
The anusvarah preceding an uusman character is realised thus:
Before J[ , Ja , as n , m , n , or v; e.g.
^T"5T sgJ"8» sm/s, an/a or avj"a
Before "5T > sa , as n , m , nasalisation of the vowel, or vj e.g.
haviirjsi, haviimsi., haviisi or haviivsi
Before , sa , as n , m , n , or v; e. g.
^FI^IR sansara, samsara, sansara or savsara,
or as nasalisation of the vowel, as in
"f^f^TT hirjsa, himsa, hivsa or hisa
i j f ^ f punsi, pumsi, pusi
Before ^ , ha , as rj , m , n , or v; e. g.
"f^^" sinha, simha, sinha or sivha
or as nasalisation of the vowel in ^ " l * > sayha
The sign is sometimes written above a character preceding an
antahstha or an uusman character to indicate realisation by nasal-
ising the vowel of the syllable instead of by a nasal consonant,
following the vowel. This sign is called ^ - J - H f^cp> (anunasika1),
and it is usually written, in preference to the anusvarah, in the
'sacred syllable' \Q* , (orrj)2
3
Reading examples
a. fifr W " § ^ r i f t ^ c r <Tf w ^PFCRN
b. ft«r -qff ^ * t n i%i^crs 3?fcr*r | « ^TCTCTs ^TTH H o f l H ^TffcT
ami ^ T c n » r i ^ T r ^ t t "*?wf^r i
30 S A N S K R I T SECTION
ii. visargah , •fcfH'fc 1
The visargah is written as two dotsj placed vertically, after a
character.
ah ah ih
cfr cBT: fcB: kah kah kih
Calligraphy
The visargah is usually added to a character after every other
stroke has been made, including the head-stroke.
e-g- ch ch) cfit CWT:
The realisation of the visargah varies in different parts of India
a. It may be realised as strong aspiration following the realisation
of the character with which it is written, for example
JFFOT %
devah malah kavih guruh kaveh gunayh bhanoh gavh
It is realised in this way when it occurs medially, as in
^:^q*T^ , duhkham; or as the doubling of the following consonant,
as in r P T i ^ » tapahsu, tapassu.
b. . It may be realised in final position as h following the vowel of
the character with which it is written, and a very short repetition
of the same vowel after h , as illustrated by this transcription of
the examples given above:
devah9 malaha kavih1 guruhu kavehe gunayh1 bhanoh0 gavhu
1. 'emission of breath'
iih uh uuh rrh eh ayh oh avh
kiih kuh kuuh krh keh kayh koh kavh
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY 31
Reading examples1
ofi: W 3* W %
7 J - C T T : ^ffT:. « T T | : f^h ^ f ^ ' ffi
^ftrj ^ g f o r fq-rT: ^rw-. w : o t > w t n
.^P :^T* ^mtf^rTTi ^ f c T t s f ^ o R : c P ^ f s T T :
^ife ^gfr TO^t ^rerr^ ^ r f f c r ^ t f r r W ^ c r ^ ^ T ^ i
U. The Complete Syllabary
The complete syllabary, arranged in the traditional order, is
given on the following page. The characters are further arranged in
a .table in which the vowel characters, and the two modifiers added to
the character , are placed in order at the head of a series of
columns consisting of every consonant character in the Qkarg form,
each consonant character with each of the vowel signs and each of the
modifiers.6 These two tables together show the order in which the
characters are placed as initial characters of words in dictionaries.
Characters with the onusvaroh are, however, placed before characters
without the onusvarah but followed by another consonant character.
1. For transcription, see p.52. 2. BhagavadgTta,ch.10,v.1„a. 3. ibid., ch,10,v.U.b. h. GTtagovindakavyam, sarga l,v.8. 5. ibid., sarga 1.3,v.7. 6. Cf. the series of characters with
vowel signs given above under 2.ii.
32 S A N S K R I T S E C T I O N
1 I 3 % # *
3? at
Z 5 3 %
55
5. The Devanagari numerals
Hindi forms: ^ =1 3 I % c
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 1 0
Bombay forms: ft A * <3 vs C *o
1 2 3 K 5 6 7 8 9 1 0
6 , Punctuation
In prose writing, the end of a sentence is marked with a vert-
ical stroke of the same height as the characters. In verse, the first
line of a stanza or couplet is closed with one vertical stroke, and
the complete stanza or couplet is closed with two vertical strokes
and numbered as illustrated in the verse examples given at the end of
the next chapter.
C H A P T E R 3
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
Consonant characters may "be combined to represent two or more
consonants realised without any intervening vowel. A character
formed by combining other characters is called a conjunct character,
H^TblT5HHy ( ssrrjyuktakssrsm).
1, Construction of Conjunct Characters.
Characters may be combined in various ways, according to the
form of the characters to be joined.
i. The second character may be subscribed to the first:
k- ko kka rj- ka nko Xs tt 9 d ~ V 9 ^ v 9
ii. If the first character has an upright stroke, this stroke may be
omitted, and the first part of the first character is joined to the
second character by the head-stroke, thus:
n- da ndo g- gs ggo t- ps tpa n- mo nms
The characters o F " , and ^ are usually joined with following
characters in the forms o f , * F and ^ .
Some conjunct characters may be formed by either of these two
methods, for example: ^ ^ ^ o r — j - v3T ^ ^ o r w f C- C9 CCS j- V J9 j J9
34 S A N S K R I T SECTION
i. and ii. ; for example:
d- dho ddha d-bho dbha
iii. If the first character is a rounded character, with no upright
stroke, it is usually written in full, and the second character is
joined with it in a modified form, for example:
t~ y® tys d~ y° dy® n_" y& ny® n ~ m o ^ m e
iv. Some characters are written in a special form when joined with
other characters, for example:
/- ve J V G r- ths rtho g- ro gre J"- re /re
The characters (Hindi form) and j j f (Bombay form), represent-
ing k-so , and the character , representing j-ji9 , have been in
eluded in the syllabic series from a very early date, though no con-
junct characters are included in the syllabary. Calligraphically
these three characters are not formed by joining two distinct charact
ers, but they are considered in this work under the appropriate
classes of conjunct characters because they represent syllables con-
sisting of two consonants and the vowel 9 .
If any characters are not modifiable, and therefore cannot be
combined, by any of these methods, the realisation of them without an
intervening vowel is indicated by writing the first character with
the viramsh, thus 3 ^ ^ 5 ^ ^ ^ ^ W ci^T
t- k9 t k 8 3~ d 8 3 d 9 <i- bre dbr9
Some conjunct characters are formed by a combination of methods
C O N J U N C T C H A R A C T E R S 3 5
Characters combined with other characters in this way do not form
conjunct characters in calligraphy, but they are included in this
chapter because they complete certain series in the classes of con-
junct characters.
Three, four or five characters may be combined to form a conjunct
character, for example:
rT n ~Q 7^ * X ST *v* T 1 Z V " g r f \ \ V V \ \ \ t - m - yo tmyo b - dh - va bdhva r - s - \ - ya rstye
The general rules already given for the order of strokes in writ-
ing a character apply also to the conjunct characters. The vowel
signs are added to the character before the headstroke is written.
Examples: ktyu oj- o | - c o | - r ^ |
stvi I I*- IVc©! f ? r « |
RJYAIRJ \J V R ^ | \rM\ VTIJF"
2 . Contexts of Conjunct Characters.
Conjunct characters occur in the following contexts:
i. In words, such as
<HfiT: <%PT: WfT^ ^ iccha agnih ksiprah brahmen Jlokah strii
ii. In junctions arising from grammatical processes:
a. In words formed by the addition of suffixes to verbal roots,
such as
bhaj-ta bhakta gam-ya gamya labh-tva labdhva
36 S A N S K R I T S E C T I O N
1. Bhagavadgita, Ch.l2.v.l2.
b. In derivatives of various kinds, such as
diva dayvyam Juura Javryam
c. In words formed "by the addition of prefixes or suffixes to
other words, as in
ut-tama uttama ut-gamah udgamah abhi-asah abhyasah
dur-guna durguna vi-adhih vyadhih vac-maya vanmaya
iii. In compound words, in which the final character of one part of
the compound word, if it is a halanta character, is joined with the
initial character of the following part, as in
sat - masah sanmasah rc - vedah rgvedah
Jriimat - bhagavat - giita /riimadbhagavadgiita
iv. In pieces consisting of two or more words, in which a conjunct
character is written joining the final character of one word, if it is
a halanta character, with the initial character of the following word.
For example:
Jreyo hi jjianamabhyasa j jjianaddhyanam vijisyate,
« q T ^ T c c F > c ^ ^ T r * T P T T - * £ H I Pel ^ ^ T ^ c R H II ft II
dhyanatkarmaphalatyagastyagacchantiranantaram. 12.
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 37
The process of joining characters illustrated in ii. to v. above
is known as 'sandhi' 'of consonants"1'. The examples in ii.a. and ii.b.
illustrate the process of 'internal' sandhi, and those in ii.c, iii.
and iv. illustrate that of 'external' sandhi.
3 . Classification of Conjunct Characters.
The conjunct characters are arranged in this work in classes
according to the combination of consonants which occurs when the con-
junct character is realised in reading. The conjunct characters,
when arranged in this way, fall into four classes.
Class 1. Two similar characters joined.
Class 2 . Two vorgiiys characters joined.
Class 3 . Characters joined with sntshsths characters in various
combinations:
i. Characters joined with
ii. Characters joined with ~3[
iii. Characters joined with
a. preceding "<[ > or b. following T
iv. Characters joined with 2
a. preceding oT ; or b. following oT
Class h. vargiiys characters joined with uusmen characters:
i. Characters joined with
a. preceding ST , or ; or b. following , "Cf or^T
ii. Characters joined with a. preceding |J ; or b. following |*
1. Compare reference to 'sandhi' of vowels, in Chapter 2 , 2 . i . 2. The Vedic character oo" , X s » i s included in this class.
38 S A N S K R I T SECTION
Class 1. Two similar characters joined^.
M « R 4 M -kks -kkhs -ggs -gghs "SSI9 -CCS -cchs • jjhs —
1 "tt9 -tts -tths -dds -ddhs -nns
<s><s{
"PPS -pphs -bbs -bbhs -mms
ocf w -yys -lis 3
-vvs- -SS& -sss -sss — Alternative forms UU| &
-CCS - DJs -jjhs -nn9 -lis
The characters > T and do not occur in this series. The
second and fourth characters in each vsrgsh are formed by combining
the slpsprans characters with the corresponding mshaprans characters.
Reading examples .
S O F ^ t : ^ b ^ r s t z : ^ t N t * snf^r ftgfrr^
"q%oRr o7| "«r^aT faquui 3 T T I T ^Pm-
3 ^ * T « ff|T« ftrT ftWoT: ^ T S | s
*rs$PT: ^arfrk ^FTtf: ^ T T ^ f ^ : c T ^ ^
§^fto (f«^5T) $ M I ^ (^^5^] ^TCTO ^gfaBT*
1. Conjunct characters which do not occur- initially are indicated by prefixing a hyphen in the roman transcription.
2. This character occurs only in the grammatical term given in the reading examples.
3. This character occurs only in combination with preceding T . U. Transcription of examples is given,on p.52. N
C O N J U N C T C H A R A C T E R S
Class 2. Two vergiiy© characters joined.^
i. ©ghos© and ghosovst characters, excluding ©nunasik© characters:
vsrgsh ©ghos 0 ghosovst
ko -- CO
-kco
—
-kcho
— —
-gjh©
—
ko - Z -\t?
-kto -tko -ktho -tkho -go;© -d g© -gdh© -a gh©
ko - cT - to
-kto -tko -ktho -tkho -gd©
¥ -dgo -gdh© -dgh©
Wi ko
- T - P©
-kpo -pko -kph© -pkho -gba -bg© -gbh© -bgh©
CO - S - t 8
—
-{co
—
-tcho
— -^.DO
— -djh©
CO - H - p©
— -pco
— -pcho -b jo
——
-b jh©
Z - rT - to 2
-tto -tto -tthe -ttho -dd© -dcje -qdh©
tt
-ddh©
t 9
- T - po
-tP° -Pt 8 -tpho -pfho -db© -bo;© -dbh© -bdh©
to - H - po
-tpo -pto -tpho -ptho -dbo -bd© -dbh© -bdh©
1 . Many of these conjunct characters occur only in external sandhi. 2. This combination occurs in the character combining ~g , < = p and .
40 S A N S K R I T SECTION
f 1 f f ^3T -nke -nkh© -ngho -jice -jicho -P-J© -njh©
TO TO TO
-n t 9 - n t h 9 -n<l9 -nta -nth© -nd© -ndh©
-mpa -mpha -mb© -mbh©
Alternative forms Tig TTJJ
-jijh© -i].t9 - I l t n 9 "^TA9 -ncjh©
These characters, representing a preceding homorganic nasal
consonant, are usually written in preference to the ©nusvarsh placed
on the preceding character, of which examples have been given above^.
The following examples illustrate the contexts in which the ©nusvarsh
may be written, and in which it is not written:
^TcT^cr ft^rfrt: 1^n%. ^Trt
pstsnti^ vinsnjtih or vin©ntih3 lsbhsnte^ ©njte or ©nte^
b. ©nunasik© character following.
^ ? ^ i ? ? ? ^ «r -cji© jn© ~th:n© -djhn© -tn© -thn© -dn©^ -dhn© -pm© -bhm©
The character 3T is not calligraphically a conjunct character,
and is found, from an early date, included in the syllabic series of
characters^. In realisation, however, it belongs to this class of 1. See above, Ch.2,3.i.b. 2. Verbal forms. 3. Non-verbal forms. k. The combination (J - *f more usually becomes «5T in sandhi. 5. See above, Ch.2,l.xiii.
ii. Characters of each vsrgsh joined with a preceding or following
©nunasik© character of the same vorgoh.
a. onunasiko character preceding.
C O N J U N C T C H A R A C T E R S 41
-UT -ita
-bhno -ita
-kno -bhno
-no sR W "9 kne -khno gno ghno -pne -bno -bhno
-T koM 71? -me
-kmo -khmo -gmo -ghmo -cms -jmo -dmo
-tmo' -dme -dhmo
iv. Two onunasiko characters of different vorgoh.
g*r • *pt ^ ?r -nno -nmo -nno -nmo -nmo -mno mno
Alternative forms of the conjunct characters in iii. and iv. are
formed with " O T , e.g. " U T T -g^o V T T f -bhno T ^ J f -rang U H -ipio .
1. It i s more usual to write ^of before characters of the co-vorgoh.
conjunct characters. In the order of words in dictionaries, words
"beginning with are placed between words beginning with and
those beginning with^T^T.
iii. Characters joined with a preceding or following onunasiko
character of a different vorgoh:
a. onunasiko character preceding.
R • •' ^ ^ ^ % -nbho -nko -ngo -nco -n jo -nphe -nbho
Most characters may occur joined with preceding , on account
of the frequent occurrence of formative particles ending in *T .
^ , no , also may occur with many characters in external sandhi.
b. onunasiko character following.
42 S A N S K R I T SECTION
1 . For transcription of examples, see p . 5 2 . Examples illustrating characters which could occur in sandhi arising from the sequence of words in a sentence are placed between hyphens.
2 . The first character represents dvi . See Class 3«ii«
Reading examples
i . c i i c m h w ^ f c w i ^ t ^ r - ^ ^ f e r r r ^ r r - s F ^ t ^ r t s t ^ ^ t ^
oTT6FTB^THN - s p ^ ^ f T ^ - o B ^ o ^ T t T T ^ S ^ f W :
^3$«rh ^ S J T ^ C T f e 5^T5F5T ^ F > * T ^ S T T f ^ f ^ S S F f v T : .
ll.a. ^ | f : ^ T f : fi^T T T f : ^ F ^ f T ^ ^ T : « B ^ W
^ R T : c R T O : -q-f ferT: < j fu& ^ F r D TpSJcfi ^ = 3 R ^ S T :
^TT^T I T F R N %^Tf rT IfTfa T « R KVTT ^STlfc* ^ T I ^ R
?r#q w ftirw taring
iii. a. ^ f T ^ f o ^ J ? :
b. arcr ^mr ^rfrt ^ngj: iRf: ^ T l f r t ^TTFtfr t W W ^ f ? ^ f t m f ^ R ^ f ^ T : ^ T ^ : f f * T
iv. f ^ H T * ? . S T T f ^ f ^ T T * T : 2 W T T O : ^ F i R v W l f r T ¥TcT
C O N J U N C T C H A R A C T E R S 43
^ 5 s
TO
kyo khyo ,gy© ghyo -gy9 cy© -chy© jyo • jhy©
• T O
-ty9 -t hy 9 -dj© -djiy© n y 9 ty© thy© dy© dhy© nyo
TO py© -phyo hy© hhy© my©
• TO TO
(yyo)1 -ry© ly© vy© /ye -sys sy© hy©
Examples of conjunct characters of Classes 1. and 2. with 3.i. 5« q r
-nny© -tty© -tmy© -pty© -gdhy© -dhhy© -hjy©
Reading examples.
3 ^ * F ? f r f o F j q - ^ ^ W c S ^ W ^ F T arrS T ^ T E W cZTFHT
^ I ^ F T ^ f r *T-pT: ^ F * T W N ^<TO
• H v q T ^ # ^ ^ T : f % ^ T f ^ T T r T ^ f c T H . % ^ « W X ^ T T f T c ^ R .
1. See under Class 1, 2. The superscribed stroke in this character represents r preceding another consonant. 3. For transcription see p. 53. k- The first character represents Jla . See below under iv.b. 5. NTtisatakam, verse 3.a.
Glass 3 « Characters joined with ©ntohsth© characters.
i. Characters joined with following .
44
ii.
S A N S K R I T SECTION
Characters with following 5J* .
TO TO
kve khvo gvo ghvo -nvs — CVS -chvs dvs jhvs
? f TO TO TO TO
-tvo -thvs -d vs -djivs -nvo tvs -thvs dvs dhvs nvs
o c j
-pvo -tvo -bhvo -mvo
TO 1
-rvo
TO TO f yvs
1 -rvo Ivo ( -wo) svs svs hvs
and do not occur in this series. ^ preceding another
character occurs in o X X J " , -vne, ?T > -vne , 9T , vrs4" and ^ , vis .
Examples of conjunct characters of Classes 1. and 2. with 3.i. and ii.
TO o^f ^ TO ©TO T T O -ttvo -rvvs -cchvs -ktvs -dvys -bdhvs -gdhys
Reading examples.^
oT p ^"?r^T Tf|€T Tf*TN ^ r^rftrT 3 % 5 f
^ f f ^ c T " H M I 5F53T ^ T * i ; f t * 5 R ^ F * f t : ^ T P J c f t Hl" ^c^T--
^€^ T o^€oTr ^ T F ^ T "^TWr W ^ t T %TTfcT TTToWT7 VJI£;cUh7
1. For the superscribed stroke in this character, see below, in iii.a. 2. See -vvs in Class 1. 3. For this form of J"s see Ch. 2,1. iii. U. See below, under iii.b. 5. See below, under iv.b. 6. For transcription of examples, see p.53. 7. The initial characters
in these words represent gro and pro . 8. From BhagavadgTta, Ch.6,v.kl.a.
C O N J U N C T C H A R A C T E R S 45
iii. Characters joined with preceding or following .
a. preceding another character.
To represent preceding another character a stroke is super-
scribed on the character before which r is to be realised. This
stroke is called "V^T: , rephoh, the name given to the character ^ .
repheh in this form may be written with any character, but it does
not occur with or ,
*• -* £ I * $ I
-rko -rco -r^o -rts -rpo -ryo -r/o -rho
Some of the characters, particularly TTf , , \jf , ?T > C$ >
S>[ , «[ , Xf , and ^" , ax-e frequently doubled when written with
repheh. This practice is found in Hindi writing, but is not usual
in Marathi writing. Examples:
**f ^ € ^ ^ ^ ^ -rgge -rjjo -rtte -rddho -rmms -ryye -rvve
Characters written with vowel signs and repheh:
«bF f«& ^ ^ ^ -rka -rki -rkii -rku -rke -rkey -rko -rkev
and with repheh and onusvaroh:
ciF f<l ^ «fc <fc -rkairj -rkirr) -rkiiirj -rkuirj -rkerq -rkeyrrj -rkevm,
The repheh is placed above the upright stroke of a character, or
above the raid-point. It is always written to the right side of any
other superscribed stroke, as shown in the examples given below. It is
written also with the vowel character «|J . as in the word Pl^fci: .
1, repho, 'rough'; rephoh, 'a rough sound'.
4 6 S A N S K R I T S E C T I O N
Characters with rephoh are written as shown in these examples:
rki ft t * rkii ebl «Kl rke <*> % % rko o^l * T rkiir] ft rkovrrj
In Bombay writing 'the character representing -rho is sometimes
written as , though the use of this stroke for rephoh is more rare-
ly used in writing Sanskrit than in writing Marathi.
b. following another character.
To represent ^ following another character, a diagonal stroke
is placed against the upright stroke of those characters that have
one, or beneath the mid-point of the lower part of a rounded
character.
SB - HI — V <* — kr© gr© -ghr© -nro — p
-chr© jr© —
5 -— — ST W
-tro3 - -cjr© — tr© thr© dr© dhr© -nr©
- 5T sT pro — br© bhr© mr© vr© Jr© sr© hr© Examples of conjunct characters of Classes 1. to 3.ii. with 3.iii.
TO TO TO 5?T
-ktre -tpr© -rty© -dry© -rdhv© rdr© -ntry© -rdhny©
1. See above, Ch.2,2.ii. Vowel signs. 2. This combination occurs in the character joining and . 3. S and ^ are combined in the character representing^ "5f , Z and" " . k. For this form of , see Ch.2,1. iii. s s
C O N J U N C T C H A R A C T E R S 47
iv. Characters combined with preceding cT or following
a. '(FT preceding another character.*
TO TO c L h TO TO TO -Ike -lge -lpe -lpho -Ibe -lbhe -lme
TOT TO Vedic - U s -lse -Ihe -Ihe
b. oT following another character.
~% $ kl© gls -chle -<|lo pie ble bhle
5?T or 3 r T ^ mlo vie Jle h i s
Most of these characters may be written either by method i.
by method ii., described earlier in this chapter.^"
1. For transcription, see p.53. 2 . For oT joined with entohstho characters, see i. to. iii. above. 3 o Vedic o"5 is included in this class. h. See above, 1. Construction of Conjunct Characters...
Reading examples''"
a. rp£: ^ £ OPFFQ" ^TT§- W&fr J F F ^ F E W ^ T ^ T : ftsfo;
^ T ^ n ^ ^ ^ ^ f l T 7l1*?cT
3>f& cFF>fc SRRF^oR ^ £ T T ^ c T ^ J : ^ o f a 3 $ R * T
I fl^T ^ w£ 3Tl£ ^ H ^ R ^ T f t ^ P T T T f t ^ -qrPSETc^T
48 S A N S K R I T S E C T I O N
*r 3
F-TO TO
J -Jks -J*c© -Jcho J"ne •J"pe Jm©
*r s-
TO S TOT
-sks sthe -sn© -?P8 -sphe -sm©
TO T 3 f TFT F T ¥ 7 TO? TO
sko skho -sjo sto stho sno spo sph© sm©
1 . For transcription, see p . 5 k . 2 . Vairagyasatakam, v . 6 2 . 3 . These characters may be written with either or &f .
Examples of conjunct characters of Classes 1 . to 3 *iii. with 3 . i v .
r f j SWT -tplo -tkl© -cchlo -Ibhy©
Reading examples.1
^F^T xrc^J T^^T ^ c * T W ^1^BH" JPTFT
^T c b : f^>- ' fR ^ r ^ | p r ^ ^ T : 3 ^
T%*JTE: T T ^ - ^ q : t c R i t f ^ r f ^ r * T I I W 2
Class 2|. vorgiiyo characters joined with preceding or following
uusmon characters.
i. Characters joined with 7£T > T o r • a« > o r preceding another character.
The following characters occur in this series, some occurring
only in external sandhi.
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 49
TOT TOT - n / o
M 2 TO TO - n s o - p s o
TO - n s o - t s o - n s o - p s o
Js s
- k / o - n / o
* or 1
so kso
so * - k s o ~ t S 8
The c h a r a c t e r ^ has been i n c l u d e d i n the s y l l a b i c s e r i e s from
an e a r l y d a t e , and i s n o t c a l l i g r a p h i c a l l y a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r . 3 In
the order of words i n d i c t i o n a r i e s , words b e g i n n i n g w i t h T^T are
p l a c e d ^after words b e g i n n i n g w i t h £f} •
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s of C l a s s e s 1. - 3. w i t h C l a s s h.
"R "? f W M c^T TFT s t r o _ ? t r 9 ~ ? t v 9 ksi^o -ksmo - s t v o - t s t h o - t s n o
TTO HTO TP? 7 ^
s t r y o - t smyo - r s t y © - r t s n y e
C a l l i g r a p h y : kso , Bombay form - $ §f. fcj $J
Reading examples^
a. W * T * k N 3 ^ C = T f i ^ T ^ ^ c T
f ^ R o T ^ C R ; * £ t W ^ f > T T T ^ f e r T S T F ^ TcT5q" f^rfcT: ^ f t
1. Bombay form. 2. T h i s c o m b i n a t i o n u s u a l l y becomes g".^jf . 3. Cf .note on $T , C1.2 . i i . b . k. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 5^. s
E
b. , or f o l l o w i n g a n o t h e r c h a r a c t e r .
The f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r i n t h i s s e r i e s , some o c c u r r i n g
only in e x t e r n a l s a n d h i .
2
SO S A N S K R I T S E C T I O N
1, For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 5 h . Uo BhagavadgTta, c h . l , v . 2 6 . 6 „ i b i d . , c h . 5 ? v . 8 .
2 „ R i g v e d a , 1. 3. i b i d . , 2 5 o i b i d . , ch.3»v. 2 5 . 7 . NTt i satakam, v . l i 8 .
i i . onunas iko c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g "j?" or f o l l o w i n g ^
a. f p r e c e d i n g *tj , ^ and If . ^ ^
-hno hno -hmo
b . ^ f o l l o w i n g ^ . and ? f t
-rjho -nho
Reading e x a m p l e s . 1
^fj fr t ^ f | : | ^ ffTfPST Tn^fTrT: [PTfTrT:] ^ S F *Tu%
^ W ^ ^ I ^ H I - ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ T ^ f ^ T r T « r \ \^ \ \ k
f ^ ^ w m s T T ^ I ^ r ^ s R W f R ; II w i 5
TRANSCRIPTION
T r a n s c r i p t i o n , o f R e a d i n g Examples
Chapter 2 .
1. i . do dho t o pho mo po no co c{© go ke bho jo bo gho cho tho kh© jh© n©
bh©-];© p©d© dhsn© k©cj© m©"(;h© phsn.© gh©n© khoc d©dh dem© chsd jhsg© j©cj© ph©"|;o poth© bot© ch©g© p©c]h gh©"|;© g©n©
gsmeke j e g e t cei]©k© methon© gh©"|;©k© p©|h©k© dsmsth© dhe"|;ok© k©p©"(;© bh©j©k© g©r|©k© k s t h s m kh©j©k© p©d©k©
chedon©m p©n©n©m n©"|;©n©m k s t h s n s m bhsnonem jenopode gemonem p©"(;h©nem dhon©m©d© jh©n©jh©n©m jh©i\© jhsr^sm
l . i i . v© ye r e l o bo th© kh© t©
l e v e j©l© khsre ved jhsr© b©lo v e r e ' ron© v©"|;h lobh yev© dhore l©y© j h s r o r©"|; ran© ph©l rsth©
t e r o l e l©v©n© bhsysm dhsvol© j©"|;h©r© c s r s n e d^emsr© nskhere l e g a t e c©p©l© b h s v s t nsysn© v©c©r© l©"|;©bh©
yemevot vsysnsm g©r©l©m p©d©k©m©l© k©p©"|;©vecen©m
l . i i i o s© h© s© /© p© c|© r© kh©
/ e r e seh© £©t v©/© h©s jh©s© r©s© v©s J*eve s e t Jo^he k e / o k©s© /©s h©y© h©r© jhss© bhss©
s o r e l e k©l©/© j s h s t -v©y©s /©path© s©m©y© bshel© /©l©bh© y©/©s /©r©{© s e p h e l e s©r©s© h©r©k© per©/© r©bh©s© hstsk©
de/eroth© /©ke^em s©v©y©s k s l s h s m /©ssnsm /©t©/©s j e l o c e r e s • noved©/ek©m s©h©g©m©n©m k©molov©d©n© d©/©/©t©m
2 0 i . e i u © r i i uu o ©y 1 a ©v rr
oth©. i s u t eke in© o t ©d ©y/o rdh uuh edho i i J© uche evm rn© uucjh© i h e us ed ©1 ©vm okh r c oyn© udon rn©m i i s e t uuhenem rsobh© evs©dh©m ©yssmss up©k©r©nem
2 o i i < » n i i bhuu gey s r da j i g o v pey me duu kr ch i nev hoy b h i i / r r / i i dr h i hr
duuro b h i i to ram© cor© t i n dos© / r t© dhrt© ruuc|h© g©yre k r / pevl© k i p drcjh© pur© phen© m©vl© k r r t p i t r mem duugi b h i i t i h r d i guru v r t h a / i / u s e t u otu i i t i e t e v r t u i t i uuru r s i e n i i ii"Le
52 S A N S K R I T SECTION
b h u u s i t a v i j e s a upaya vaybhava p i t r r n pavrusa r u c i r a bhavmika kumarii j h a t i t i t h a l i n i i r i rus i ta avsadhi k a y k e y i i j h i r i k a v i d h a t r u ayhika c^halin surabhi khacjika h e ^ a t e
ekakin h r s i k e / a i t i h a s a k a v / a l e y a v i s u u c i k a p a v r a n i k a d e v a n a g a r i i anunas ika avpanisada u p a j i i v i k a a v p a d e / i k a u p a n i v e / i k a avpanay ika k o - p i r t e - p i ya J"o-paya J*a
3 . i . kin] marrj sukharrj harirr) mrtair) tanum, shorn evarrj rsiinarrj cjirnba panjcju layrrjgam djiumdhi jrrnbh jharrjjha kirrjcit kavmteya sarrjyamana sairjvat mairjsa janjyu. sainruuc|ha s a m l i i n a arrjhati
tamahair) h r d i sairjgatamani Jarrj bhr/air) ramayami kirn vane-nusarami tamiha kinj v r t h a vil9pami
3 . i i . kgh chgh t n s n jhah ayh oh uuh rh navh sah gunah d h r t i h bahuh n i t eh nrpayh viduh Jrn^ih purusah manahsu h i v i h s u dhenubhih v i / e s a t a h amjatah arrjtahkaranam samaduhkhasukhah Junah/epah j a g a t o h i t a h mato-dhikeh tejorrj-Jsh behevoirj-buvegah yogomayasomavrteh garrjgataranjgahima.f i ikaraj' i i talani jayadevapanjcjitakaveh. pan_cjitanarrj sama je-parrjc(ita mavnarr) bhajeyuh bhuya eva mahabaho Jrnu. me par amain vacah. sukhair) duhkharrj bhavo-bhavo bhayarrj cabhayameva ca v a h a s i v a p u s i v i j a d e vasanarrj jaladabharrj h a l a h a t i b h i i t i m i l i t a y a m u n a b h a m k e j a v a dhrtaha ladharar impa jaya j a g a d i i / a hare m a d h a v i k a p a r i m a l a l a l i t a navamalat i jatisugarrjdhav munimanasamapi m o h e n a k a r i n i i taruni ikar inabamdha v
Chapter 3 » C l a s s 1 .
thakknrah kakkha^a drggocarah vaggh i t i n n a t i n uccayh i c c h a r a j j u h u j j h a t i p a ^ t i k a l a ^ h o ua^din© sed^ha visani^a vis©nr|© uttom© u t t h i t a u d d e / a h buddhih bhinna p i p p a l a h phupphuiisah abfcmh abbhogah sammatih sarrjmohah Jayya u l l e k h a h tacchrn u sannaddh© d u j / i i l a ( d u h / i i l a ) J a t a y u s s u (J"atayuhJ"u) j a s s a r a j a h Jubharrjllokan
Clas s 2. i . v a k c a l a vakchalam pr thag janah vagjha"|;iti v a k ^ i i k a s©"|;kon© satkhetakam vagc^ambarah khac^gah vagdjisvkate dvid^ghora b h a k t i h utka"|;a uktham u t k h a t a h r d g a t a sadguna dagdha udgha"(;aka vakpa^u vakphalam kakupkhalu prthagbhavah kakubguruh kakubghora sat .caranah satjchavih sad^jah sad^jha^it i apcarah kakupchavih kubja k a k u b j h a ^ i t i sacjdevah sacjdha s a t p s t i f/up-tiika ^atphana sacjbahu kakup"|;hakkurah abc|imbha sacjbhaga kakubcjhavkate utpanna s a t p h a l a h gupta udbodhaka
udbhavah Jabdah labdha b h a g a v a d g i i t a sarrjyukta adbhuta madbhakta b u d d h i -
yukta sacchabdah
TRANSCRIPTION 53
i i . a . gijkgh Jgijkhgh lirjggm sgijghgh s s j i c s y a h vajicha g p j i i r g h jhgnjha ghui\t9h k9i\th8h pgi\cjitgh ^huijdjiih g n t g h pgnthgkg sundgrg indhgh ksmpgng gumphgti sgmbgndhgh argmbhgh pgrjktih grunddha
b . yacjia jnangm he-|;h:nati hedjiinati rgtngm m9thna budhnat i papmgn t g j p e y s sgjijjia sgrrjjjia v i / e s g j j i g j i j n a s u
i i i . a. udgrjbhih mghankgvih drunphuh drunbhuh
b . rk ip rugrig g r b h n a t i J s k n o t i cgkhnutuh agn ih v ighng mrcjnati apnot i sbnabhgh rukmii^ii vagmin vgcmih gjmgh kudmglg atmgn pgdma dhmatg drbhmgs dgdhmgv
i v . diijnaggh vaijmgyg dvirvnalgh S9i\masgh jgnmgn rgmiiati rrmatg
Class 3.
i . vekygm khyatg vgyragygm J l a g h y g udgrjygj'gh c y u t g vapchyg j y o t i s u j j h y g t i kapQ^ysn! J"a-|;hygm jad^ygm gvadhyg puipram t y a j y g pgthyg v idy a dhyangm ksnya apyg r i p h y g t e gbyonih gbhyasgh sgvmygm dhgyrygm gmuulyg vyuudjig d r / y g mgmisygh rghgsyg hygs
sgynygsyg sgnnyasgh sgrrjnyasgh c i n t y g buddhya t g j j y o t i s vgydggdhygm mahatmygm bhgktya kgvbjygm sghrdbhygh b h g g g v g n v y g k t i b e v g m e t g d y g t h a — t t h g guhygmgdhyatmgsgrrjjpitgm g jpgh sukhgmaradhygh sukhgtgrgmaradhygte
v i j e s g j j i g h i i . k v g c i t pgkkvanngm akhvoh pgvedgh l g g h v i i ucchvasg h u j j v g l g u j j h v g Igf/vgh ygdngtva sgcjvidhg drcjhvgm J"rr|ygn t v s r i t g p r t h v i i udvigng
dhvgnih gnv i tg apva gbvahgngrrr r ibhvgn cgmvoh y v a g u l i i s g r v g sgrvvg n g l v g h i i j v g r g h v i / v s svgkkgte gnusvargh hve v i h v g l g vidhvgrrjsgh dvgndvgh
tg t tvgm dugdhva Isbdhva uktva davna e t g d d h v a v l i n a t i gravida prarjvg/gh tygktva--tmgj"uddhye puiprgkrtarrj l lokanusitva J a j v g t i i h sgmah i i i . a , tgrkgh muurkhs vgrggh v g r g i i y g d i i r g h g Jarrjgg c g r c a muurchi tg
arjungh n i r j h g r g h dardhygm vgr iph k g r t r v y g r t h g durdgyvgm grdhg mgnurnamg grpgr^gm d u r -
b g l g g g r b h i t g uurmih kgrmmgn dharmikg p g r y g n t g pgrygrrjtg suurygh durlgbhg puurvg
s s r w © d g r / g n s m h©rs©h grhgt k i i r t i h ©h©rnij*©m uurdhv©m v s r j y © rrniurdhni rmiurdhnya-
dhayatmgngh n g y r r t i i durbuddhsyryuddh© J v e t s y r h s y s y r y u k t e vedsy©jnadhyaysnsyrn©
dangyrng C9 b, vikr©m©h agr©hah J i i g h r g p r a i j r a t r i i krcchr© vgjrgm p s v ^ r g h
f g t r u h drgvygm dhruv© pr©y©tn©h premna brniv© b h r a t r ngrnrg v r s j s h Jujruusa s r g j v a
hrgsvg hr©sv© hrsy hirrjsrg Jraddhg ardr© ardr© dar idrygm daridrygm s©rrjhriir]©
e t g c c h r u t v a digvr©t©m sgtjtrirrjjg y©tpr©mai]©m j©mbvamr©le
54 S A N S K R I T S E C T I O N
i v . u l k a phslgta s v s l p © ©lpspran© g u l p h i t © ulb© p r g g s l b h g h©lj"©bd©h h©ls©ndhih V9lh prag©lbhy©m j©"[hu mi'Lhuse klej"©h gl9V pl9V9 p i p l u h ©bling© kskubhlabhsh m l e c c h s h v l i n a t i J"lok©h J l e s 9 h s i h l s h h l a d s t e ucchlskh© utklej"©h u t p l s v ©
psresarrj cetarrjsi p r g t i d i v s s g m a r a d h y g bghu ha prssadsrrj kirrj neturrj v i / © s i hrdsy© kleJ©k©li l©m
pr©s©nne t v s y y s n t s h sv©y©mudit©cintam©nigune v imuktsh s©nk©lp©h k i m s b h i l s s i t s i r j p u s y s t i ri9 t e
C las s h.
i . a . aj*c©ry©m pr©/n©h Jm© Jru pusks l© blesk©m s r s t i h krsn© jyes-f/h© s t h y u u t g
puspsm nisph©!© uusman Jlesma ssrrjskrtg s k h s l i t © b h r o s j stsbdh© s t h i t i h s t r i i
©ntshsth© s n i g d h 9 sprs-);© s p h u u r t i h bhgsmg J"res"|;h©tv©m /cyut© drstjva d©rrjs"|;ra varsney© n©moste - s tu
b . p r a k j i r s s pr©ty©nj"ir©s tajijuka tan /uka S9"|;/astr9 r©pj*©te ©kssrsm t i r y s n s u s e t s s s t i h k s e t r s j j i © dikssm© l i ^ s u v s t s s h sug©ns©r©ti
sug©rjj;s©r©ti ksma J"l©ksn© u t k s i p t © bhsksy© m©tsy©h t s t s t h © ! © ksvet© ©pkrtsn© kar t snysm v i b h r s s t o / c h s n n © k©rm©ph©l©prepsurl©bdh©h n©bh©hspr J"©m dharstysm
e t s t k s e t r s m
i i . g r h n a t i v s h n i h hnute brahmen© p r a n h s s t s h prangh©st©h i s t .anbhanhi
©gnimii^e purohitsrrj y©jn©sy© devsmrtv i jsirj / hotarsrrj r©tn©dhat©m©m ©gnih puurvobhsrrs ibh ir i id^y o nuutsnsyrut© / s© devarrj eh© v s k s s t i
t©trap©Jy©ts th i tanparth©h p i t r r n s t h © pi tamshan acaryanmatulanbhrantrrputranp©vtrans©khirrjst©th©
s s k t a h k©rm©i|y©vidvarrjso y s t h a k u r v s n t i bharst© kuryadvidvarrjst©tha-s©kt©Jcikiirsurlok©s©ngr©h©m
n©yv© kirrjc i tk©romiit i y u k t o msnyet© t s t t v s v i t p© Jysn Jrnvsnspr /©n j i ghr ©nn© Jnsngscchsn s v©p©n J* v©s ©n
a j j i a k i i r t i h palsnsirj brahmanarrj dansrrj bhogo mitr©s©mr©ks©n©m c© yesamete s©c[guna n© p r s v r t t a h korth©stesairj p a r t h i v o p a / r s y e n ©
H I N D I S E C T I O N
C H A P T E R 1
ARRANGEMENT OF THE SYLLABARY
The Devanagari S c r i p t i s u s e d i n w r i t i n g Hindi ( ^ P ^ t ) and t h e
arrangement of the c h a r a c t e r s i n t h e s y l l a b a r y i s the same as t h e
S a n s k r i t a r r a n g e m e n t . 1 Some of t h e c h a r a c t e r s are u s e d o n l y i n w r i t i n g
Sanskr i t l oanwords , but most o f them may be found i n l i t e r a r y t e x t s .
Some of the c h a r a c t e r s are m o d i f i e d f o r r e p r e s e n t i n g sounds o c c u r r i n g
i n Pers ian and Arabic l o a n w o r d s .
The s c r i p t i s u s u a l l y r e f e r r e d t o a s sn^TsTtST (balabodh) , ' t h a t
can be understood by a c h i l d ' . Each c h a r a c t e r i s c a l l e d ^ ' T ^ l T
( e k s o r ) , and the s y l l a b i c s e r i e s i s c a l l e d cflffHIo'JI (vornomala ,
' c h a r a c t e r - s e r i e s ' ) . The terms u s e d by Hindi grammarians t o r e f e r t o
the s c r i p t are s i m i l a r t o t h o s e u s e d i n S a n s k r i t , but as the r e a l i s a t -
ion of the c h a r a c t e r s i n Hindi d i f f e r s somewhat from the S a n s k r i t
system i n r e s p e c t of consonant c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h the vowel o ,
t h e s e terms are u s e d i n t h i s s e c t i o n i n t h e Hindi form, and are t r a n -
s c r i b e d i n accordance w i t h the r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e c h a r a c t e r s i n H i n d i .
The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e t h e d i f f e r e n c e be tween the terms
used i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n and t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g terms used i n t h i s
s e c t i o n : S a n s k r i t ^SPqjR'^ ( o k s o r o m ) , Hindi SWGJIT ( o k s e r )
foTTT'R: ( v i r a m o h ) , fcfTPT (v iram)
'SFrTYfSr ( a n t a h s t h a ) , 3T^cT**T ( a n t a s t h )
The t a b l e g i v e n below i n t h i s c h a p t e r shows t h e arrangement of
the Hindi s y l l a b a r y i n roman n o t a t i o n . The sounds o c c u r r i n g i n Arabic
1. See S a n s k r i t , C h . l .
58 H I N D I S E C T I O N
and P e r s i a n l o a n w o r d s , and t h e i n t e r v o c a l i c r e a l i s a t i o n of the
c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d i n i t i a l l y as c|e and cjhe , are r e p r e s e n t e d i n
the roman n o t a t i o n a s f o l l o w s :
q , f o r t h e v o i c e l e s s u v u l a r p l o s i v e , 5f5
x , f o r the v o i c e l e s s v e l a r f r i c a t i v e ,
j , f o r t h e v o i c e d v e l a r f r i c a t i v e , TT
z , f o r the v o i c e d d e n t a l f r i c a t i v e , yT
f , f o r t h e v o i c e l e s s l a h i a l f r i c a t i v e ,
r , rh , f o r t h e r e t r o f l e x f l a p p e d c o n s o n a n t s ^ and
N a s a l i s a t i o n of v o w e l s i s shown by the s u p e r s c r i p t ~ .
As the Devanagari s y s t e m of w r i t i n g i s s y l l a b i c , and the c h a r a c t -
e r s i n the s y l l a b a r y r e p r e s e n t s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g e i t h e r of a vowel
or of a consonant f o l l o w e d by the vowel o , the roman t a b l e shows
each consonant w i t h t h i s v o w e l . This v o w e l , when r e a l i s e d w i t h a
consonant c h a r a c t e r , i s u s u a l l y r e f e r r e d to i n E n g l i s h t e x t s as the
' i n h e r e n t ' v o w e l 1 .
The s e r i e s of v o w e l s i n c l u d e s ' s h o r t ' i and ' l o n g ' i i , ' s h o r t '
u and ' l o n g ' uu . These p a i r s of vowe l s occur i n Hindi w o r d s , some
words b e i n g a lways w r i t t e n w i t h the ' s h o r t ' vowel and o t h e r s w i t h t h e
' l o n g ' vowel . There ar e c e r t a i n p a i r s of words which are d i s t i n g u i s h -
ed i n meaning by t h e w r i t i n g of the ' s h o r t ' or t h e ' l o n g ' v o w e l , and
o t h e r words i n which the ' short ' , or the ' l o n g ' vowel i s w r i t t e n , but
'no d i s t i n c t i o n i s made i n s p e e c h . In t r a n s c r i b i n g e x a m p l e s , t h e s e
vowels are w r i t t e n a s ' s h o r t ' or ' l o n g ' i n accordance w i t h Hindi
or thography , and n o t i n r e l a t i o n t o ' l e n g t h ' of spoken vowel s o u n d s .
1. See S a n s k r i t , C h . l .
ARRANGEMENT OF THE SYLLABARY
Hindi S y l l a b a r y i n Roman N o t a t i o n
59
CONSONANTS w i t h © 1
V e l a r 2
P a l a t a l 3
R e t r o -f l e x
k Denta l
5
L a b i a l
Pl
os
iv
es
Vo
icel
ess
Unasp ira ted ka 1 c© t 9 t© P©
Pl
os
iv
es
Vo
icel
ess
A s p i r a t e d kh© cho tha th© ph©
Pl
os
iv
es
Voi
ced Unasp ira ted go 3 © c | © 2 do b©
Pl
os
iv
es
Voi
ced
A s p i r a t e d gh© jha d h a 2 dh© bh© Pl
os
iv
es
Nasal (r j©) 3
( p © ) 3 na^" no m©
Semivowels. y o r© 1© 5
va
F r i c a t i v e s V o i c e l e s s x © 6 s©^ s©
F r i c a t i v e s Vo iced y © 6 z© 6
Asp ira te h©
VOWELS © a i i i e of 0 av
MODIFIERS Nasal - rrj and A s p i r a t e d - h '
Notes on the s y l l a b l e s marked 1 - 7 i n t h e above t a b l e :
1. The c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t i n g the s y l l a b l e ka i s m o d i f i e d t o r e p r e -
s e n t the uvular p l o s i v e , qa .
2 . The c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g t h e s e two s y l l a b l e s are m o d i f i e d to
r e p r e s e n t the medial and f i n a l r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s
60 H I N D I S E C T I O N
as f l a p p e d s o u n d s , w r i t t e n as r and rh i n the t r a n s c r i p t i o n .
3 . The c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g no and jio are n o t w r i t t e n a s
s i n g l e c h a r a c t e r s i n H i n d i , "but o n l y i n c o m b i n a t i o n w i t h o t h e r
c h a r a c t e r s , i l l u s t r a t e d below i n Chapter 3 .
h. The two c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g no and s o occur o n l y i n
S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , and do n o t occur i n i t i a l l y ,
5. The c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t e d by vo i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h l a b i o -
d e n t a l a r t i c u l a t i o n ; o r , i n i t i a l l y , as a b i l a b i a l p l o s i v e .
6. These s y l l a b l e s are w r i t t e n by m o d i f y i n g o t h e r c h a r a c t e r s which
r e p r e s e n t sounds somewhat s i m i l a r i n a r t i c u l a t i o n :
xa w i t h the c h a r a c t e r f o r kho ; f e w i t h the c h a r a c t e r f o r pha;
ye w i t h t h e c h a r a c t e r f o r go ; za w i t h t h e c h a r a c t e r f o r jo
7. This v o w e l , s y l l a b i c r , o c c u r s o n l y i n a few S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s .
C H A P T E R 2
CHARACTERS OP THE SYLLABARY
The c h a r a c t e r s of the Devanagar i S c r i p t u s e d i n w r i t i n g Hindi
are those g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n , w i t h t h e terms which are u s e d
by Hindi grammarians i n r e f e r r i n g t o them and t o t h e sor.nds which t h e y
r e p r e s e n t . The method of w r i t i n g t h e c h a r a c t e r s i s t h a t d e s c r i b e d i n
the I n t r o d u c t i o n , and i n t h e n o t e s on t h e c a l l i g r a p h y of s p e c i a l
c h a r a c t e r s as they are g i v e n i n t h e t a b l e s .
The c h a r a c t e r s , and the r e a l i s a t i o n of them i n r e a d i n g H i n d i , are
d i s c u s s e d i n t h i s c h a p t e r under t h e same h e a d i n g s as i n the S a n s k r i t
s e c t i o n : Consonant C h a r a c t e r s , Vowel C h a r a c t e r s and Vowel S i g n s ,
and M o d i f i e r s 1 .
1. Consonant C h a r a c t e r s .
The consonant c h a r a c t e r s a r e a r r a n g e d i n t h r e e g r o u p s : ' v e r g i i y *
c h a r a c t e r s , ' o n t e s t h 1 c h a r a c t e r s , and 'uusm' c h a r a c t e r s 2 . The c o n s o n -
ant c h a r a c t e r s , as they are g i v e n i n t h e s y l l a b a r y , are r e a l i s e d a s
s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g of an i n i t i a l c o n s o n a n t , or s e m i - v o w e l , f o l l o w e d
by the vowel © . Charac ters r e a l i s e d i n t h i s way are d e s c r i b e d as
^T^RTT (©kar) . The r e a l i s a t i o n o f a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r w i t h o u t t h i s
vowel , t h a t i s , as the c o n s o n a n t e l e m e n t of the s y l l a b l e o n l y , i s
i n d i c a t e d i n the s c r i p t by w r i t i n g a d i a g o n a l s t r o k e , known as the
1. See S a n s k r i t , C h . l . f o r t h e u s e o f t h i s term. 2 . See S a n s k r i t , Ch.2. R e f e r e n c e s a r e g i v e n throughout t h i s c h a p t e r
t o the d i v i s i o n s and s u b - d i v i s i o n s w i t h the c o r r e s p o n d i n g numbers i n Chapter 2. of the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
62 H I N D I S E C T I O N
1. See S a n s k r i t , Ch.2..1. 2. ©kar consonant c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , a s d e s c r i b e d below i n n o t e s a. - d . , a r e , however , n o t w r i t t e n w i t h t h e v i r a m , which i s u s e d ma in ly i n w r i t i n g c e r t a i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s . 3« See b e l o w , Oh.3.
h. See b e l o w , 3« i . © n u s v a r , 5. See b e l o w , 2 . i i .
foTTW ( v i r a m ) 1 a t t h e f o o t of the c h a r a c t e r t h u s , of) , k - , cT , t - .
The r e a l i s a t i o n o f akar consonant c h a r a c t e r s i n r e a d i n g Hindi
d i f f e r s i n some r e s p e c t s from the r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s i n
S a n s k r i t . The f o l l o w i n g n o t e s may be r e g a r d e d as g e n e r a l g u i d i n g
p r i n c i p l e s t o which r e f e r e n c e may be made l a t e r , when t h e c h a r a c t e r s
are d i s c u s s e d i n d e t a i l .
a. A f i n a l akar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o -
v o w e l , e x c e p t i n a few S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s .
b . A f i n a l okar c h a r a c t e r formed by combining two or more consonant
c h a r a c t e r s 3 , or a f i n a l okar consonant c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d e d by a
c h a r a c t e r w r i t t e n w i t h the onusvar r e p r e s e n t i n g a n a s a l c o n s o n -
a n t ^ , i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h an o - g l i d e .
c . A med ia l okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or
w i t h an o - g l i d e , i n c e r t a i n c o n t e x t s , a s , f o r i n s t a n c e , when such
a c h a r a c t e r o c c u r s as t h e s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r of a word o f t h r e e or
more c h a r a c t e r s and t h e f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r i s w r i t t e n w i t h one of
the vowel s i g n s 5 . Other c o n t e x t s are g i v e n l a t e r , when t h e
c h a r a c t e r s are d i s c u s s e d i n d e t a i l .
d. When an okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i s the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of a
v e r b a l b a s e , i t i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an
o - g l i d e , b e f o r e t h e a d d i t i o n of f o r m a t i v e p a r t i c l e s c o n s i s t i n g of
a consonant c h a r a c t e r w i t h a vowel s i g n .
In t h e t r a n s c r i p t i o n of examples of Hindi w o r d s , f i n a l okar
consonant c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an © - g l i d e ,
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 63
are t r a n s c r i b e d w i t h o u t o , and m e d i a l okar c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d i n
t h i s way are w r i t t e n t h u s , k' , t ' , p ' , f o r g u i d a n ce i n r e a d i n g .
Characters which do n o t occur i n an i n i t i a l p o s i t i o n are i n d i c a t e d by
a hyphen p r e f i x e d t o t h e s y l l a b l e i n t h e roman t r a n s c r i p t i o n .
i . Characters of the v o r g i i y g r o u p .
The f i r s t group of c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s c o n s i s t s of t w e n t y f i v e
charac ters r e a l i s e d as s y l l a b l e s w i t h an i n i t i a l p l o s i v e consonant
f o l l o w e d by the vowel e . These c h a r a c t e r s are p l a c e d i n f i v e c l a s s -
e s , or cT7^ ( v e r g ) , a c c o r d i n g t o t h e p o s i t i o n of a r t i c u l a t i o n of the
consonant i n the s y l l a b l e t h e y r e p r e s e n t . The c h a r a c t e r s are g i v e n i n
the Sanskr i t s e c t i o n . 1 Of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s , , no and \5f . . . j i o ,
do not occur i n Hindi w o r d s , and o c c u r i n S a n s k r i t loanwords o n l y i n
combination w i t h o t h e r c h a r a c t e r s . 2 The c h a r a c t e r UT , 1 ^ 0 , occurs
only i n S a n s k r i t loanwords i n l i t e r a r y H i n d i . The c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n as
'Bombay' forms are a l s o u s e d i n Hind i w r i t i n g * but l e s s f r e q u e n t l y
than those g i v e n i n the t a b l e s . Some o f t h e c h a r a c t e r s are m o d i f i e d
to r e p r e s e n t c e r t a i n sounds i n P e r s i a n and Arabic loanwords and the
i n t e r v o c a l i c r e a l i s a t i o n o f ^ and <5 .
I ? 7 ? T i f 5
• qo x© y e z© f © -£© -rh©
The c h a r a c t e r s § and <J occur o n l y i n i t i a l l y ; 5 and Z are
never i n i t i a l , but may be m e d i a l or f i n a l .
Reading examples .3
1. One c h a r a c t er words , r e a l i s e d a s a consonan t w i t h the vowel o •.
I ? Z rT z *t
1. See S a n s k r i t , Ch. 2,1. i . 2. S e e b e l o w , Ch.3. 3. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e page 85.
64 H I N D I S E C T I O N
2. Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , t h e f i n a l c h a r a c t e r r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
« R *TC ^ 3 ^FT 3*r *5?T x R 3 ^TS
x r t i t * r ^ t s w = t Tf r yrc ^ ^
3. Three c h a r a c t e r words
* T T R *fi*Tf W T **p=> ^^sp TTvyTST ^ r f
*Tv5R- =c^oF> SRCR T^rW ^ T ^ T
h. Four c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l
or w i t h an © - g l i d e , f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
«R3RrT 5r^=T TcTflB r xpj^cjvT SECTS
i i . Charac ters of t h e © n t s s t h group .
There are f o u r c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s group , r e p r e s e n t i n g s y l l a b l e s
c o n s i s t i n g of an i n i t i a l s e m i - v o w e l w i t h t h e vowel © . The c h a r a c t -
e r s are g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n 1 .
When the c h a r a c t e r s U( , y© and , v© , occur i n i t i a l l y , or
w i t h one of the vowel s i g n s , t h e y are r e a l i s e d as c o n s o n a n t s f o l l o w e d
"by a v o w e l . When t h e y o c c u r m e d i a l l y i n a p o s i t i o n i n which t h e y are
r e a l i s e d w i t h a f o l l o w i n g v o w e l , t h e y are r e a l i s e d as c o n s o n a n t s . When
they occur m e d i a l l y i n p o s i t i o n s i n which an ©kar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r
i s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or f i n a l l y , t h e y are r e a l i s e d as s e m i -
v o w e l s , forming a d i p h t h o n g w i t h the vowel of the p r e c e d i n g s y l l a b l e .
Examples: ^3=FT cTop SHJ
y©m©n v©k bhsy l©v
The c h a r a c t e r ^ i s o f t e n r e a l i s e d i n i t i a l l y or m e d i a l l y as b© .
1. See S a n s k r i t , C h .2,1. i i .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 65
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 85. 2 . This i s the only o n t e s t h c h a r a c t e r w h i c h o c c u r s as a word. 3 . See S a n s k r i t , C h o 2 , l „ i i i .
Reading e x a m p l e s . 1
2
10 One c h a r a c t e r word. 3"
2 . Two c h a r a c t e r -words, t h e f i n a l c h a r a c t e r r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
m err Tior m Wf OT" « R is^r ^ ^ * R
3 . Three c h a r a c t e r words , t h e f i n a l c h a r a c t e r r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
STSoT ^TOT^T TR^T *R*R F T ^ R W
T^yf cRSR *Rc* sr^H "^T ifflSR j]yf^
h. Pour and f i v e c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r s i n four c h a r a c t e r
words and t h i r d c h a r a c t e r i n f i v e c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , r e a l i s e d w i t h
zero -vowe l or w i t h an e - g l i d e , f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
ETrTc^ SRIXf S c ^ F f ^ C T i c *
wzrt® *oRore qr^ors ^ S ^ R * M < H M H
i i i . Characters of the uusm group,.
This group c o n s i s t s of t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s which are r e a l i s e d as
f r i c a t i v e consonant s f o l l o w e d by t h e vowe l o , and one which i s
r e a l i s e d as an a s p i r a t e f o l l o w e d by o . These c h a r a c t e r s are g i v e n
i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n . The c h a r a c t e r , s o , occurs o n l y i n
some S a n s k r i t loanwords u s e d i n l i t e r a r y H i n d i . I t i s o f t e n r e a l i s e d
i n ordinary speech as Jo . The l a s t c h a r a c t e r i n the Hindi s y l l a b a r y
i s I? , he .
66 H I N D I S E C T I O N
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p .85.
In words c o n s i s t i n g of okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s o n l y , t h e r e a l -
i s a t i o n of ^ , ho , v a r i e s a c c o r d i n g t o i t s p o s i t i o n i n the word.
a. When ^ o c c u r s m e d i a l l y p r e c e d e d by an okar c h a r a c t e r , and i s
f o l l o w e d by a n o t h e r consonant c h a r a c t e r , i t i s o f t e n r e a l i s e d i n
combinat ion w i t h t h e vowel o of the p r e c e d i n g c h a r a c t e r as
a s p i r a t i o n accompanying the vowel (ee), as i n
W c^'H'T
Johor( Jfflhr) pahor(p8ehr) rohon(rffihn) l ahoson( l eehson)
b . When ^ o c c u rs a s a f i n a l c h a r a c t e r f o l l o w i n g an okar consonant
c h a r a c t e r i t i s g e n e r a l l y r e a l i s e d i n c o m b i n a t i on w i t h t h e vowel
of the p r e c e d i n g c h a r a c t e r as ( a ) . Examples:
cR^ SRT(? E x c e p t i o n s : Xf^ ^ TJf
t o r o h ( t o r a ) j a g a h ( j o g a ) y o h ( y e h) v o h ( v o h ) soho
Reading e x a m p l e s . 1
1. None of the uusm c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r s a s a word.
2. Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , t h e f i n a l c h a r a c t e r r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
<3?h TO srer w *6*r %z
«TH if T 5f ^ £5 TT T *R
3. Three c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , t h e f i n a l c h a r a c t e r r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
*R*F> f ^TTR ST«R *TC)T
$vFT TTJ B qif ^FcT ^cT5T TOT
U. Four c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l ,
s econd c h a r a c t e r s w i t h z e r o - v o w e l or w i t h an o - g l i d e .
*T*RS 35STTrT §vR?T H^Tc^cT
f?5F>cT f^foT H^R^fi
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 67
1. See S a n s k r i t , Ch .2,2 . i . 2. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 85. 3. See S a n s k r i t , Ch.2,2 . i i .
2. Vowel Characters and Vowel S i g n s ,
i . Vowel C h a r a c t e r s .
The vowel c h a r a c t e r s u s e d i n w r i t i n g Hindi are the same as t h o s e
g iven i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n 1 , o m i t t i n g the c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g
s y l l a b i c rr and s y l l a b i c 1 and 11 . The c h a r a c t e r o c c u r s i n
Sanskr i t loanwords used i n l i t e r a r y H i n d i . The vowel c h a r a c t e r s are
u s u a l l y p l a c e d f i r s t i n t h e s y l l a b a r y , and t h e y are r e f e r r e d t o as
okar, akar, i k a r and so on. The Bombay forms of t h e c h a r a c t e r s are
sometimes w r i t t e n i n H i n d i , b u t t h e forms g i v e n i n the t a b l e are more
usua l .
The g e n e r a l r u l e s c o n c e r n i n g t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of okar consonant
c h a r a c t e r s shou ld be a p p l i e d i n r e a d i n g a l l examples g i v e n b e l o w ,
u n l e s s s p e c i a l n o t e s are added.
Reading e x a m p l e s . 2
1. Words c o n s i s t i n g of vowel c h a r a c t e r s o n l y .
5TT£ ^rrat ^rnr msft vsm
2 0 Words c o n s i s t i n g of vowel c h a r a c t e r s and okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s .
^ T ' , ' TO* .. 3 5 3 OT" ^ ^ f t 5 TTTT f^cf
sfrsR ^pr i^r i$ far ^nr ^ri t t %<zr ^vFf ^ f r vafrsnc >afocr ^ f t
i i . Vowel S i g n s .
The vowel s i g n s u s e d i n w r i t i n g H i n d i , c o r r e s p o n d i n g w i t h t h e
vowel c h a r a c t e r s and w r i t t e n w i t h t h e okar form of t h e c h a r a c t e r ^ ,
are g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n . 3 Each c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t s a
68 H I N D I S E C T I O N
"5F7T %
^ 1
Two c h a r a c t e r words .
W f t e
*McT
3 . Three c h a r a c t e r w o r d s .
^ t f t g s j p % ) c i w spRm ^ ° £ r (Jr nr
^ f ^ a f t § B 3 > T ^ ^ T T ^ W ^ f r g*TTf « ( | ^ T
Words of f o u r or more c h a r a c t e r s . Numbers i n b r a c k e t s i n d i c a t e the
r e a l i s a t i o n of ©kar consonant c h a r a c t e r s w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h
an © - g l i d e , i f t h e words are n o t t o be read a c c o r d i n g t o the r u l e s
g i v e n above . Most words of more than four c h a r a c t e r s are compounds
i n which the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of the f i r s t p a r t , i f ©kar, i s r e a l i s -
ed w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
T Y T C T ^ R ^ y f t T ^nrmm ^TyT^5f> <5?5TT<7TT ^ f e q T ^ T
%§TT*ft s^Jtf^q ^ J T T S t t a r n f t ITTSRN* ^mTifr
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n o f e x a m p l e s , s e e p .85. 2. A S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d , w i t h f i n a l d h© .
/
s y l l a b l e c o n s i s t i n g of a consonan t f o l l o w e d by one of the v o w e l s a
t o ©v . The vowel s i g n s are r e f e r r e d t o as HT^TT (matra) , a s i n
*T ^Rt H i "511 ( e k i i matra , ' t h e s i g n of e.••'•).
Reading e x a m p l e s . 1
1. One c h a r a c t e r words .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 69
The f o l l o w i n g r u l e s c o n c e r n i n g t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of okar consonant
charac ter s i n words which have v o w e l c h a r a c t e r s and s i g n s p r o v i d e
some guidance f o r r e a d i n g from t h e s c r i p t , though the o n l y r e l i a b l e
guide i s a knowledge of the spoken l a n g u a g e .
a. When a media l okar consonant c h a r a c t e r , i n a t h r e e c h a r a c t e r word,
i s f o l l o w e d by a f i n a l c h a r a c t e r w i t h a vowel s i g n , i t i s u s u a l l y
r e a l i s e d w i th z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an © - g l i d e , e . g .
r e j ' m i i ©p'na l o r ' k a l o k ' r a p e r ' d a s o d ' r i i
b . i . When a v e r b a l b a s e ends i n an ©kar consonant c h a r a c t e r , t h i s
c h a r a c t er i s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an © - g l i d e , b e f o r e
format ive p a r t i c l e s which c o n s i s t of a consonant c h a r a c t e r w i t h
a vowel s i g n e . g .
s o k - s©k-na s © k - t i i b o l b o l - t a b o l - t e
i i . When a v e r b a l b a s e c o n s i s t s of t h r e e or more c h a r a c t e r s , t h e
f i n a l and p r e - f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s b e i n g ©kar consonan t c h a r a c t e r s ,
the r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s v a r i e s a c c o r d i n g to the form
of the f o r m a t i v e p a r t i c l e s w h i c h a r e added. Th i s v a r i a t i o n i s
i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e f o l l o w i n g e x a m p l e s ;
Tm*FTT H * T * B c T T "SRSRS&T ^ T * T * H H T
somsjh s©mTjha s©m©jh-ta s©m©jh-k©r s©m'jhana
c. Medial , h© , f " , h i and j ^ " , hu are r e a l i s e d as f o l l o w s :
i . Medial ^ , p r e c e d e d by a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r w i t h a vowel s i g n
i s r e a l i s e d as a s p i r a t i o n of t h e vowel of the p r e c e d i n g s y l l a b l e . e-s- WJ$m ft^cT ^ T r T %e>cTT # ^ c l
cahna mihnot tuhmst b e h t s r sohbot
70 H I N D I S E C T I O N
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s , s e e p . 86. 2. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i . and i i . 3 . 'moon and d o t ' .
i i . Medial f T , p r e c e d e d by an akar c h a r a c t e r , may be r e a l i s e d i n
c o a l e s c e n c e w i t h t h e vowel of a p r e c e d i n g okar c h a r a c t e r a s ayh.
e . g . M ^ c H I s r f ^ T S f f ^ T
p a h i l a or p e y h l a b a h i r a or boyhra b e h i n or bayhn
i i i . Medial 2 , p r e c e d e d by an akar c h a r a c t e r , may be r e a l i s e d i n
c o a l e s c e n c e w i t h t h e vowel of a p r e c e d i n g okar c h a r a c t e r as ovh .
e . g . Gt|?r "CHpr^TT
bahut or b e v h t pohur-na or povhr-na
Reading e x a m p l e s , i l l u s t r a t i n g the above n o t e s , and n o t e s a. and b .
under 1. i i i (uusm c h a r a c t e r s ) . 1
a. f ^ f i t ^ R J f cPTT of^TST S f T ^ t W W
b. i fec f t ^ f c T T W f T ^ T TOO*- TO?*TT <P*TK*T
c. ^ *afc% -gsrf *r?ft5 *ri%7T "qfw^r s ^ ^ t t ^r f f t
3 . M o d i f i e r s .
The m o d i f i e r s , ^ c ^ ^ g T ^ " ( o n u s v a r ) and [o|^fT^ ( v i s o r g ) are b o t h 2
u s e d i n w r i t i n g H i n d i . These ar e g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n ,
i . onusvar . Both forms of t h i s m o d i f i e r are u s e d i n H i n d i , t h e f i r s t form,
as i n 55T > b e i n g c a l l e d t h e onusvar , and the s econd f o r m , as i n 35T , 3
the cendrabindu . The anusvar i s u s u a l l y w r i t t e n , i n p r e f e r e n c e t o
the c o n d r e b i n d u , w i t h c h a r a c t e r s t h a t have any s u p e r s c r i b e d s t r o k e .
am. am im iirrj uirj uuirj eirj eym, orr) ovrr)
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 7 1
ft
t h i i me hey
ttZ TTT5T
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p .86. 2. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 * C l a s s 2. i i . 3 . See above , 1 . no te b„
The onusvar and condrab ind u a re r e a l i s e d i n Hindi as f o l l o w s :
a. As the n a s a l i s a t i o n of t h e vowe l of t h e c h a r a c t e r w i t h which i t i s
w r i t t e n . The condrobindu i s p r e f e r r e d f o r r e p r e s e n t i n g a n a s a l i s e d
vowel , e x c e p t when t h e c h a r a c t e r h a s a s u p e r s c r i b e d s t r o k e ; e . g .
iff or $ ^ or f ^
ha muh
Reading examples.'''
3for f z *n§> ^ft
s a r c b w Trff crt TT A%~*r\ i^RT -qj^^rr
b. As the n a s a l consonant of one o f t h e v o r g . The onusvar w r i t t e n on
a c h a r a c t er p r e c e d i n g a v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d as the n a s a l
consonant of the same c l a s s a s t h e f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r , or as n
when the f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r i s o f the c e - v a r g . The candrabindu
i s not u s u a l l y w r i t t e n t o r e p r e s e n t a n a s a l c o n s o n a n t . When the
onusvar i s r e a l i s e d as a n a s a l c o n s o n a n t b e f o r e a f i n a l okar 2
c h a r a c t e r , the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d w i t h an o - g l i d e .
t t ^ t $iz #> pr ponkh kon^h p o r a n t u h i n d i i sambandh kanjuus
In w r i t i n g S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , t h e r e i s an a l t e r n a t i v e and more
f r e q u e n t l y used method o f r e p r e s e n t i n g n a s a l consonants i n t h i s
c o n t e x t , by combining c h a r a c t e r s 2 . When, t h e onusvar i s r e a l i s e d
as a n a s a l consonant b e f o r e a f i n a l okar c h a r a c t e r , t h e f i n a l
c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d w i t h an a - g l i d e ^ .
7 2 H I N D I S E C T I O N
In some w o r d s , t h i s m o d i f i e r may be r e a l i s e d as i n a. or a s i n b .
The r e a l i s a t i o n a s i n b . i s more u s u a l when the c h a r a c t e r w i t h the
onusvar i s okar . e . g . 3>T )
ok or onk r e g or rang
Reading Examples."''
^ f t c r w i * r z z ^Htr -q- ar 3"sft # e t c sf^r t w * r ^r^r Rfar f£«r ^55*
c . When the anusvar i s w r i t t e n on a c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d i n g one o f t h e
e n t o s t h or uusm c h a r a c t e r s , as i n S a n s k r i t loanwords and l e a r n -
ed words u s ed i n t h e l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e , i t i s r e a l i s e d i n v a r i o u s
ways . Among the s e v e r a l ways of r e a l i s i n g the onusvar i n t h i s c o n -
t e x t u se d by s p e a k e r s i n d i f f e r e n t p a r t s of India2, t h e u s u a l
Hindi p r a c t i c e i s i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e f o l l o w i n g e x a m p l e s :
onusvar b e f o r e 7J[ , X , ^ , , !^ and 15" , r e a l i s e d a s n , or
as the n a s a l i s a t i o n of t h e vowel of t h e s y l l a b l e , e . g .
sonyog s o n r a g s o n l e g n son fay a h i n s a s i n h a
or sayog s a r a g s a l a g a n saJay a h i s a s i h a
anusvar b e f o r e o f , r e a l i s e d as m , the c h a r a c t e r o T b e i n g ,
u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d a s b i n t h i s c o n t e x t , e . g .
somvad (sambad) varamvar (barambar) but k u v a r i i
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p .86. 2. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i . n o t e c . 3 . The l a s t c h a r a c t e r i n t h i s word r e p r e s e n t s 7T combined w i t h T f .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 73
i i . v i s e r g .
This mod i f i e r i s r a r e l y u s e d i n w r i t i n g H i n d i . I t occurs i n some
Sanskr i t loanwords u s e d m a i n l y i n t h e l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e , and i n a few
Hindi words. When w r i t t e n w i t h a m e d i a l c h a r a c t e r , i t i s u s u a l l y
r e a l i s e d e i t h e r as s t r o n g a s p i r a t i o n a f t e r the s y l l a b l e r e p r e s e n t e d
hy the charac te r w i t h which i t i s w r i t t e n , as i n r e a d i n g l e a r n e d
words from a l i t e r a r y t e x t ; o r , i n l e s s formal r e a d i n g , as the
doubl ing of the consonant of the f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r ; f o r example:
^:^cT , duhkh© or dukkh 'CRT: o f t^T , entohkoror^ or ©ntokkoror^
When the v i s a r g i s w r i t t e n w i t h a f i n a l c h a r a c t e r , i t i s r e a l i s e d as
s trong a s p i r a t i o n f o l l o w i n g the f i n a l s y l l a b l e , f o r i n s t a n c e , i n
l earned words such as ^J*T* » p u n s h , jcj )"^TrTt , v i f e s ' t s h ; or i t
may be d i s r e g a r d e d , as i n , ch© .
I+. The Complete S y l l a b a r y .
The arrangement of the c h a r a c t e r s of the Hindi s y l l a b a r y i n the
t r a d i t i o n a l order i s s i m i l a r t o t h a t g iven, i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n ,
o m i t t i n g the vowel c h a r a c t e r s , c£ and ^ . 1 The t a b l e i n which
a l l the vowel c h a r a c t e r s , e x c e p t , and t h e m o d i f i e r s added t o the
c h a r a c t e r !£[ are p l a c e d a t t h e h e a d o f a s e r i e s of columns c o n s i s t -
ing of every consonant i n the ©kar f o r m , w i t h each of the vowel s i g n s
and each of the m o d i f i e r s , i s c a l l e d i n Hindi t h e ^T^^<c|^l , bar©h-
k h s ^ i i , the ' t w e l v e c h a r a c t e r s ' . T h i s t a b l e i s o f t e n r e c i t e d i n
s c h o o l s by c h i l d r e n l e a r n i n g t o r e a d .
1 . See S a n s k r i t , Ch.2,h.
' 4 H I N D I S E C T I O N
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 5 . 2. See end of C h . 3 . 3 . See S a n s k r i t , G h . 2 , 3 . i i . Reading e x a m p l e s .
These two t a b l e s show the order i n which the c h a r a c t e r s are
p l a c e d as the i n i t i a l c h a r a c t e r s of words i n d i c t i o n a r i e s , which i s
the same as the order1 i n S a n s k r i t . Words b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h e m o d i f i e d
c h a r a c t e r s are p l a c e d i n t h e s e r i e s of words b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h e
c o r r e s p o n d i n g u n m o d i f i e d c h a r a c t e r s .
5. Numerals .
The numerals u s e d i n Hindi are g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n . 1
Both the ' H i n d i ' forms and the 'Bombay' forms are u s e d i n modern
Hindi p r i n t i n g .
6. P u n c t u a t i o n .
In p r o s e w r i t i n g , t h e end of a s e n t e n c e i s marked w i t h an u p -
r i g h t s t r o k e of t h e same h e i g h t as t h e u p r i g h t s t r o k e of a c h a r a c t e r .
Other p u n c t u a t i o n marks are use d as i n E n g l i s h . Th i s s y s t e m i s
i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e Hindi p r o s e p a s s a g e a t tbe end of t h i s s e c t i o n 2 .
The sys tem of p u n c t u a t i o n u s e d i n v e r s e i s the same as t h a t u s e d
i n Sanskrit3.
C H A P T E R 3
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
Two or more consonant c h a r a c t e r s may be combined i n w r i t i n g Hindi
to r e p r e s e n t consonant s which a r e r e a l i s e d w i t h o u t an i n t e r v e n i n g
vowel . Characters formed by c o m b i n i n g o t h e r c h a r a c t e r s are c a l l e d
^ JrFjfisiR ( s o n y u k t a k s e r 1 ) by Hindi grammarians . The c o n s t r u c t i o n and
c a l l i g r a p h y of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s a r e d e s c r i b e d i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t -
i o n 2 . The conjunc t c h a r a c t e r s u s e d i n w r i t i n g Hindi are c l a s s i f i e d
i n t h i s chapter i n the same way a s t h e S a n s k r i t c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s ^ .
1 . Contexts of Conjunct C h a r a c t e r s i n H i n d i .
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s occur i n Hind i i n t h e s e c o n t e x t s :
i . In Hindi words , t h a t i s , words n o t borrowed from S a n s k r i t or from
other l a n g u a g e s ; e . g .
<§F=gr C R M % m^t becca k y o k i mokkhi i
i i . In S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , e i t h e r words commonly u s e d i n H i n d i , or
l earned loanwords used i n t h e l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e ; e . g .
pustok s t r i i / obd
i i i . I n loanwords from o t h e r l a n g u a g e s ; e . g .
? T W WWrU doroxt h o f t a s ^ e / o n
1 . ' j o i n e d c h a r a c t e r ' . 2 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 1 . 3 . i b i d . C h . 3 , 3 .
76 H I N D I S E C T I ON
2. R e a l i s a t i o n of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s i n Hindi .
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s are r e a l i s e d i n r e a d i n g as s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t -
i n g of two or more c o n s o n a n t s f o l l o w e d by a v o w e l . When an okar c o n -
junct c h a r a c t e r o c c u r s as the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of a word, i t i s u s u a l l y
r e a l i s e d w i t h an o - g l i d e , as i n , g u p t ' , $| | V I > J a s t r ' . l
The r e a l i s a t i o n i n modern Hindi of akar c h a r a c t e r s w i t h z e r o -
vowel i n c e r t a i n p o s i t i o n s i n w o r d s 2 g i v e s r i s e t o a problem of s p e l l -
i n g . For i n s t a n c e , when a f o r m a t i v e p a r t i c l e b e g i n n i n g w i t h a c o n s o n -
ant c h a r a c t e r i s added t o a v e r b a l b a s e ending i n a f i n a l okar c o n s o n -
ant c h a r a c t e r , the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of the b a s e i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d
w i t h z e r o - v o w e l . This r e a l i s a t i o n of the c o n s e c u t i v e c h a r a c t e r s i s
s i m i l a r t o the r e a l i s a t i o n of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r . S i m i l a r problems
a r i s e i n o t h e r i n s t a n c e s , where an okar consonant c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s -
ed w i t h z e r o - v o w e l b e f o r e a f o l l o w i n g consonant c h a r a c t e r , and i n com-
pound words i n which t h e f i r s t p a r t ends i n an okar consonant c h a r a c -3
t e r , and the s e c o n d p a r t b e g i n s w i t h a consonant c h a r a c t e r .
3 . C l a s s e s of Conjunct Charac ters i n Hind i .U
A l l the c l a s s e s of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t
s e c t i o n occur i n H i n d i , but i n some of the c l a s s e s o n l y a few of
the c h a r a c t e r s are u s e d . Those used i n w r i t i n g Hindi are i l l u s t r a t e d
by the examples g i v e n i n e a c h c l a s s , which i n c l u d e some S a n s k r i t l o a n -
words which are commonly u s e d i n Hindi . More r a r e l y u s e d l o a n w o r d s ,
some of which may occur i n l i t e r a r y H i n d i , are i n c l u d e d among t h e
examples g i v e n w i t h each c l a s s i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
1 . In the t r a n s c r i p t i o n of examples , t h i s g l i d e i s n o t i n d i c a t e d i n words t o which t h i s r u l e a p p l i e s . 2. See a b o v e , C h.2 , 1 . n o t e s a. to d. 3 . Examples of such words are g i v e n b e l o w , w i t h each c l a s s of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s . U. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 7 7
Class 1 . Two s i m i l a r c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d .
The s e r i e s of c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s c l a s s o c c u r r i n g i n S a n s k r i t i s
g i v e n in t h a t s e c t i o n 1 . Most of t h e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s of the Hindi
s y l l a b a r y occur i n t h i s c l a s s , b u t some occur o n l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n -
words used in the l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e . The c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t i n g - r r a
i s w r i t t e n as ^ , the s u p e r s c r i b e d s t r o k e r e p r e s e n t i n g when p r e -p
ceding another consonant . The m o d i f i e d c h a r a c t e r s ^ and <J do n o t
occur in t h i s c l a s s , but o|-oh , qqa , VHVh , f f o , and \FjT , zzo are
w r i t t e n in P e r s i a n and Arabic l o a n w o r d s .
A c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t i n g an a s p i r a t e d consonant i s n o t w r i t t e n
in S a n s k r i t as the f i r s t p a r t of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r i n t h i s c l a s s ,
but in w r i t i n g Hindi the c h a r a c t e r s \o^cj , khkh© and , "|;h"|;h©
are sometimes used . The c o m b i n a t i o n -mm© may be a l t e r n a t i v e l y r e -
p r e s e n t e d by w r i t i n g an anusvar w i t h t h e c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d i n g ^ , as
in V4J-«41 <3[ or VS^ft"^ , ummid .
The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e Hindi words i n which two c o n -
s e c u t i v e consonant c h a r a c t e r s , t h e f i r s t b e i n g ©kar, are r e a l i s e d i n
ordinary speech i n the same way as c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s :
s©nn b©n-na' 3 y u s s e u s - s e k
Reading examples .
pF?f>T *raR5FT cR^ft sf^cft I ^ W
1. See S a n s k r i t , Ch . .3 ,C lass . 1 . 3 . Verbal form. 5. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 86.
2. S e e b e l o w , C l a s s 3 . i i i . a . L\.. Pronoun w i t h s u f f i x .
78 H I N D I S E C T I O N
3. - k t o - t k o -gd© -dg© -pt© -tp© -bd© -db©
OXJrj <Frf 9FST - x t e -b j© -bz© -qt© -qb© - q f © - f t © -bt©
i i . Most of t h e c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n under i i . a . i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n
are w r i t t e n i n l i t e r a r y H i n d i , t h i s method of r e p r e s e n t i n g a
homorganic n a s a l consonan t p r e c e d i n g one of the v e r g i i y c h a r a c t -
e r s b e i n g g e n e r a l l y p r e f e r r e d t o the use of t h e o n u s v a r , i n
w r i t i n g S a n s k r i t loanwords3. Among the c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n the
S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n under i i . b . , o n l y "JfT , jji© and <?T , - tn© ,
occur i n H i n d i . The c h a r a c t e r i s not c a l l i g r a p h i c a l l y a
c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r , and i t i s o f t e n i n c l u d e d i n t h e s y l l a b i c
s e r i e s . I t i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d as gy© , w i t h n a s a l i s a t i o n of the
f o l l o w i n g vowel^-. In Hindi d i c t i o n a r i e s , words b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h i s
c h a r a c t e r are p l a c e d a f t e r words b e g i n n i n g w i t h vj " .
i i i . These c h a r a c t e r s occur i n S a n s k r i t l oanwords :
-kmo -gn© -ghn© -tm© -dm© -pn©
1. See S a n s k r i t , Ch.3>Class 2. 2. The numbers i . - i v . c o r r e s p o n d t o the arrangement of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
3. See above , C h.2 , i . b . L. Cf. gy© , i n C l a s s 3 . i . b e l o w .
C las s 2. Two v e r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d .
The c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s c l a s s which occur i n S a n s k r i t ar e
g i v e n in the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n 1 . Some of the more common c o n j u n c t
c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s o c c u r r i n g i n H i n d i , m o s t l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n -
words , are g i v e n b e l o w , w i t h the a d d i t i o n of some c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s
o c c u r r i n g i n P e r s i a n and Arab ic l o a n w o r d s . Some of t h e examples g i v e n
i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n may be found i n Hindi t e x t s , i n l e a r n e d l o a n -
words i n the l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 79
i v . Of the c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s g r o u p , o n l y , -rjmo and , -nmo
occur i n H i n d i , i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s .
The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e Hindi words i n which c o n s e c u t -
i v e consonant c h a r a c t e r s , t h e f i r s t b e i n g o k a r , are r e a l i s e d i n
ordinary speech i n the same way as c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s ;
Jokt i s o k - t i i 1 r o b t d a b - t a 1 padma ad 'mi i
Reading e x a m p l e s . 2
* T % W R T -&cW>-R " H I P T T O F ^ T T
fOT TovT ^cT OTT | W T T T ^ o l W oTcST
F ^ R F " H | * ^ ^ P F T h ^ r t w^zr S N F % ^ f t c
^F^H^f l | O P R ^llcHI W F T
Class 3 . Characters j o i n e d w i t h a n t a s t h c h a r a c t e r s .
i . Characters j o i n e d w i t h f o l l o w i n g Xf
The s e r i e s of c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s c l a s s o c c u r r i n g i n S a n s k r i t i s
g iven i n t h a t s e c t i o n . 3 Most of t h e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s of the Hindi
s y l l a b a r y can be combined w i t h f o l l o w i n g Xf , though some of t h e s e
conjunct c h a r a c t e r s occur o n l y i n S a n s k r i t loanwords i n the l i t e r a r y
language . Some of the examples g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n may occur
i n a Hindi l i t e r a r y t e x t . Of t h e m o d i f i e d c h a r a c t e r s , Jpf and
occur combined w i t h f o l l o w i n g ZJ -in P e r s i a n and Arabic l oanwords .
1 . Verbal form. 2. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 86. 3 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 , C l a s s 3 . i i i . b .
80 H I N D I S E C T I O N
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p .86. 2. See S a n s k r i t , Ch .3»Class 3 . i i . 3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p .86. U. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , C l a s s 3 . i i i . a .
Reading Examples .
o R t t o ^ T c T ^ T T T l " ^ T ^ T "^TTZT
c q t "q«T ^3" TtTT *T«T =*rrq" w f T sq^IT ^T«T
O F H ^ J ^p j c ^ r siTRotrr^r ^Tors r T r g w ^m^- o^srr
i i . C h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d w i t h f o l l o w i n g cT .
The s e r i e s of c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s c l a s s o c c u r r i n g i n S a n s k r i t i s p
g i v e n i n t h a t s e c t i o n . Only a few of the c h a r a c t e r s o f the Hindi
s y l l a b a r y occur combined w i t h f o l l o w i n g cf , and t h o s e t h a t occur are
ma in ly i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s . Of the m o d i f i e d c h a r a c t e r s , o n l y cf
i s combined w i t h c f . 3
Reading examples .
" W T T ocTTsr - 3 c T R ^ O T R CTT^T E 5 # f ^ T
"H^ W $ ivFTT ^f%rT "^TK
i i i . Characters j o i n e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g or w i t h f o l l o w i n g .
a. *5[ p r e c e d i n g .
Characters r e a l i s e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g r , r e p r e s e n t e d by the s t r o k e
c a l l e d ( r e f ) , are i l l u s t r a t e d , w i t h n o t e s on c a l l i g r a p h y , i n the
S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n . ^ These c h a r a c t e r s occur i n Hindi w o r d s , i n S a n s k r i t
l o a n w o r d s , and i n loanwords from o t h e r l a n g u a g e s . The examples g i v e n
below i l l u s t r a t e t h e c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s which occur i n H i n d i .
The c h a r a c t e r s 7 T , » 7T » ^ > » *T a n d 3" are o f t e n
doubled when w r i t t e n w i t h r e f .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 81
The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e Hindi words i n which c o n s e c u t -
i v e consonant c h a r a c t e r s , t h e f i r s t b e i n g ©kar, are r e a l i s e d i n
ordinary speech i n the same way a s c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s :
korta k o r - t a ^ s©rv d o r ' v a z a dhorm d©r'maha
A few words may be w r i t t e n e i t h e r w i t h f o l l o w e d by a consonant
character or w i t h a c h a r a c t e r w i t h s u p e r s c r i b e d r e f ; e . g .
dor'bar dsrbar p o r ' d a parda d © r f j i i d s r j i i b. "5[ f o l l o w i n g .
Characters r e a l i s e d w i t h r f o l l o w i n g , r e p r e s e n t e d by a s h o r t
s t roke p l a c e d e i t h e r a g a i n s t t h e u p r i g h t s t r o k e of the c h a r a c t e r or
beneath the c h a r a c t e r , are g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n . 2 The
examples g i v e n below i l l u s t r a t e t h e c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s which
occur in Hindi . The m a j o r i t y of s u c h words are loanwords from
Sanskr i t and E n g l i s h .
Reading examples .3
?foR t $ "3?ff ^ ^ c T
s r J *£r£ 7n£ *P&*no*r tfS sHf ^| SPW ^ T f ^ «F4 ST^FT ^ gj f srff H
^IT *JPT ^ y T £PT Tffr W ttX T ^*J$
fit*? W^FT TO ^Tg * W cffa ^T^T
i v . Characters j o i n e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g cvT or w i t h f o l l o w i n g cFT •
a. q% preced ing .
The c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s w h i c h occur i n S a n s k r i t are g i v e n i n
tha t s e c t i o n . ^ The c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r r i n g i n Hindi are i l l u s t r a t e d by
1. Verbal form. 2 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 3 . i i i . b . 3. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p .86. U. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 .C1.3. i v . a .
G
82 H I N D I S E C T I O N
the examples g i v e n b e l o w . Some words may be w r i t t e n e i t h e r w i t h
f o l l o w e d by a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r , or w i t h a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r of
t h i s c l a s s ; e . g . f^cyfc^cT or RorcpoT , b i l k u l .
b . f o l l o w i n g .
The c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s which occur i n S a n s k r i t are g i v e n i n
t h a t section.-*- The example s g i v e n be low i l l u s t r a t e t h e c h a r a c t e r s
which occur i n H i n d i , i n S a n s k r i t and E n g l i s h l o a n w o r d s , p
Reading examples .
*f35 a r a r a o if^T^T ^ f r m ^ g ^ r
C l a s s U. v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g or f o l l o w i n g uusm
c h a r a c t e r s .
i* t or p r e c e d i n g or f o l l o w i n g v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s ,
a . "^T > "^T o r p r e c e d i n g .
The c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s c l a s s which occur i n S a n s k r i t
are g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n . Those which are w r i t t e n i n H i n d i ,
i n c l u d i n g t h o s e o c c u r r i n g i n S a n s k r i t and o t h e r l o a n w o r d s , are i n d i c -
a t e d by the examples g i v e n b e l o w . The f o l l o w i n g c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s
which are n o t i n c l u d e d i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n occur i n H i n d i , i n
loanwords from o t h e r l a n g u a g e s :
S3o T£
- J q e -J"to - s t o - s b o
Hindi words i n w h i c h c o n s e c u t i v e consonant c h a r a c t e r s , t h e f i r s t
c h a r a c t e r b e i n g o k a r , a r e r e a l i s e d i n o r d i n a r y s p e e c h i n t h e same way
1. See S a n s k r i t , Ch. 1 + . 3 , C I . 3 . i v . b . 2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 87 . 2 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . h . 3 , C I .k- i . a .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 83
as conjunct c h a r a c t e r s are i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e s e e x a m p l e s :
r o s t a b o s - t a 1 q i s m o t us-me 2
b. "5T , or " T f o l l o w i n g .
The conjunct c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s which occur i n S a n s k r i t
are g iven i n the S a n s k r i t sect ion"^. Only a few of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s
occur in Hindi . The c h a r a c t e r s which o c c u r are i l l u s t r a t e d by the
reading examples g i v e n b e l o w . Some a d d i t i o n a l c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s
c l a s s , not inc luded i n the S a n s k r i t s e r i e s , occur i n loanwords from
other l a n g u a g e s : "^o^ , x s o , *o%\ , x j a , , f s a .
Reading e x a m p l e s . ^
a. g f%oT q « T T r T N 'HI 4 g * *EoT
^ T C Vf$C t<* f^r l ^ R * T S ^ c T R W W Tt f§5RT
fe^ft ^ c T f T f ^ S R T ^ c = f ^ T F T
i i . | [ preced ing or f o l l o w i n g an o n u n a s i k c h a r a c t e r ^ .
Only three c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s occur i n H i n d i , i l l u s t r a t e d
by t h e s e e x a m p l e s : -
a. | | preced ing , as i n sTfirTW > brahmor; .
h. | | f o l l o w i n g ^ ,or *T » as i n URT , nhan , , untie ,
4- 1^1 u n h a r i i mhar i i , ^FsfST» kumhora , <J1=^ , tumhe .
1. Verbal form. 2. Pronoun w i t h s u f f i x . 3 . See S a n s k r i t , Ch.3. 3 . CI. 1+. i . b . U. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 87. 5. See S a n s k r i t , Ch.3. 3 . 01^1+. i i . a. and b .
84 H I N D I S E C T I O N
Hindi p r o s e p a s s a g e l
^TPW oft? CT TT *rrW , c^^q ^ffcr HT t 3 ^ fa r fo ftcTT ^HT | I
^5T5er ftcft ^ # f , c f cqf gfrTfm -fen TT 7 1 | I §£T
w f t focFt ^ f ^ r 1 1 VTiUft tfgF ^ hs t t *rf§w
ftcTT f I
1. Hindi Shabdasagar , p . l , ed . Shamsundardas, pub. 1916, by K a s h i -Nagar i -Sabha .
TRANSCRIPTION 85
T r a n s c r i p t i o n o f R e a d i n g E x a m p l e s
C h a p t e r 2 .
1. i .
k a b phon^
c h o
d h a n t h o n
d h a
bh©t
t o
c a p h x a m
t h o
g h o n g a z
m o g o n j h o g o r h h e j o n c a n a k
phoh©n k h a r a k p©k©r gh©t©k
n©
d j i a b y e m
q©d©m k © t h © n
c h © t q©d
dh©m©k c h a m a k
c © k h Oh©t k © f
gh©t m©"|;h
y a z a b x a t s m
p s r h s t z©x©m
dh©m'k©t
1 . i i . v©
b s c ' p s n p © t ' j h © £ j sm 'gh©"] ; p h a f k a n j h a f p a . t
k©r dh©r
b©d©l y a r a z
m a t ' l © b c o m ' r a x
DOl n a v
c o l s n t a r a f
v©r j a r
p h s l c h a l
l 8 T v a y
g a r a 3 y a m a l
l . i i i . d a s h a q
J a p a t h h a z a m
m a s ' n a d h a f k a n
2. i . a
l a m ' ch©£ k h © r 1 V 9 \
h©r dh©s
c s p s l v©c©n
c a p h ' k a r p © r © j ' v o \
g h a r b a l
v©z©n y a v a n
v©n l a v
q©b©r x a b a r
t © r D*ey
l©y©n y a m a k
k h s l y a m
c h a y b h a r
v a r a i i y © z © l
s a m a j h s a g a r h
k a s 1 r a t h © r ' k © t
a i
y o j "
J s r s r ^ s e m o y
b a s r o s
h a l h a r
h a s a d h a l a f
k a r ' V9~[ p a k a ^ ' k a r
k a j
s a r a s f a k a l
d a l ' k a n m a c a l ' p a n
k a t ' p h a l
ham h a d
s a b
a o
h o z ' r o t h o i ' c o l
a e
s a r ' k a j " m a s ' r a f
a o a i
J a b a r k a l a j
x a s ' l o t s a r ' d a l
a e
h a t h s a r
s a f a r t a r a s
ab o j h i d h o r
2 . i i .
d u u d h h o y l i e
e k
u u p o r
b h i i k e
b h a t n a v J*uruu
u u t h e v r i s
u n i i d
m o y j
o r h o r
u u k h g e i i
a g g o e
© y z o n o v s o d h © g a r o j h a r a v r ' a t a y p a n
i i k h s a i i
s a v p i i
k a d h o
c n z d i n p o y s a
d e j a
h o y t h g a y d h o b i i
p a y n a v
311 d o
k h u l j h u u t x a n a
m a y d a n h u z u u r q i t a b k a r a : q p r t h i v i i r u p a y y e k e u u r s i i a r
l e
m a v j u s a b h i i t i
f a q i i r d e k h a o
y a h o y
c h e d r t u k r p a
s e k h a s o
d r d h h u i i b o r i i
v e t h i i
j h i i l d h o e j a e
t s y y a r s u n a i i
d i i j i e b a h u d h a
86 H I N D I S E C T I O N
maz'duur kam'zor © f ' s o s moz 'd ik d e r ' v a z a g h a r i y a l b e i n a m i i i s i i l i y e c a t u r a i i b a y l ' g a c j i i savdagar r o z ' g a r i i b o n a v ' t i i musal 'man x a b a r ' d a r x i d ' m a t ' g a r
p . 1 3 . k h i r ' k i i d u u s ' r a i t ' n a ad 'mi i k a p ' r a l o m ' r i i b a v ' l i i phay 'da dekh-na b a y t h - t i i l i k h - t a pak'pana g h a b ' r a t i i p a k a r - n a cjhalak-na t e r a h cavdah subah bayera h g a h i r a pahacan ' ( ; n 8 h 8 r ~ n a k a c a h a r i i
2 . 1 . a . may jo hii meh os l i t jauu kue adh bhok bh§vk-na auuga j a e g e soh
n a h i i gae mi\ pac gav g a i i dono voha akhe ghuus bhays
dej"6 d a v r i i poch-na b h a i i o ec|ua l a h a g a mahaga h a s - n a pahuc-na
b . p a n d i t arambh s a n g a t t n 8 r l ^ . o n j i i r pasand bandhan sarjghat kamp-na pan jab j a n g a l barjcjii s i n g d imb andar angul Jankh sangh p a n e ' m i i khambha ant kutumb manoronjak
Chapter 3 -
C l a s s 1 .
pakka huqqa makkhan l a g g i i ghugghuu b a c c i i i c c h a l a j j a i z z a t j h a j j h a r p a t t a c i t t n i : i - 9 < \ < \ a b u ^ h a p a t t a p a t t h a r baddal Juddh ann chappar phupphuus d^ibbii bhabbhar kimmat r a y y a t harra k i l l i i navve h i s s a
C l a s s 2 .
i . b h a k t i vaqt s a t k a r darax t sadgur^ vaqf e k b i i s kubj sabz gupt utpann h a f t a Jabd l a f z l a t f
i i . l i n g sangh pajicamii manjha ghar^a t n 8 rlA / a n t i lampat arambh parantu u p a r a n t jjian (gyan) j i j j i a s u r a t n sambandh
i i i . r u k m i n i i huqm atma xatm l a g n umda i v . janm vanmay
Clas s 3 « i»
kyo rrmkhy x y a l g y a r e h jyo zyada cjyavdjiii pur^y tyo pathy udyog madhy nyay p y a r i i byatha sabhy karyy ammily vyakhyan ava /y manusy s y a l vya th a
Clas s 3 « i i »
pakvann svami i
xvab s a r v
gvar jvar t a t t v dvara dhvani v i / v s a r v v i i j v a r kvara k v a c i t J*vas svapn
C l a s s 3 . i i i .
a. tark f a r q muurkh s u r x vargg d i i r g h rrraryii xarc rrraurchit arz a r j k o r t garc[ vorr^amala k i i r t i a r t h urduu arddh uurf arpar^ arb garbh dharmm aryy s a r v v d a r / a n v e r s k u r s i i a r h i t
b . kram kram gram angrez t r a m r a t r i i p a t r c h i d r samudr p r i y f r a k namr abru Jram t i i v r mantr
TRANSCRIPTION 87
Class 3« i v .
b o l k i nrnlk phalguri i l t i z a i l m i i kulha^a i l zam u l t h a ©ql ( e q o l ) f©s l ( f©s©l) i x l a s v s s l Juki k l a s ulmukh
Class h.
i . a . mujki l p r s j n p a / c a t a j c s r y csjma p u s k s l krsr^ ras"|;r pustsk v a s t e v s s t r s t r i i r a s t a h indus than snan spas']; sphuurt i s v s s t i s v s s t h u s t a d J a s t r pojc im k i / t i i i f t i h a n i s b e t i j q s k u u l s ^ e j o n V0SX
b. aksor ©ksor p o r i i k s a ksama l a k s m i i v a t s p r a t y a ks baxj" Jaxs a f s o s
Hindi prose passage
k i s i i j a t i ke j i v a n me u s ' k e d v a r a proyukt Jobdo ka o t y o n t mehettvopuurn^ s t h a n hoy. a v e j y o k ' t a t a t h a s t h i t i ke ©nusar i n prayukt Jahdo ka agam a t h ' v a l o p t o t h a v a c y , l a k s y evam dyoty bhavo me p o r i -vorten hota r e h - t a hoy. o t ' e v a avr s a m a g r i i ke abhav ma i n Jabdo ke dvara k i s i i j a t i ke j i i v e n k i i b h i n n b h i n n s t h i t i y o ka i t i h a s u p a s t h i t k i y a ja s a k - t a hay. i s i i adhar par a r y j a t i ka p r a c i i n ' t a m i t i h a s p r e -s t u t k iya gaya hay avr jyo jyo s a m a g r i i upolobdh h o t i i ja r o h i i h a y , tyo tyo yoh i t i h a s t n i i k k i y a ja raha hay . i s a v a s t h a me yah b a t s p a s t samajh me a s a k - t i i hay k i j a t i i y j i i v a n me Jabdo ka s t h a n k i t ' n e mahattv ka hoy. j a t i i y s a h i t y ko r a k s i t k a r - n e t a t h a u s - k e b h a v i s y ko sucaru avr samujval bonane ke a t i r i k t vah k i s i i bhasa k i i sampann'ta ya J e b d ' b a h u l 1 t a ka suucok avr us b h a s a ke s a h i t y ka adhyayan k o r - n e -va lo ka sab s e bo-pa sahayok b h i i h o t a hay . v i j e s ' t e h any b h a s a -bhas iyd avr v i d e j i y o ke l i y e t o u s - k a avr b h i i adhik upeyog hota hoy. in sob drs^iyo se Jobd-koj k i s i i b h a s a ke s a h i t y k i i muulyavan sampett i avr us bhasa ke bhancjar ka s a b s e ba^a n i d a r j a k hota hoy.
M A R A T H I S E C T I O N
C H A P T E R 1
ARRANGEMENT O P THE SYLLABARY
The Devanagari S c r i p t i s u s e d i n w r i t i n g Marathi ( Ep[r<§t ) and
the arrangement of the c h a r a c t e r s i n t h e s y l l a b a r y i s the same as
the Sanskr i t arrangement-'-. Some o f t h e c h a r a c t e r s are used on ly i n
w r i t i n g S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , b u t most o f them may be found i n l i t e r a r y
t e x t s .
The s c r i p t i s u s u a l l y r e f e r r e d t o as «JI c*S«T)*T (balobodh) , ' t h a t
can be understood by a c h i l d ' . T h i s name i s u s e d t o r e f e r to the
Devanagari s c r i p t t o d i s t i n g u i s h i t from the c u r s i v e s c r i p t a l s o u s e d
in w r i t i n g Marathi , and known a s q t ^ t (mocj i i ) . Each c h a r a c t e r i s
c a l l e d «3T~$TT (©ksor) and the s y l l a b i c s e r i e s i s c a l l e d 6Ju^|<v>|
(vorn©mala) , ' c h a r a c t e r - s e r i e s ' . The terms used by Marathi grammarians
in r e f e r r i n g to the c h a r a c t e r s a r e s i m i l a r t o t h o s e used i n S a n s k r i t ,
but as the r e a l i s a t i o n of the c h a r a c t e r s i n Marathi d i f f e r s somewhat
from the S a n s k r i t sys tem i n r e s p e c t o f consonant c h a r a c t e r s , t h e s e
terms are used i n t h i s s e c t i o n i n t h e i r Marathi form, and t r a n s c r i b e d
in accordance w i t h the Marathi r e a l i s a t i o n of the c h a r a c t e r s . The
d i f f e r e n c e between the terms u s e d i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n and the
corresponding Marathi terms i s i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e s e examples :
Sanskr i t ^{j j f^j^ ( e k s s r s m ) , Marathi ^3T IT ( o k s e r )
i^TPR": (v iramoh) , fotTW (viram)
^FcT ^ S f ( o n t o h s t h o ) , sS^TT^^r (©ntos th )
1. See S a n s k r i t , C h . l .
92 MARATHI SECTION
CONSONANTS w i t h © 1
Velar 2
P a l a t a l 3
R e t r o -f l e x
k D e n t a l
5 L a b i a l
Pl
os
iv
es
Voi
cele
ss
U n a s p i r a t e d k© C© -, t s © 1 t 9 t© p©
Pl
os
iv
es
Voi
cele
ss
A s p i r a t e d kh© ch© th© th© ph©
Pl
os
iv
es
Voi
ced U n a s p i r a t e d g© 3 9 1 a;© d© b©
Pl
os
iv
es
Voi
ced
A s p i r a t e d gh© jh© zh©-1- dh© dh© bh©
Pl
os
iv
es
Nasa l ( p © ) 2 n9 n© m©
Semivowels y© r© 1© v©-
F r i c a t i v e s s©
A s p i r a t e h©
L a t e r a l I 9
VOWELS © a i i i u UU e ©y 0 ©V
MODIFIERS5 Nasa l - nj , or ~ A s p i r a t e d - h
1. - h. See n o t e s on f o l l o w i n g p a g e . 5. See S a n s k r i t , Chapter 1.
The t a b l e g i v e n be low shows t h e arrangement of tbe Marathi s y l l -
abary i n roman n o t a t i o n . As the s y s t e m of w r i t i n g i s s y l l a b i c , t h e
c h a r a c t e r s i n the s y l l a b a r y r e p r e s e n t s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g e i t h e r of
a vowel or of a c o n s o n a n t f o l l o w e d by t h e vowel o . The roman t a b l e
shows each consonant w r i t t e n w i t h t h i s v o w e l , w h i c h , when i t i s r e a l -
i s e d With a consonant c h a r a c t e r , i s u s u a l l y r e f e r r e d to i n E n g l i s h
t e x t s as the ' i n h e r e n t v o w e l ' .
ARRANGEMENT OF THE SYLLABARY 93
Notes on the s y l l a b l e s marked 1.. - h. i n the roman t a b l e :
1. The c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g c o , ja and jho are r e a l i s e d i n
some words as a l v e o l a r c o n s o n a n t s , w i t h f r i c a t i v e or a f f r i c a t e d
a r t i c u l a t i o n . This r e a l i s a t i o n i s t r a n s c r i b e d as 1 sa , za and
zha , as shown i n the t a b l e .
2. The c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g na and jia do n o t occur as s i n g l e
c h a r a c t e r s , but o n l y i n c o m b i n a t i o n w i t h o t h e r c h a r a c t e r s , and
only i n S a n s k r i t loanwords u s e d i n t b e l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e .
3» The c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t i n g vo i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h l a b i o -
denta l a r t i c u l a t i o n .
I I . The c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g - s a and s y l l a b i c r occur on ly i n
Sanskr i t loanwords .
The s e r i e s of v o w e l s i n c l u d e s 1 s h o r t 1 i and ' l o n g ' i i , ' s h o r t ' u
and ' l o n g ' uu. These p a i r s of v o w e l s o c c u r i n Marathi w o r d s , and the
c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g t h e ' s h o r t ' and t h e ' l o n g ' v o w e l s are w r i t t e n
according t o c e r t a i n r u l e s o f orthography-'- . This d i s t i n c t i o n between
the ' s h o r t ' and the ' l o n g ' v o w e l s i s p r e s e r v e d i n t h e t r a n s c r i p t i o n
of the c h a r a c t e r s , though i n modern Marath i s p e e c h t h e r e i s o f t e n
l i t t l e d i f f e r e n c e between t h e p r o n u n c i a t i o n of words w r i t t e n w i t h the
c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g t h e ' s h o r t ' or t h e ' l o n g ' v o w e l s .
The term ' m o d i f i e r ' i s e x p l a i n e d i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n . F u l l y
n a s a l i s e d vowels are r a r e i n Marath i and t h e symbol irj i s u s e d f o r
t r a n s c r i b i n g the mark o f n a s a l i s a t i o n o n l y i n a s y s t e m a t i c t r a n s c r i p t -
ion of examples f o r the purpose o f d e s c r i b i n g t h e c o n t e x t s i n which i t
i s r e a l i s e d . In words i n which t h i s mark i s g i v e n z e r o - r e a l i s a t i o n ,
i t i s l e f t u n t r a n s c r i b e d .
1, See b e l o w , end of Chapter 2.
C H A P T E R 2
CHARACTERS OP THE SYLLABARY
The c h a r a c t e r s of the Devanagari S c r i p t u s e d i n w r i t i n g Marath i ,
and the r e a l i s a t i o n of them i n r e a d i n g , are d i s c u s s e d i n t h i s c h a p t e r
under the same h e a d i n g s a s t h e c h a r a c t e r s i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n :
1. Consonant C h a r a c t e r s ,
2. Vowel C h a r a c t e r s and Vowel S i g n s , and
3. M o d i f i e r s .
The s t y l e of the c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n i s t h e
s t y l e g e n e r a l l y u s e d i n Hindi p r i n t i n g and w r i t i n g . The forms of the
c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n t h a t s e c t i o n as 'Bombay' forms a re u s e d i n Marathi
p r i n t i n g and w r i t i n g i n s t e a d of the c o r r e s p o n d i n g Hindi f orms . Other
d i f f e r e n c e s of l i n e and form may be s e e n by comparing t h e c h a r a c t e r s
g iven i n t h i s s e c t i o n w i t h t h o s e g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n . The
Hindi s t y l e i s n o t u s e d i n Marathi p r i n t i n g or w r i t i n g .
The method of w r i t i n g t h e c h a r a c t e r s i s i n g e n e r a l t h e same as
t h a t d e s c r i b e d i n the I n t r o d u c t i o n , and i n t h e n o t e s on t h e c a l l i -
graphy of s p e c i a l c h a r a c t e r s as t h e y are g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t
s e c t i o n . When w r i t i n g t h e c h a r a c t e r s , r e f e r e n c e s h o u l d be made t o
the c o r r e s p o n d i n g groups o f c h a r a c t e r s i n t h a t section."'"
1. R e f e r e n c e s are g i v e n t h r o u g h o ut t h i s c h a p t e r t o the d i v i s i o n s and s u b - d i v i s i o n s w i t h t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g numbers i n Chapter 2. of the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 95
1 . Consonant C h a r a c t e r s .
The consonant c h a r a c t e r s ar e a r r a n g e d i n t h r e e g r o u p s : ' v o r g i i y '
c h a r a c t e r s , ' o n t e s t h ' c h a r a c t e r s and 'uusm' c h a r a c t e r s . ! As t h e y are
g iven i n the s y l l a b a r y , t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s are r e a l i s e d as s y l l a b l e s
c o n s i s t i n g of an i n i t i a l c o n s o n a n t , or s e m i - v o w e l , f o l l o w e d by the
vowel o , and t h e y are d e s c r i b e d a s 3T°BTT ( o k a r ) . The r e a l i s a t i o n
of a consonant c h a r a c t e r w i t h o u t t h i s v o w e l , t h a t i s , as the c o n s o n -
ant element of the s y l l a b l e o n l y , i s i n d i c a t e d by w r i t i n g a d i a g o n a l
s t roke known as fof^fiq" (v iram) a t t h e f o o t of t h e c h a r a c t e r , as i n
S a n s k r i t 2 , t h u s , cR , k - , cT , t - , TJ" , p - . Characters w r i t t e n V \ N
w i th t h i s s t r o k e are d e s c r i b e d by Marath i grammarians as ' h o l o n t ' ,
as in S a n s k r i t , but i n the t e a c h i n g of w r i t i n g i n Marathi s c h o o l s
the w r i t i n g of t h i s s t r o k e i s c a l l e d THT TftS' t (pay mo^onem,
'breaking the f o o t ' ) , and a c h a r a c t e r w i t h t h i s s t r o k e i s d e s c r i b e d
as 05*1% (longocjem, ' l a m e ' ) .
The r e a l i s a t i o n , of okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s i n r e a d i n g Marathi
d i f f e r s somewhat from the r e a l i s a t i o n o f t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s i n S a n s k r i t .
The f o l l o w i n g n o t e s may be r e g a r d e d a s g e n e r a l g u i d i n g p r i n c i p l e s t o
which r e f e r e n c e may be made l a t e r when t h e c h a r a c t e r s are d i s c u s s e d
i n d e t a i l .
a. A f i n a l okar consonant c h a r a c t e r i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o -
vowel , except i n a few S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s .
b . A f i n a l okar c h a r a c t e r formed by combin ing two or more consonant
characters3, or a f i n a l okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r precede d by a
1. See S a n s k r i t , Ch„2,1.1 - i i i . 2. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , l . i o okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , as d e s c r i b e d below i n n o t e s a. - d. a r e , h o w e v e r , n o t w r i t t e n w i t h the v iram, which i s used main ly i n w r i t i n g c e r t a i n S a n s k r i t loanwords and Marathi c o l l o q u i a l forms. 3. See b e l o w , Ch .3. i
MARATHI S E C T I O N
c h a r a c t e r w r i t t e n w i t h t h e a n u s v a r 1 r e p r e s e n t i n g a n a s a l c o n s o n a n t ,
i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h an © - g l i d e .
c . A media l ©kar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or
w i t h an © - g l i d e , i n c e r t a i n c o n t e x t s ; a s , f o r i n s t a n c e , when such
a c h a r a c t e r o c c u r s a s the s econd c h a r a c t e r of a word of t h r e e or
more c h a r a c t e r s and t h e f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r i s w r i t t e n w i t h one of 2
vowel s i g n s . Other c o n t e x t s are g i v e n l a t e r , when the c h a r a c t e r s
are d i s c u s s e d i n d e t a i l .
d. When an okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i s the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of a
v e r b a l "base, i t i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an
© - g l i d e , b e f o r e t h e a d d i t i o n of s u f f i x e s c o n s i s t i n g o f , or b e g i n -
n ing w i t h , a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r w i t h one of the vowel s i g n s .
In the t r a n s c r i p f i o n of Marathi w o r d s , f i n a l ©kar consonant
c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an © - g l i d e , are w r i t t e n
w i t h o u t © , and m e d i a l ©kar consonant c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d i n t h i s
way are w r i t t e n t h u s , k ' , t ' , p ' , f o r gu idance i n r e a d i n g . R e f e r e n c e
t o t h e s e n o t e s s h o u l d be made when r e a d i n g the examples g i v e n w i t h
the c h a r a c t e r s t h r o u g h o u t t h i s c h a p t e r . Charac ter s which do n o t
occur as i n i t i a l c h a r a c t e r s are i n d i c a t e d by a hyphen p r e f i x e d t o t h e
s y l l a b l e i n the roman t r a n s c r i p t i o n .
3
i . Charac ters of t h e v o r g i i y group.
The f i r s t group of consonant c h a r a c t e r s c o n s i s t s of t w e n t y f i v e
c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g s y l l a b l e s w i t h an i n i t i a l p l o s i v e consonant f o l l o w e d by the vowel © . These c h a r a c t e r s f a l l i n t o f i v e ofTf
( v o r g ) , or c l a s s e s . The c h a r a c t e r s i n the t a b l e g i v e n below may be
1. See b e l o w , 2 . i i . 3 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , l . i .
2 . See b e l o w , 2 . i i . Vowel s i g n s .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 97
35 7 ? XT k© kh© go gha
c©( t sa ) ch© j a(za) j h a ( z h a ) -jia
z z z, t 9 th© a;© aha
t© th© d© dha na
« r
P© ph© ba bha ma
compared wi th the S a n s k r i t c h a r a c t e r s , w r i t t e n i n the Hindi s t y l e .
ko-vorg
co -verg
Jo-verg
t o - v o r g
po -vorg
The c h a r a c t e r s and v3T" do n o t occur i n Marathi words , but
they are w r i t t e n , i n combinat ion w i t h o t h e r c h a r a c t e r s , i n some
Sanskr i t loanwords used i n the l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e .
The three c h a r a c t e r s , vrf and are r e a l i s e d i n r e a d i n g
in two ways , accord ing t o t h e word i n w h i c h the y o c c u r , and the
vowels w i t h which they are r e a l i s e d when w r i t t e n w i t h one of the
vowel s i g n s .
a. The p a l a t a l r e a l i s a t i o n , ^ a s c o , 3T as ja , and as
jha , i s made u s u a l l y i n r e a d i n g S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , and always
when t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s have t h e s i g n s of the vowe l s i , i i or ay.
b. The a l v e o l a r r e a l i s a t i o n , ^ a s 1 s© , \Jf a s za , and f£f
as zha , i s made u s u a l l y i n o t h e r w o r d s , when t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s
98 MARATHI S E C T I O N
1 . See b e l o w , i n t h i s c h a p t e r , 2 . i i . 2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s , s e e page 1 3 0 . The a l v e o l a r
r e a l i s a t i o n of c©-v©rg c h a r a c t e r s i s i n d i c a t e d by an a s t e r i s k .
are a k a r , or when t h e y ar e w r i t t e n w i t h the s i g n s of the v o w e l s
a , u , uu , o or ev-1-.
c . When t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s ar e w r i t t e n w i t h the s i g n of the vow61 e ,
the p a l a t a l and a l v e o l a r r e a l i s a t i o n s occur i n an a l m o s t even
d i s t r i b u t i o n of w o r d s , and even may vary from t ime t o t ime w i t h
chang ing c o n v e n t i o n s of s p e e c h .
No comprehens ive r u l e can be g i v e n f o r t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e s e
three c h a r a c t e r s , however , and i n the r e a d i n g examples t h e p a l a t a l
r e a l i s a t i o n s h o u l d be made u n l e s s an i n d i c a t i o n of the a l v e o l a r r e a l -
i s a t i o n i s g i v e n .
The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e the v a r y i n g r e a l i s a t i o n of okar
consonant c h a r a c t e r s i n c e r t a i n c o n t e x t s :
a. As the s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r of a f o u r c h a r a c t e r word:
^rxT«F> ' » dhamaka"!;© , r e a l i s e d as dham'ka-!;
b . In a v e r b a l form, t h e r e a l i s a t i o n changing a c c o r d i n g t o the f o r m-
a t i v e p a r t i c l e or p a r t i c l e s added:
tSTS , i^socjhe , v e r b a l b a s e , r e a l i s e d as tsod^h
TcTfi • tpod^hote , b a s e w i t h <=f added, r e a l i s e d as i^socjhet
^TS^^T » it6oc|hete1}S© , b a s e w i t h ^ , and emphat ic p a r t i c l e , W
r e a l i s e d as 1is©6 h ' t e ^ s .
p
Reading examples .
1 . One c h a r a c t e r words . Four of the v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s occur a s
words: TJ W <3>
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 99
1. See S a n s k r i t , C h.2 , l . i i .
2. Two c h a r a c t e r words; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
W\ W W BTT T^cT ^ ST*?
3. Three c h a r a c t e r words; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
q ^ r "TO^ *r<5Hr *T^cT 5 ^
eRSfi T35W> *W&rt VsTfT *vjTCcr *3mS
1+.' Four c h a r a c t e r words; s e c o nd c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l ,
or wi th an © - g l i d e , f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
T 3 w z erqsFie wjj?iz k w ^ z
^ o f i ^ '^qsRrT * ^ 5 R ^ T *^^rcRrT *ZhW*iZ *fTe°FRN
i i . Characters of the ©ntos th group."*"
The c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s group g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n are
w r i t t e n in the Hindi s t y l e . The Marath i c h a r a c t e r s a r e :
yo ro l o vo
When the c h a r a c t e r s and cf o c c u r i n i t i a l l y , or m e d i a l l y
r e a l i s e d w i t h a f o l l o w i n g v o w e l , t h e y a re r e a l i s e d as c o n s o n a n t s .
When they occur m e d i a l l y i n p o s i t i o n s i n which okar consonant
charac ters are r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or f i n a l l y , t h e y are r e a l i s -
ed as s e m i - v o w e l s , forming a d i p h t h o n g w i t h the vowel of the p r e c e d i n g
s y l l a b l e . Examples:
yevon vor bhoy l o v l o v ' k o r
ioo MARATHI S E C T I O N
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 3 0 . 2. See S a n s k r i t , C h .2,1. i i i .
Reading examples"'"
1. One c h a r a c t e r word. " i s the o n l y c h a r a c t e r i n t h i s group which
occurs as a word.
2. Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
^ 5 o r *rc m c*5*T
<q? vsz m as ^ *^5r
3 . Three c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
5T5c < ^ T tT65H ^TcT cPR W T 3 ^ T^rf
cFTO 35R 5 ofTST *xRcT * T<?T* * t t ^ * ^ s ? f ^ * c ( ^ T
h. Pour and f i v e c h a r a c t e r words . Second c h a r a c t e r i n f o u r c h a r a c t e r
words , or t h i r d c h a r a c t e r i n f i v e c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , r e a l i s e d w i t h
z e r o - v o w e l or w i t h an o - g l i d e ; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o -
vowel .
^oToRT opTTrT Z l V t t ^3"cT
TfftZV] ^ ^ c R c f TO^rf * W ? Q Z
2
i i i . Charac ters of t h e uusm group.
The c h a r a c t e r s o f t h i s group g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n are
w r i t t e n i n the Hindi s t y l e . The Marathi c h a r a c t e r s a r e :
51 ^ *T - f Jo s o so ho
The c h a r a c t e r "Gf o c c u r s o n l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , and when
r e a d i n g words i n common u s e i n Marath i , i t i s o f t e n r e a l i s e d as Jo ,
e x c e p t i n formal r e a d i n g . P i n a l f» i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h © .
C H A R A C T E R S O F T H E S Y L L A B A R Y IC
Reading e x a m p l e s 1
1 . None of the c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s group o c c u r s as a word.
2. Two c h a r a c t er words; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l ,
or , i n the l a s t t h r e e w o r d s , w i t h o .
TO *T5T ^ ^ $R W
5** ^e: ^TH W ^ 3 . Three c h a r a c t e r words; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
sro*r wm *rc*r ^F^rer TO^ * ^ n r * H ^ r
h. Four and f i v e c h a r a c t e r words . Second c h a r a c t e r s , or c h a r a c t e r s
i n d i c a t e d by numbers i n b r a c k e t s , r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l or w i t h
and e - g l i d e ; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
£ W r T f £ R * T HTSre 3TcT"qe " & V W
%*mz ^ T O C K J *iw>m;zp t r w * r w L ? J
The l a s t consonant c h a r a c t e r i n t h e Marathi s y l l a b a r y i s 2
o5" , -],Q , r e a l i s e d as a r e t r o f l e x l a t e r a l c o n s o n a n t w i t h © .
Examples of words w r i t t e n w i t h t h i s c h a r a c t e r
Uo5 XFIOS "^["55" ^?TO5" * WOFOS ^ 5 5 ^ oToStr CJAFOS
tJoSH *xT55cl55 ^o5gR3" **R\3TcT55 (2) SfJoSlToSrT t2) * o o ^ *
The two c h a r a c t e r s $T and ^" a r e o f t e n added a f t e r 55 i n the
Marathi s y l l a b a r y , but t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s , r e p r e s e n t i n g s y l l a b l e s c o n -
s i s t i n g of two c o n s e c u t i v e c o n s o n a n t s w i t h the vowel © , do not
' p r o p e r l y b e l o n g t o the s y l l a b a r y , and a r e d i s c u s s e d l a t e r . ^ 1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e page 1 3 0 . 2. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 1 . i i i , Ved ic c h a r a c t e r . 3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e page 1 3 0 . ©kar consonan t c h a r a c t e r s
r e a l i s e d as shown in p r e v i o u s e x a m p l e s . h. See be low, Ch .3 . Conjunct C h a r a c t e r s , C l a s s e s 2. and h.
102 M A R A T H I S E C T I O N
2 . Vowel C h a r a c t e r s and Vowel S i g n s 1 .
i . Vowel C h a r a c t e r s .
The vowel c h a r a c t e r s u s e d i n w r i t i n g Marathi are the same as the
S a n s k r i t c h a r a c t e r s , u s i n g t h e Bombay forms where t h e s e d i f f e r from 2
the Hindi f o r m s , and o m i t t i n g s y l l a b i c rr , 1 and 11 . The vowel
c h a r a c t e r s are u s u a l l y p l a c e d f i r s t i n the vernomala . The c a l l i g r a p h y
of the vowel c h a r a c t e r s i s i l l u s t r a t e d i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
The Marathi vowel c h a r a c t e r s a r e :
© a i i i u uu e ©y o ©v
The c h a r a c t e r ^? , s y l l a b i c r , occurs o n l y i n a few S a n s k r i t
l o a n w o r d s , u s e d m a i n l y i n t h e l i t e r a r y language The vowel c h a r a c t e r s
are r e f e r r e d t o a s akar , i k a r , ukar , and so on.
In a l l r e a d i n g e x a m p l e s which f o l l o w , okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s
which occur i n words h a v i n g vowel c h a r a c t e r s or vowel s i g n s s h o u l d
be r e a l i s e d a c c o r d i n g t o t h e g e n e r a l r u l e s a l r e a d y g i v e n , u n l e s s
s p e c i a l n o t e s are added .
Reading examples- ' .
1 . Vowel c h a r a c t e r s o n l y . $fl TJ 3Tt 3TT^
2 . Vowel c h a r a c t e r s w i t h ©kar consonant c h a r a c t e r s .
6T§ f$ *T«F5 %fi s f f e a f fe
"fc 3Tto5 <3tW W*T
*^5r^r 3 5 ? r ^osi sfcrsr a f t o s ^ -
1 . The u s e of vowel c h a r a c t e r s and vowel s i g n s i s e x p l a i n e d i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t - i o n , C h . 2 , 2 . i . 2 . i b i d . 2 . 2 . i .
3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p , 1 3 0 .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 103
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 2 . i i . C a l l i g r a p h y .
i i . Vowel S i g n s .
Vowel s i g n s c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o e a c h vowel c h a r a c t e r , e x c e p t ,
are added to the okar form of c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s t o r e p r e s e n t
s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g of an i n i t i a l c o n s o n a n t f o l l o w e d by one of the
vowels a to ov . The vowel s i g n s a r e shown h e r e added t o t h e c o n -
sonant charac te r of) . The order o f s t r o k e s i n w r i t i n g c h a r a c t e r s w i t h
vowel s i g n s , and s p e c i a l f o r m s , are g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n l .
ka k i k i i ku kuu k r ke key ko kev
In the t e a c h i n g of w r i t i n g i n s c h o o l s , t h e u p r i g h t s t r o k e of^TT,
\3TT and <2rft , and of the c o r r e s p o n d i n g vowel s i g n s , as i n oRT ,
and o^* , i s r e f e r r e d t o as obi HI ( k a n a ) . This term i s a l s o used i n
r e f e r r i n g to the u p r i g h t s t r o k e i n any c h a r a c t e r . The d i a g o n a l
s u p e r s c r i b e d s t r o k e s i n t h e c h a r a c t e r s TT , vsfr and , and of
the vowel s i g n s i n % , ofe , oRt and oFvt" » a r e r e f e r r e d t o as
J-|T5f"i (matra ) . The s i g n s of t h e v o w e l s g and ^ are r e f e r r e d t o
as %?5f€t ( v e l a ^ i i ) , the s i g n i n ft> b e i n g ^T^t %c7f€t" (d^avii
v e l a n J i i , ' l e f t v e l a n ^ i i ' ) and t h e s i g n i n b e i n g ^vSTcft" %"c t€1*
( u z o v i i v e l a n j ; i i , ' r i g h t v e l a n j ; i i ' ) . A l l t h e vowel s i g n s are r e f e r r e d
to as <e^U| (khuun_, p l u r a l khuna.).
In some modern Marathi p u b l i c a t i o n s new forms of some of the
vowel c h a r a c t e r s are b e i n g u s e d , formed by w r i t i n g the vowel s i g n s
wi th the c h a r a c t e r \3? , t h u s :
% 3fr <f 3j; <3J $ &
i i i u uu r e oy
104 MARATHI S E C T I O N
Reading e x a m p l e s 1
1 . One c h a r a c t e r words .
W f t % ^ % % *fr TIT % %
2. Two c h a r a c t e r words .
^ W § f e **fN" ^fa ^ tc^ % r T 3 ^ oBTq ^ t*T ^noT ^"cT ofsfoT ^ 3fa s f j ^ ^ ^
^>"^T s f t ^ f$T5J UTrft 4nrf JJ?> * # ^ T
*n3> ^Bfir ^ % | spg 3TfooT
3 . Three c h a r a c t e r w o r d s .
w r a %ft*r ^oj^r ^ fcp f i =ft^5T %§5> t ^ s "
sR^tT frcTR" *^-i frT « m i
^\ *^tm€t -rt\S[ f ^ s F n ^ %TPn~ f ^ r ^ f l r
R e a l i s a t i o n of m e d i a l okar c h a r a c t e r s i n words which have 2
c h a r a c t e r s w i t h vowel s i g n s i n v a r i o u s p o s i t i o n s .
a. When a media l okar c h a r a c t e r , i n a t h r e e c h a r a c t e r word, p r e c e d e s
a f i n a l c h a r a c t e r w i t h a vowel s i g n , i t i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h
z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an o - g l i d e , and and of form d i p h t h o n g s
w i t h the vowel of t h e p r e c e d i n g c h a r a c t e r s , as i n
ORl^Toft >$T"*ft IpSTT ofJTW ®TT iY
a r / k h i i r e j ' m i i mul 'ga k a y ' d a h a v ' ^ i i
5T*lit *TT5F>tr ^oR^T 3TcRT ^NTTT
J e g ' ^ i i b h a k ' r i i chok'd^a o^h'ra k o y ' t a
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of examples s e e p . 1 3 0 . 2. Compare t h e s e n o t e s w i t h n o t e s b . and c . above i n t h i s c h a p t e r .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY ic
The r e a l i s a t i o n of okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s i n words of four or
more c h a r a c t e r s i s i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e examples g i v e n be low. The
r e a l i s a t i o n v a r i e s a c c o r d i n g t o t h e p o s i t i o n i n each word of the
c h a r a c t e r s w i t h vowel s i g n s , and a knowledge of the language i s
the only r e l i a b l e g u i d e t o t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of such words .
Second c h a r a c t er r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an o - g l i d e :
t t r T c F ^ i - m^Tr^ % c^^t^ T m w «
J e t ' k o r i i bhan'god^ vel'dod^a saa^'pataT,
Third c h a r a c t e r r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an a - g l i d e :
r r rwf^r *rfa<5c^r *rrg^?fr t a b e d / t o b mobad' la b h a t u k ' l i i
Other c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an o - g l i d e :
t t f^Fs^ r r - q w ^ n f r ^ T ^ T T ^ R p a l i k a d / t s a p o r ' v a n ' g i i s e m ' z u u t ' d a r
When a s u f f i x c o n s i s t i n g o f , or b e g i n n i n g w i t h , a c h a r a c t e r w i t h
a vowel s i g n i s added t o a v e r b a l b a s e end in g i n an okar c o n s o n -
ant c h a r a c t e r , t h i s f i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l ,
or w i t h an a - g l i d e , as i n t h e s e e x a m p l e s :
has b a s a t b a s - t o va\ va^ot v a ^ - t a t
When such s u f f i x e s are added t o v e r b a l b a s e s of t h r e e or more
c h a r a c t e r s of which t h e f i n a l and p r e f i n a l are okar consonant
c h a r a c t e r s , the r e a l i s a t i o n o f akar c h a r a c t e r s v a r i e s i n the way
i l l u s t r a t e d by the examples g i v e n b e l o w .
Verbal base of t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s :
semoz sam*za s a m ' z a t s a m a z - t o s a m a z - t i l
106 M A R A T H I S E C T I O N
Verbal base of f o u r c h a r a c t e r s , s e c o n d , t h i r d and f o u r t h okar:
fcTT^ST^ f ^ ^ c ^ T f ^ - E T o S c T "f^T^To5c5T vir 'gheT, v i r ' g h o l u u n v i r ' g h e l . o t v i r 'ghaT_- l a
Reading e x a m p l e s 1
1. R e a l i s a t i o n of okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s as i n n o t e a. above .
^^NFTtfT. ^HcTT ' $ 5 % >3W«IT W & h
^fe^vST oRT^fr *^3Ta^ f t f ^ ^ U T ^3TR *g5R?ITxr
^ q r ^ r ^w^xcfc fia^^rr ffe-snajoR ^ i ^ w
2 . R e a l i s a t i o n of okar consonan t c h a r a c t e r s as i n n o t e b . above ,
ofioo-rr cfioScTt " T O T T W T c T T c T ^ T T ^ ^ T ^ 6 # $ 5
f%^T€ fll^npt ft^&OT \ 3 T ^ ^ T o 5 r f ^TSWoScTTrT
p R e a l i s a t i o n of c h a r a c t e r s of the c o - v e r g w i t h vowel s i g n s .
The t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s xjT , \xT and , are a lways r e a l i s e d as
p a l a t a l c o n s o n a n t s when t h e y a r e w r i t t e n w i t h t h e vowel s i g n s of i
or i i , or w i t h any vowel s i g n i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s . They ar e r e a l -
i s e d more f r e q u e n t l y as a l v e o l a r c o n s o n a n t s when w r i t t e n w i t h o t h e r
vowel s i g n s . When w r i t t e n w i t h the vowel s i g n of e , t h e a l v e o l a r or
p a l a t a l r e a l i s a t i o n may vary from t ime t o t ime and from d i s t r i c t t o
d i s t r i c t . The r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s as a l v e o l a r or as p a l -
a t a l c o n s o n a n t s i n v a r i o u s c o n t e x t s i s i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e examples
g i v e n b e l o w , but t h e o n l y r e l i a b l e g u i de f o r r e a d i n g the m a j o r i t y of
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p.131. 2 . See a b o v e , n o t e on t h e v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s , i n l . i .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 10
3txT vac on n i i c c o l o n c e y n ceha car c e h e r a cuup
kocora jen me ja u j e q juva jeven_ j h e l a
c . A l v e o l a r r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s , o k a r , or w i t h any vowel
s i g n except t h o s e of i , i i or ey :
^>ft WR W*TWT ^ dfft ^cfi
t s o t ' n i i t s a r t s o m ' t s a t s u u k t i t s e t s o r t s e v k KJ fa I , %J Kf %J KJ <J <J
^ f t ^r^t "OT r . ^r te %r ZQT[ vezon semez zaga "bazuu v a z e l zor
zhofken^ zhad^ zhucjuup mazhe zhop
The emphatic p a r t i c l e t£T , w r i t t e n as the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of a
word, i s always r e a l i s e d a s an a l v e o l a r c o n s o n a n t . The words
-oftvji and "SffaT a r e r e a l i s e d r e s p e c t i v e l y as c i i z and j h i i z
The vowel c h a r a c t e r s ^ and 3 ( ' s h o r t ' v o w e l s ) and j§ and 35
( ' l o n g ' v o w e l s ) , and the c o r r e s p o n d i n g vowel s i g n s , are w r i t t e n i n
Marathi words a c c o r d i n g t o c e r t a i n r u l e s of or thography . These
r u l e s inc lude r e f e r e n c e t o t h e o r t h o g r a p h y of t h e m o d i f i e r known as
words in which t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r i s a knowledge of the l a n g u a g e ,
a. P a l a t a l r e a l i s a t i o n w i t h t h e v o w e l s i g n s of i , i i :
c i k o t ciid^ b h a c i i j i i b h a j i i m a j h i i
h. P a l a t a l r e a l i s a t i o n i n S a n s k r i t and Hindi l o a n w o r d s , and o t h e r s ,
wi th the remaining vowel s i g n s :
108 MARATHI S E C T I O N
<3T m t 3 *
T orrj am im iirrj uirj errj orrj
5R SET # f karrj icarrj kiirj kiirrj kurrj kerrj korrj
The onusvar i s w r i t t e n t o the r i g h t s i d e of a s u p e r s c r i b e d vowel
s i g n . The order o f s t r o k e s i n w r i t i n g c h a r a c t e r s w i t h vowel s i g n s
and the onusvar i s g i v e n i n the n o t e s on c a l l i g r a p h y i n t h e S a n s k r i t
s e c t i o n .
The onusvar i s r e a l i s e d i n Marathi as f o l l o w s :
a. The onusvar , o r i g i n a l l y a mark i n d i c a t i n g n a s a l i s a t i o n of a v o w e l ,
i s s t i l l w r i t t e n i n many Marathi words i n which the v o w e l s are
not n a s a l i s e d i n s t a n d a r d modern s p e e c h . The onusvar i n such words
i s d i s r e g a r d e d i n r e a d i n g , though i t i s s t i l l w r i t t e n e i t h e r t o
show the e t y m o l o g y of a word, t o p r e s e r v e a d i s t i n c t i o n of meaning
i n p a i r s of words i n which one has a vowel which was o r i g i n a l l y
n a s a l i s e d , or t o e x p r e s s grammatical r e l a t i o n s h i p s . Charac ter s
1. See b e l o w . 3 . i . 2 . See S a n s k r i t , C h , 2 . 3 . i .
t h e a n u s v a r ! , and a re t h e r e f o r e g i v e n i n the f u l l s t a t e m e n t of Marathi
r u l e s of Orthography, a f t e r the m o d i f i e r s have b e e n d i s c u s s e d .
3 . M o d i f i e r s .
Both the m o d i f i e r s o c c u r r i n g i n S a n s k r i t are u s e d i n w r i t i n g
Marathi, , though t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of them d i f f e r s from the r e a l i s a t i o n
i n r e a d i n g S a n s k r i t . 2
1 . o n u s v a r .^
The anusvar i s a lways w r i t t e n i n Marathi i n t h e form of a dot
p l a c e d above a c h a r a c t e r , t h u s :
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 109
w r i t t e n w i t h the onusvar a r e , h o w e v e r , s t i l l r e a l i s e d w i t h n a s a l -
i s a t i o n of the vowel i n Konkani s p e e c h l . The f o l l o w i n g examples
i l l u s t r a t e some of the c o n t e x t s i n which the anusvar i s w r i t t e n
hut not r e a l i s e d i n r e a d i n g .
Words:
tuu t o
Pa ir s of words:
Grammatical forms:
k i i
TO 2
nav^
he
"SBTiff
k a h i i
TO
nav^
# t i i
dat gohuu
#5T
p o t s
p a t s ^ p a t s 5
b a s - t o b o l - t e kor-uu
^Tc t t wfa g ^ T ^ f * l ^ t # ^ ^ f f ^r^r
y e - t a b a g e t mulane m u l a n i i m u l a j i i g h o r i i
An onusvar p l a c e d on a f i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s n e v er r e a l i s e d ,
except i n c e r t a i n c o n t e x t s i n modern Marathi w r i t i n g i n which
a d a p t a t i o n s of the s c r i p t ar e made i n order t o r e p r e s e n t c o l l o -c
quia l forms of s p e e c h , a s i n drama and d i a l o g u e .
h. In many words , i n c l u d i n g most S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , the onusvar
w r i t t e n on a c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d i n g one of the v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s
i s r e a l i s e d as the n a s a l c o n s o n a n t o f t h e same c l a s s as the
consonant r e p r e s e n t e d by t h e f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r , or as n
be fore a c h a r a c t e r of t h e c o - v a r g . When the anusvar i s r e a l i s e d
as a n a s a l consonant b e f o r e a f i n a l akar consonant c h a r a c t e r ,
1. The v a r i e t y of Marathi s p e e c h known a s 'Konkani s t a n d a r d ' i s spoken on the c o a s t a l s t r i p s o u t h of Bombay, the Konkan (korrjkori).
2 . ' b o a t ' . 3 . 'name' . U. ' e m e r a l d ' . 5 . ' f i v e ' . 6. See be low, Marathi r u l e s of o r t h o g r a p h y . 7. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i . n o t e b .
n o M A R A T H I S E C T I O N
the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d w i t h an © - g l i d e 1 . T h i s r e a l i s -
a t i o n of the ©nusvar i s i l l u s t r a t e d hy t h e f o l l o w i n g e x a m p l e s :
t*r ^ vsMtr zz f*m flttft ^ rang u n t s © n j i i r unj; b h i n t J i m p i i themb
As i n S a n s k r i t , t h e r e i s . an a l t e r n a t i v e method of r e p r e s e n t i n g
n a s a l c o n s o n a n t s p r e c e d i n g v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s . This method i s p
d e s c r i b e d l a t e r , i n t h e d i s c u s s i o n of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s .
When s u f f i x e s are added t o p l u r a l nouns and p r o n o u n s , t h e anusvar
i s w r i t t e n on the c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d i n g t h e s u f f i x . T h i s onusvar
i s r e a l i s e d as n b e f o r e the v a r i o u s forms of the s u f f i x ,
and o f t e n r e a l i s e d b e f o r e the s u f f i x e s • " f t and "$?T » e . g . r*TRT c*?Hfr 7*?HT rm^f mtff
tyan-1^sa^ t y a n - c i i t yan-n a t y a n - n i i t y a n - J i i
c . When the onusvar i s w r i t t e n on a c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d i n g one of t h e
o n t o s t h or uusm c h a r a c t e r s , as i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , m o s t l y
l e a r n e d words u s e d i n the l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e , i t i s r e a l i s e d i n
v a r i o u s ways . Among t h e ways of r e a l i s i n g t h e onusvar i n such
w o r d s , g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n ^ - , the u s u a l Marathi p r a c t i c e
i s i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e f o l l o w i n g e x a m p l e s :
onusvar b e f o r e T f , r e a l i s e d as y , as i n s a y y o g
onusvar b e f o r e c > » r e a l i s e d as 1 , as i n Hc/^M s o l l o g h 5
onusvar b e f o r e o t h e r o n t o s t h and uusm c h a r a c t e r s , r e a l i s e d a s v .
s a v r e k s o i ] ^ k i v v a ©vj" ©hivsa mavs s i v h
1 . See b e l o w , C h . 3 , 2 . 2 . i b i d . , 3 . C l a s s i i . 3 . The f i r s t c h a r a c t e r i n t h e s e words i s <T combined w i t h ZJ" . See Ch. 3 * 3 * CI. 3 .
2+. See S a n s k r i t ,Ch. 2 , 3 . i . n o t e c . N 5 . The l a s t c h a r a c t e r i n t h i s word i s "*Ts combined w i t h ^ . See Ch. 3 , 3 . CI. 2 . i i i . 6 . The c h a r a c t e r
r e p r e s e n t s 3 5 combined w i t h ^ . See C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 4 . i . b .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY u
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i i . 2 . The f i r s t c h a r a c t e r i n t h i s word i s combined w i t h of • See Ch. 2 , 3 . C I . 3 . i i .
In some e i g h t e e n t h c e n t u r y m a n u s c r i p t s the c h a r a c t e r "67 i s i n -s
s e r t e d between the c h a r a c t e r w i t h t h e onusvar and a f o l l o w i n g
o n t o s t h or uusm c h a r a c t e r , f o r m i n g a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r w i t h i t ;
e . g . Ho^R > sovhar , R jo^ , s i v h , ^o^gJTJr , sevrokson, .
d. The onusvar i s r e a l i s e d as n a s a l i s a t i o n of a vowel i n a few e x -
c l a m a t i o n s ; e . g . n3 " , o , v J • nil ; and i n the number word
T?fr , o y j i i .
i i . v i s o r g .
This modi f i er i s d e s c r i b e d i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n 1 . I t i s r a r e l y
used in w r i t i n g Marathi . I t o c c u r s i n a few S a n s k r i t l oanwords , and
i s sometimes w r i t t e n w i t h e x c l a m a t i o n s , t o i n d i c a t e p r o l o n g a t i o n or
s t r e s s . When i t i s w r i t t e n w i t h t h e f i n a l c h a r a c t e r i n S a n s k r i t l o a n -
words, i t i s r e a l i s e d as h f o l l o w e d by the vowel a , as i n t h e s e
words: "^T: , punha, "ipoTf: , s v e t a h a 2 , f c ^ Qij T: , v i / e s ' t o h a .
When the v i s o r g occurs m e d i a l l y i n a word, i t i s r e a l i s e d e i t h e r as
the doubl ing of the consonant o f t h e c h a r a c t e r which f o l l o w s i t , or
as a s p i r a t i o n a f t e r the vowel o f t h e c h a r a c t e r w i t h which i t i s
w r i t t e n ; e . g . c^ :^ » dukkh, \3TcT:F5T T > antohkorer; .
When the v i s o r g i s w r i t t e n a f t e r e x c l a m a t i o n s , i t u s u a l l y r e p r e s e n t s
a p r o l o n g a t i o n of the v o w e l , or a s p i r a t i o n a f t e r t h e v o w e l , as i n
t h e s e words: vjy. , u u . . . , or uuh ; f£s , cheh ; cfT,, vah .
I I 2 MARATHI S E C T I O N
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , i + . 2 . i b i d . , 5 . 3 . i b i d . , 6 .
U. The Complete S y l l a b a r y .
The arrangement o f t h e c h a r a c t e r s of the Marathi s y l l a b a r y i n the
t r a d i t i o n a l order i s s i m i l a r t o t h a t g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n , 1
o m i t t i n g the vowel c h a r a c t e r s ^ , ^ and c£ , and u s i n g o n l y the
'Bombay' forms . The t a b l e i n which the vowel c h a r a c t e r s ( e x c e p t *R ),
and the m o d i f i e r s added t o the c h a r a c t e r \3Ff , are p l a c e d a t the
head of a s e r i e s of columns c o n s i s t i n g o f e v e r y consonant c h a r a c t e r
i n the okar form, w i t h e a c h o f the vowel s i g n s and each of t h e modi -
f i e r s , i s c a l l e d i n Marathi the «rTCR°l«£l > barakhoc^ii , the ' t w e l v e
c h a r a c t e r s ' . This t a b l e i s o f t e n r e c i t e d i n s c h o o l s by c h i l d r e n l e a r n -
i n g t o r e a d .
These two t a b l e s show t h e order i n which the c h a r a c t e r s are
p l a c e d as i n i t i a l c h a r a c t e r s of words i n d i c t i o n a r i e s , which i s the
same as t h e order i n S a n s k r i t , e x c e p t t h a t no s p e c i a l p l a c e i s g i v e n
t o c h a r a c t e r s w i t h the o n u s v a r . This d i f f e r e n c e i n order i s i l l u s t r a t -
ed by the f o l l o w i n g s e r i e s :
S a n s k r i t : a a i arrjyo arrjj"© arrjh© ak© akh© . .
Marathi : a a i ak© arrjk© akh© arrjkh© . . . ay© arrjy© arrjj"© . .
5 . Numerals .
The numerals u s e d i n Marathi are the 'Bombay' forms g i v e n i n the p
S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
6 . P u n c t u a t i o n .
In p r o s e w r i t i n g , t h e same sys t em of p u n c t u a t i o n i s u s e d as i n
E n g l i s h p r o s e . The s y s t e m u s e d i n Marathi v e r s e i s the same as the
S a n s k r i t s y s t e m . ^
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 1 1 3
1 . See above, C h . l . 2. These r u l e s apply to the vowel s i g n s c o r r e s p o n d i n g w i t h the
vowel c h a r a c t e r s .
Rules of Marathi Orthography.
The r u l e s of Marathi o r t h o g r a p h y c o n c e r n the w r i t i n g of the
vowels and 3 ( ^fT*T » h r a s v , or ' s h o r t ' v o w e l s ) and j§" and
, d i i r g h , or ' l o n g ' v o w e l s ) 1 ; and t h e w r i t i n g of the
onusvar i n c e r t a i n words and i n g r a m m a t i c a l forms . Some of the t r a d -
i t i o n a l r u l e s are b e i n g m o d i f i e d i n modern Marathi w r i t i n g , new r u l e s
having been p r e s c r i b e d i n 1932 by t h e Maharashtra L i t e r a t u r e S o c i e t y
( *T!»TTn| T n f ^ r ^ T "*rfW«T » m e h a r a s t r o s a h i t y o p o r i s o d ) . Some
of these r u l e s have become w i d e l y a c c e p t e d . The r u l e s g i v e n below are
s t a t e d f i r s t in terms of ' s t a n d a r d ' o r t h o g r a p h y , f o l l o w e d by the
m o d i f i c a t i o n s recommended by t h e Maharashtra L i t e r a t u r e S o c i e t y .
i . Rules concerning the w r i t i n g of ?[ , and 3" > 3r> 2 «
a. The ' l o n g ' vowel c h a r a c t e r s and v o w e l s i g n s are w r i t t e n i n a f i n a l
p o s i t i o n ; e . g .
^Tla b a i i Hlool m a l i i bhauu W\°£> t sakuu
E x c e p t i o n s : ^fr f^T a n i , and some S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s ,
such as oftfcj k a v i guru
The vowels of the ' crude form' of nouns f o l l o w t h i s r u l e r e g a r d -
ing ' f i n a l ' c h a r a c t e r s b e f o r e t h e a d d i t i o n of s u f f i x e s ; e . g .
^ o ^ l c M m u l i i - l a ohoH-^l k a v i i - t s a ^ J ' ^ f guruu-ne
Pronouns are w r i t t e n w i t h the ' s h o r t ' v o w e l s : fclcrtl t i l a , "^c^ST t u l a
b. The ' l o n g ' vowel c h a r a c t e r s and v o w e l s i g n s are w r i t t e n i n a media l
p o s i t i o n immediate ly b e f o r e a f i n a l okar consonant c h a r a c t e r ; e . g .
°h t i i k \5fT^o5 z a i i l *|c?> muul "^B*T gheuun
i i4 M A R A T H I S E C T I O N
E x c e p t i o n s : The ' s h o r t ' vowe l s are w r i t t e n i n some S a n s k r i t l o a n -
w o r d s , e . g . I rt , h i t , > purus ; when t h e y occur w i t h
the onusvar b e f o r e a f i n a l ekar consonant c h a r a c t e r , as i n
b h i n t , , u n t s ; or when the y o c c ur b e f o r e a f i n a l c o n j u n c t
c h a r a c t e r 1 , as i n , c i t r 2 , monusy^. The S a n s k r i t
or thography i s p r e s e r v e d i n S a n s k r i t loanwords such a s *JT t •
muurkh^, and cft"5T , t i i v r 2 .
c . In a l l o t h e r p o s i t i o n s , or f o l l o w e d by any f i n a l c h a r a c t e r e x c e p t
an okar consonant c h a r a c t e r , the ' s h o r t ' vowe l s are w r i t t e n ; e . g .
1*<ft firs* gsRsr f^r%%-
k i t i i t ik 'd 'e t u k ' ^ a v i h i i r ( c r u d e form, v i h i r i i - )
E x c e p t i o n s : Some S a n s k r i t loanwords , e . g. TJ^J , p u u j a , "vftfff b h i i t i .
i i . Rules c o n c e r n i n g t h e onusvar w r i t t e n i n grammatical f o r m s . 5
a. A l l n e u t e r f o r m s , s i n g u l a r and p l u r a l , e n d i n g - i n Tf , |£ or »
are w r i t t e n w i t h t h e onusvar on t h e s e f i n a l v o w e l s ; e . g .
he t i i l u g ' a ^ i i ker'cjuu mule bhanj^e
s f t i f ^ r f 5TT§5 ^ W%
mo^he t h o c | i i poc[*te z h a l e k e l i i yave
E x c e p t i o n s : c*£|uf| , l o n i i and HI UD , p a n i i . The word ^T^* ,
gehuu , i s m a s c u l i n e p l u r a l .
In modern Marathi s p e e c h , the vowel , i n t h e n e u t e r forms of
w o r d s , i s o f t e n r e a l i s e d as o , i n in formal s p e e c h . This change
of spoken form i s o f t e n r e p r e s e n t e d by w r i t i n g the onusvar a l o n e ,
1 . See b e l o w , C h . 3 . 2. ib id . 3 . C l a s s 3 . i i i . b . 3 . i b i d . C l a s s 3 . i . L. i b i d . C l a s s 3 « i i i . a . 5. The onusvar i n not u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d
i n grammatical forms,* e x c e p t i n the c o n t e x t g i v e n be low i n b .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY n
a s , f or i n s t a n c e , i n the d i a l o g u e o f n o v e l s or dramas; e . g .
«ltf *Ttt 5ft 5R zha le zha lo bhancje bhan^o bore baro
b. The onusvar i s w r i t t e n on t h e c h a r a c t e r which has the vowel of
the 'crude form' of words t o w h i c h t h e s u f f i x rT1 i s added, i n the
s i n g u l a r , and b e f o r e a l l s u f f i x e s i n the p l u r a l , e . g .
ghora- t b a g e - t k h o l i i - t man/sa-huun m u l a - n i i
The onusvar w r i t t e n on the c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t i n g the 'crude form'
of words b e f o r e the a d d i t i o n o f t h e s u f f i x Tiff i s a lways r e a l i s e d
as n , and o f t e n b e f o r e o t h e r s u f f i x e s 2 .
c . The onusvar i s w r i t t e n on t h e c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g c e r t a i n
s u f f i x e s ; e . g . , ^ , $ \ , ^ and \3 T ; and on the
f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of p a r t i c l e s e n d i n g i n v3TT , 5 * ^ a n d >
e . g . TRf mage, pudhe , c" |<*£T k h a l i i , v3fl"cft a t a .
Except ion : cf)^" koa"e
S u f f i x e s and p a r t i c l e s e n d i n g i n a c h a r a c t e r w i t h the vowel s i g n
of M" are o f t e n spoken i n modern Marathi w i t h f i n a l o . When
these forms occur i n the d i a l o g u e of dramas or n o v e l s , the f i n a l
charac ter i s o f t e n w r i t t e n w i t h t h e onusvar a l o n e , o m i t t i n g the
matra, as i n XJcf , pucjhe , X£i5 , pua"he , IfRf » mage ,
*TT"*T , mago . This use of t h e onusvar t o r e p r e s e n t the forms of
c o l l o q u i a l speech i s somet imes e x t e n d e d t o the p a r t i c l e oR% >
and to some p a r t i c l e s i n "3)*T » e . g . ef", " kod"© , TTSJ^f , pasuun ,
tTTTFT pas 'no , f ^ c f i ^ T , t ik'd^uun , fecR^ » t i k e d / n o .
1 . The mark of n a s a l i s a t i o n i s p a r t o f t h e s u f f i x , which r e p r e s e n t s the word OTTrT , St . The i n i t i a l vowe l of t h i s word c o a l e s c e s w i t h the vowel of the crude form of t h e noun t o which i t i s added as a s u f f i x . 2 . See a b o v e , 3 . M o d i f i e r s , i . b .
n6 M A R A T H I S E C T I O N
1 . The c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t s mho
d. The anusvar i s w r i t t e n on c e r t a i n s u f f i x e s added t o v e r b a l b a s e s :
1 s t . p e r s o n s i n g u l a r and p l u r a l :
elf - t o r f - t e ^ - i i - e 3F> -uu - l o ^5" - l e
and the v e r b a l forms \3Tf^" » a h e > 3TT^f > a h o . a n d • T l ^ f n a h i i
2nd. p e r s o n p l u r a l : eff , t a , >3fl" , a , and off > ^a
and the v e r b a l forms ^ T ^ f > aha , and ' T T ^ f , n a h i i
3 r d . p e r s o n s i n g u l a r and p l u r a l : • i f ^ n a h i i and ••""(CTh n a h i i t
and a l l n e u t e r forms which change i n the same way as v a r i a b l e
a d j e c t i v e s .
S u f f i x e s which ar e added t o form v e r b a l p a r t i c l e s :
cTT t t a , clMI > tana , ^ , uu , and ^ , r e ( somet imes
w r i t t e n i n d i a l o g u e a s "OT and r e a l i s e d as r[© )
e . The onusvar i s w r i t t e n on c e r t a i n forms of t h e p e r s o n a l p r o n o u n s ,
when t h e y s t a n d i n t h e same grammatical r e l a t i o n s h i p t o o t h e r
words as nouns and pronouns w i t h the a d d i t i o n of the s u f f i x e s
and ^ff . e.g. i f f , m i i s33""X"s£t , a m h i i 1 cj^lft , t u m h i i 1 ,
of i tof i , kon. i l .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 117
Rules of Orthography of t h e Maharashtra L i t e r a t u r e S o c i e t y .
The m o d i f i c a t i o n of the r u l e s o f s t a n d a r d or thography recommend-
ed hy the Maharashtra L i t e r a t u r e S o c i e t y are m a i n l y concerned w i t h
the w r i t i n g of the onusvar . The r u l e s are s t a t e d i n the S o c i e t y ' s
pamphlet • ^ j T c ^ T s f H I ^ 1 % f^flJIT ( Juddholekhonatse nove niyom)
p u b l i s h e d i n Poona i n 1 9 3 6 . The most impor tan t m o d i f i c a t i o n s of the
standard r u l e s g i v e n above a re t h e s e :
a. I f the onusvar u s u a l l y w r i t t e n on c e r t a i n words ( t h a t i s , no t
s u f f i x e s or p a r t i c l e s ) i s n o t r e a l i s e d i n modern Marathi s p e e c h ,
i t should not be w r i t t e n , u n l e s s i t i s c o n s i d e r e d important t o
show the etymology of t h e word , or u n l e s s i t i s the o n l y means of
d i s t i n g u i s h i n g i n meaning b e t w e e n p a i r s of w o r d s , as g i v e n above
in 3« i . n o t e a.
b. The onusvar u s u a l l y w r i t t e n on t h e s u f f i x e s ~f a n ( i » a n d on
the p a r t i c l e s g i v e n above i n r u l e i i . c . s h o u l d be o m i t t e d , e . g .
go3T% g^T^fr Wfc^ *TFT OTTCTT mulane m u l a n i i k h a l i i mage a t a
The onusvar i s , however , s t i l l w r i t t e n t o r e p r e s e n t c o l l o q u i a l
forms such as t h o s e g i v e n above i n i i . a . and c .
c . The onusvar u s u a l l y w r i t t e n on t h e word 5 f l« f > n a h i i , s h o u l d
be w r i t t e n only when t h i s v e r b a l form r e f e r s t o the f i r s t p e r s o n ,
s i n g u l a r or p l u r a l , and t h e s e c o n d p e r s o n p l u r a l ; and the onusvar
on the p l u r a l form TTfafcT > n a h i i t , s h o u l d be o m i t t e d .
d. The onusvar w r i t t e n on the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of the wo.rd cfitsfT >
k a h i i , should be o m i t t e d , o^i ^ | .
C H A P T E R 3
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
Consonant c h a r a c t e r s may be combined t o r e p r e s e n t two or more
c o n s o n a n t s which ar e t o be r e a l i s e d w i t h o u t an i n t e r v e n i n g v o w e l .
Charac ter s formed i n t h i s way are c a l l e d ^SJrFTTSf lT ( s o y y u k t a k s o r )
by Marathi grammarians , or ^ t ^ T ' ! ^ (zoa^aksor) i n t h e t e a c h i n g of
w r i t i n g i n s c h o o l s . The c o n s t r u c t i o n and c a l l i g r a p h y of c o n j u n c t
c h a r a c t e r s i s d e s c r i b e d i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n ^ , b u t t h e s t y l e u s e d
i n w r i t i n g Marathi c o r r e s p o n d s , i n t h e c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s , w i t h t h e p
s t y l e of the Bombay c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n the t a b l e s i n t h i s s e c t i o n .
The Marathi c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s ar e d i s c u s s e d i n t h i s c h a p t e r i n t h e
same c l a s s e s a s t h e S a n s k r i t c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s . ^
1 . C o n t e x t s of Conjunct Characters i n Marathi .
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s occur i n Marathi i n t h e s e c o n t e x t s :
i . In Marathi w o r d s , t h a t i s , words not borrowed from S a n s k r i t or
from the modern l a n g u a g e s ; e . g .
djiobbuu ghod.yaT, vhava
i i . In S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , e i t h e r Words use d commonly i n M a r a t h i , or
l e a r n e d words u s e d ©nly i n the l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e ; e . g .
p u s t o k p o t r i i j v o r
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 » l » 3 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 / 3 »
2 . See a b o v e , C h . 2 . i - i i i .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 1 1 9
i i i . In loanwords from o t h e r l a n g u a g e s ; e . g .
s-fejen 2. R e a l i s a t i o n of Conjunct C h a r a c t e r s i n Marath i .
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s are r e a l i s e d i n r e a d i n g as s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t -
ing of two or more c o n s o n a n t s f o l l o w e d by a v o w e l . When an okar c o n -
junct c h a r a c t e r occurs as the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of a word, i t i s u s u a l l y
r e a l i s e d w i t h an o - g l i d e , as i n " ^ T T T , p h e k t ' , $| | ^sj / a s t r ' . 1
The r e a l i s a t i o n i n modern Marathi of okar c h a r a c t e r s w i t h z e r o -
vowel in c e r t a i n p o s i t i o n s i n words g i v e s r i s e t o a problem of s p e l l -
i n g . 2 For i n s t a n c e , when a f o r m a t i v e p a r t i c l e b e g i n n i n g w i t h a c o n -
sonant c h a r a c t e r i s added to a v e r b a l b a s e end ing i n a f i n a l okar
consonant c h a r a c t e r , the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of the base i s u s u a l l y r e a l -
i s ed w i t h z e r o - v o w e l . This r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e c o n s e c u t i v e c h a r a c t e r s
i s s i m i l a r to the r e a l i s a t i o n of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r . S i m i l a r p r o b -
lems a r i s e in o ther c o n t e x t s , where an okar consonant c h a r a c t e r i s
r e a l i s e d w i t h zero -vowe l b e f o r e a f o l l o w i n g consonant c h a r a c t e r , and
in compound words i n which t h e f i r s t p a r t ends i n an ©kar consonant
c h a r a c t e r , and the s e c o n d p a r t b e g i n s w i t h a consonant c h a r a c t e r .
Examples of such words are g i v e n b e l o w w i t h each c l a s s of c o n j u n c t
c h a r a c t e r s .
3. C l a s s e s of Conjunct C h a r a c t e r s i n Marath i .
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s of a l l t h e c l a s s e s g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t
s e c t i o n ^ occur in Marath i , but i n some of the c l a s s e s on ly a few of
the c h a r a c t e r s occur . Those which a r e u s e d i n w r i t i n g Marathi are
1. This g l i d e i s not r e p r e s e n t e d i n t r a n s c r i b i n g words t o which t h i s r u l e a p p l i e s .
2. See Ch.2,1. n o t e s a. and b . 3. See S a n s k r i t , Ch.3,3-
120 MARATHI S E C T I O N
1. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , Conjunct C h a r a c t e r s , C las s 1. 2 . See b e l o w , C l a s s 3* i i i . a * 3 . Verbal forms . U. Compound word.
shown, hy examples g i v e n i n each c l a s s , which i n c l u d e some S a n s k r i t
loanwords f r e q u e n t l y u s e d i n Marathi . More r a r e l y u s e d l o a n w o r d s ,
which may occur i n l i t e r a r y Marath i , a re i n c l u d e d among t h e examples
g i v e n w i t h each c l a s s i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
C las s 1. Two s i m i l a r c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d .
The s e r i e s of c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s o c c u r r i n g i n S a n s k r i t i s
g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n 1 . Most of the consonant c h a r a c t e r s of
the Marathi s y l l a b a r y o c c u r i n t h i s c l a s s . The c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t i n g
- r r o i s w r i t t e n , t h e s u p e r s c r i b e d s t r o k e r e p r e s e n t i n g r
p r e c e d i n g a n o t h er c o n s o n a n t 2 .
A c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t i n g an a s p i r a t e d consonant i s n o t u s u a l l y
w r i t t e n as the f i r s t p a r t of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r i n t h i s c l a s s ; but
i n Marathi w r i t i n g t h e c h a r a c t e r s <o o( , khkho and ^ , t n t n s a r e
sometimes u s e d . The c o m b i n a t i o n s -nno and -mmo are r e p r e s e n t e d
i n some words by w r i t i n g t h e onusvar over the c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d i n g "Cf
or . e . g .
^WfcT or f-CTff TRcT or ^
semmoti b u t gemmot s o n n i d h i b u t ©nn
The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e Marathi words i n which c o n -
s e c u t i v e consonant c h a r a c t e r s , the f i r s t b e i n g ©kar, are r e a l i s e d i n
ord inary s p e e c h i n the same way as c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s :
^F^TT ^T^Pf fo^T %Sc^T STTTT S f T W f t anna an^-ne-^ k i l l a b o l - l a ^ cjsgga a g ' g a d i i ^
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 12
c5Fv - k t o - t k o - g d o - d g © - g d h © - d g h ©
FT - t p o - p t o - a b a - b d © - b j©
i i . Most of the c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n under i i . a . i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n
occur i n l i t e r a r y Marath i , r e p r e s e n t i n g homorganic n a s a l c o n s o n -
a n t s ; but the method of r e p r e s e n t i n g t h e s e consonant s by w r i t i n g 3
the onusvar on the p r e c e d i n g c h a r a c t e r i s more o f t e n Used.
The word ^^T^cf, d e h a n t , ' d e a t h ' , a l e a r n e d S a n s k r i t loanword ,
i s w r i t t e n w i t h the c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r , which d i s t i n g u i s h e s i t
from the word w i t h a Marathi suffix,^"^TRT, d e h a t , ' i n the b o d y ' .
Among the c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n under i i . b .
only JJJ" , jno , and , - tn© o c c u r i n Marathi . |T i s not
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 3 1 . 2 . See S a n s k r i t ,Ch. 3 , 3 . Ci . 2 . The numbers i . - i v . correspond w i t h t h e arrangement of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s in the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n . 3- See a b o v e , C h . 2 , 3 . i . ©nusvar.
Reading e x a m p l e s 1 .
i f f ^ 1 f%FR T ^ f r ^nnujor "TTTT 3?3TFT T|T 5 ^
S J ^ v T ^XXM 3 S f ft£ f l f f ^ T o ^ T W W t | ^ T
Class 2 . Two v s r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d .
The f u l l s e r i e s of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s c l a s s which occur
in Sanskr i t i s g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n 2 . The c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s
c l a s s which occur i n Marath i , m o s t l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , are g i v e n
below. Some of the examples g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n may occur
as loanwords in Marathi l i t e r a r y t e x t s ,
i .
122 MARATHI S E C T I O N
1. Verbal f orms . 2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s , s e e p . 1 3 1 . 3 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 3 . i .
c a l l i g r a p h i c a l l y a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r , and i t i s o f t e n i n c l u d e d
i n the vornomala . Words b e g i n n i n g w i t h jjj are u s u a l l y p l a c e d
l a s t i n Marathi d i c t i o n a r i e s .
i i i . These c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r i n S a n s k r i t l oanwords :
* F T ^ V -kmo -gne -ghno -tmo -dma -pno
i v . Only two c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s group occur i n Marath i , i n S a n s k r i t
l o a n w o r d s : ^* , -nmo and 5 ^ , -nmo .
The examples g i v e n below i l l u s t r a t e words i n which c o n s e c u t i v e
consonant c h a r a c t e r s , t h e f i r s t b e i n g okar , are r e a l i s e d i n o r d i n a r y
speech in the same way as c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s :
J o k t i J o k - t i i 1 gupt k a p - t o 1 / obd u b ' d a r o
Reading examples^
Class 3« C h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d w i t h o n t o s t h c h a r a c t e r s .
i . Characters j o i n e d w i t h f o l l o w i n g TJf .
The s e r i e s of c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s c l a s s i s g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t
s e c t i o n ^ . A l l the c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s of the Marathi s y l l a b a r y , e x -
c e p t ^* , no and ^ , no , occur i n t h i s c l a s s , though some occur
on ly i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s . Many of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s occur i n Marathi
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 123
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 3 1 . 2. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s 3 . i i .
as a r e s u l t of c e r t a i n grammatica l p r o c e s s e s . E n g l i s h loanwords are
sometimes w r i t t e n w i t h c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d w i t h XJ[ , t o r e p r e s e n t the
vowel sound in words such as olfoT) , 'Dank' and cpipT 'camp' .
Reading e x a m p l e s 1
YTSFZT ^ZTT^T ^ f t s ^ R i # m i
tfts^TFf- 6TVZTT-cr tuijTc^T T ^ Z T TJ^f ^ c r M I
^ T T o Z j T H o Z T T ^ T P T S T q " ^ * f ^ * T
ii. Characters j o i n e d w i t h f o l l o w i n g of .
Only a few of the c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s in t h i s s e r i e s , g i v e n in p
the Sanskr i t s e c t i o n , occur in M a r a t h i , most of which occur in l o a n -
words. The c h a r a c t e r s which o c c ur i n Marathi words , and in some l o a n -
words in common u s e , are i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e examples g i v e n be low.
Marathi words are w r i t t e n w i t h o " , S a n s k r i t loanwords w i t h .
The r e a l i s a t i o n of a f i n a l okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i n some words
which form compounds w i t h the words qi<fy\ , v a l a , or qT"T , var ,
i l l u s t r a t e s the r e a l i s a t i o n o f c o n s e c u t i v e consonant c h a r a c t e r s ,
when the f i r s t i s okar , in t h e same way a s c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s .
For example:
pokvann cjak'vala dhvoni budh'var
2
1 2 4 MARATHI SECTION
Reading e x a m p l e s 1
^ f ^ c T v 3qTf t ^ T T c ^ T r*q~r r ^RcT:
i i i . Charac ters j o i n e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g or w i t h f o l l o w i n g ""Jf
a. p r e c e d i n g a n o t h e r c h a r a c t e r .
The c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s s e r i e s are g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n
These c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s ar e formed "by p l a c i n g t h e s t r o k e c a l l e d
\'T7T , reph , above t h e c h a r a c t e r b e f o r e which 1[ i s t o be r e a l i s e d
as t h e f i r s t of two or more c o n s e c u t i v e c o n s o n a n t s . The p l a c e of t h i s
s t r o k e on t h e v a r i o u s c h a r a c t e r s , whether ©kar or w i t h vowel s i g n s ,
i s g i v e n i n the n o t e s on c a l l i g r a p h y i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n . These
c h a r a c t e r s occur i n Marathi words , i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , and i n loan-
words from o t h e r l a n g u a g e s . Charac ter s are not u s u a l l y doubled when
w r i t t e n w i t h reph i n Marathi words , though i n the w r i t i n g of S a n s k r i t
d o u b l i n g may somet imes o c c u r . The c h a r a c t e r s which occur i n Marathi
are i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e r e a d i n g examples g i v e n b e l o w .
The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e the r e a l i s a t i o n of , w i t h
z e r o - v o w e l , f o l l o w e d by a n o t h e r consonant c h a r a c t e r , s i m i l a r t o the
r e a l i s a t i o n of reph w r i t t e n above a consonan t c h a r a c t e r :
k o r t a k o r - t a ^ orpon^ sor'pen^ tark p a r ' k a r
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 3 1 . 2 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 . 3 . , C l a s s 3 « i i i . a . 3 . Verbal form.
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 125
^-^T^rf- -34MI$) ^Tf-^F^T-acary-' acarya-* 4 a c a r i i ^ acarya-^"
Reading examples 7
cpfe Wr *$Jji &F$t* c#rJ -mi
srsftc-r orSc r rf <sp?w v $ mffidb £rfr t p ? rih" ^
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 3 . i i i . a . 2 . S a n s k r i t ' h r e s v e ' . 3 . Sanskr i t loanword. U. ' c r u d e f o r m ' . 5 . ' s p i r i t u a l p r e c e p t o r ' . 6. 'Brahman c o o k ' . 7 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 3 ' 1 .
A s p e c i a l form of reph i s w r i t t e n t o r e p r e s e n t p r e c e d i n g
<qf or i n Marathi words . T h i s form of reph i s sometimes w r i t t e n
wi th -T in S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , "but i t i s n o t u s u a l t o w r i t e t h i s
form in a S a n s k r i t text"'". The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e reph
w r i t t e n in t h i s form w i t h ]T :
torha korhacja g i r h a i i k rhosv^
The w r i t i n g of reph i n t h i s form w i t h i s u s u a l l y r e s t r i c t e d t o
Marathi words i n which the c o m b i n a t i o n of ^ and a r i s e s from
grammatical p r o c e s s e s . Other words a r e u s u a l l y w r i t t e n w i t h t h e
s u p e r s c r i b e d reph. e . g .
suury^ suurya-^" d u s ' r a d u s ' r y a - ^
The word sSTT^ 1 1 > when changed t o t h e ' crude f o r m ' , b e f o r e adding
s u f f i x e s or p a r t i c l e s , i s d i s t i n g u i s h e d from the 'crude form' of the
word vSTp TTlt by t h i s d i f f e r e n c e i n t h e w r i t i n g of r e p h :
126 MARATHI S E C T I O N
b . f o l l o w i n g a n o t h e r c h a r a c t e r .
The f u l l s e r i e s of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s i s g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t
s e c t i o n 1 . Only a few of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s occur i n M a r a t h i , m o s t l y i n
S a n s k r i t loanwords and some E n g l i s h loanwords . For t h e s i m p l i f i c a t i o n
of p r i n t i n g , new forms such as vr* > bhr© and ^ , Jra are some-
t i m e s u s e d . The r e a d i n g examples g i v e n below i l l u s t r a t e the c h a r a c t -
e r s of t h i s group which occur i n Marath i .
Reading e x a m p l e s 2
5R*r . Sb"*T ^ r ^ T 3TTO^ ^ T ^ T f ^ T
i v . Charac ters w i t h p r e c e d i n g or w i t h f o l l o w i n g • a » p r e c e d i n g a n o t h e r c h a r a c t e r .
The c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s group which occur i n S a n s k r i t are g i v e n
i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n ^ . The c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r r i n g i n Marathi are
i l l u s t r a t e d by the words g i v e n as r e a d i n g examples b e l o w ,
b . f o l l o w i n g a n o t h e r c h a r a c t e r .
The c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s group u s e d i n S a n s k r i t a r e g i v e n i n t h e
S a n s k r i t sect ion**. The r e a d i n g examples g i v e n be low i l l u s t r a t e the
c h a r a c t e r s which o c c ur i n Marathi .
The f o l l o w i n g words i l l u s t r a t e c o n s e c u t i v e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t - .
e r s , the f i r s t b e i n g a k a r , r e a l i s e d i n the same way as c o n j u n c t
c h a r a c t e r s : " W c ^ f % T c * T ul ' -J i i i b o l - t o 5 g h a l - n e 5 b a s - l a 5 g h e t - l a 5
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 3 . i i i . b . 2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s , s e e p . 1 3 1 . 3 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 3 . i v . a . i b i d . , i v . b . 5 . Verbal forms .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 1 2 7
Reading e x a m p l e s x
mmc TOT ohlc£l ^ " c ^ f c^Tofr c § W
Class U. v a r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g or f o l l o w i n g uusm
i . v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d w i t h , or ^ j " .
a. , "8 or p r e c e d i n g a v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r .
The f u l l s e r i e s of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r r i n g i n S a n s k r i t i s
given i n . t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n 2 . Those whicn occur in Marathi are
i l l u s t r a t e d in the examples g i v e n b e l o w . Most of t h e c h a r a c t e r s occur
in Sanskr i t loanwords , and t h e c h a r a c t e r "^"l o c c u r s i n E n g l i s h l o a n -
words.
The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e Marathi words i n which c o n s e c -
u t i v e consonant c h a r a c t e r s , the f i r s t b e i n g o k a r , are r e a l i s e d i n the
same way as conjunct c h a r a c t e r s :
c h a r a c t e r s .
o y s ' p o y s
Reading examples
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 3 2 . 2 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s 4 . i . a . 3 . Verbal form. i+. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 3 2 .
1 2 8 M A R A T H I S E C T I O N
b . or ^ f o l l o w i n g a v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r .
The s e r i e s of c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s group which occur i n S a n s k r i t
are g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n 1 . Only a few of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s
occur i n Marath i , m o s t l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s . These are i l l u s t r a t e d
in the r e a d i n g examples g i v e n "below. The c h a r a c t e r jJjT , k s o , i s
no t c a l l i g r a p h i c a l l y a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r , and i s o f t e n i n c l u d e d i n
the vor i jomala 2 . Words b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h i s c h a r a c t e r are u s u a l l y p l a c e d
in Marathi d i c t i o n a r i e s a f t e r words b e g i n n i n g w i t h ^ . •5
Reading examples oTr^Tc^ -q%^T § c £ § T <ft8pT tfftij c F T T < 3 f c F S T r a r $ t
the c h a r a c t e r s i s u s e d i n M a r a t h i , i n the word §1 brahman^ .
The c h a r a c t e r s "C " , -nho , , -nh© and * ^ j j T , -mh© , occur
i n Marathi^.
Reading e x a m p l e s 0 .
i i . p r e c e d i n g or f o l l o w i n g ©nunasik ( ' n a s a l ' ) c h a r a c t e r s ,
a. p r e c e d i n g an ©nunasik c h a r a c t e r .
These c h a r a c t e r s ar e g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n ^ - . Only one of
b . |£ f o l l o w i n g an ©nunasik c h a r a c t e r .
ofiTr-f-af- s = ^ T o f r *^TcTHT f ^ = f
1. See S a n s k r i t , Ch. 3 , 3 - C l a s s i+. i . b . 2. Compare n o t e on the c h a r a c t e r 5"" i n C l a s s 2 . i i . b . above . 3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s , s e e p .132 , U. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s U . i i . a , 5. i b i d . b . 6. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s , s e e p .132 .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS i2<
1. Marath i Vachanmala , B k . k , p .15, b y V a s a n t Ramchandra N e r u r k a r , p u b . Keshav B h i k a j i D h a v a l e , G i r g a u m , Bombay.
Marathi p r o s e p a s s a g e 1
Vf§& TT%cf. TTTcnTT, <3^ q ^ = R T , f c ? ^ T ^ ^ f t ^Tft ^ f ? T ^ 5 R
-q-|^n-^f " q s ^ , ^ ^ o;tft S i f t q T f ^ K ^H^T iRcSf flcITcT.
gpf STfTFft JlfittS f cT^HT^ T T ^ R . W ^ T 3ff
i%cR'0ff ^TlffrT, 3TJ"R " bff ^ o ^ i - c ^ l i %o£f ^ r q •fofcerT ^ ^ i ^ q i t&zft
* r f | $ « n % . g y f s i f ? ^ ^ w i t q i ^ T ^ O s r r l . q T STITT^
^ q = n ^ r o f -spfrjcft ftr^T^fRT^ri^ ^ r ^ f t c ^ f e ^ r *rtff
^ R M x I T ^ t ^ T v 3 T r f ^ t - ^ f q - j f a - 7 ^ 1 % ^ 7 S F f ^ T f ^
tfte "g^i ^^mcft ^TI«J^I^IK^I ^rr.^uiji^^ ^ c T T w s q M^os sfr
MARATHI S E C T I O N
T r a n s c r i p t i o n o f Reading Examples
Chapter 2 .
l . i .
jog chot
modot dhemok
khe-t ' p o t phej; 'ken
no
pod noth
khor^ dheg
bogh kon.
peked^ khecjek
gho^ok tsoo^han.
t s o Is
mon <t©ph
dhe
th©g bh©t
kh©t l^sokh
b h e j e n zekhem
dhsm'k©"!; t s e m ' k e t
gsd^'b©^ "tjsts'k©^
th©k©t pe-^set
men/ g©"|; d©ts 'k©t
pod, zer^
{hensk z s p s t
th©b'k©t k e t s ' k e f
dhsm zh©t
ph©b©t zhegec"_
khen/ke-|; zhot *k©n
l . i i . v©
k©r dh©r
b©d©l t©l©ph
l©v'k©r p s l ' t o n .
j s l k©l
v©r l © t h
v©n bh©r
dh©r©rl
dhekol c©l©n v©r©v
joy dor
go v e t •t^serot
t h o r l o v
t e n e y n o z s r
v©y t s o r
ghsr o l
l . i i i . s o r hos
phonos Jehor
h e r ' k o t henve^
kor 'met k e t s ' r e t
b e s ? 9 t
p e r ' k e r •(; 9 r , P n 9 l poked"/vet t s o r ' h o t
p e s e r b e s e v
y o ; k h e s
J e p e t h s e r e k
hot v e /
sod^ek dejok
her J*er
chel. pe^es
2 . i .
h e y ' g e y ser've - "; J"et'po"(; ser'seko"); m e s o n / v e t semez'te i^s
vecon g e r e z
l e d h z e r
kenev m e z e l
l e y t s e v
r e y e t v e z e n
d h e n ' g e r k e r e m ' t o t s
k e r * v e t
sen^ r e s
semoy h e z e r
/ok Jebe
herein l e h e r
Jev t e h e
s e r e s s e h e z
phes s e h e
k e l e / p h e s e l
s er 'pon . m e s ' l e t
phel, khe], s e r e ^ zevel , t s e j / v o T ; b e T / k e t m e z ' z e v e ^
he^ed ve^ei ; d/ieve^ kel/meT_et z e v e l / s e r
a a n 9<l nun s e i i aper^
e y t menu eyvez
a t h i iq . z e i i ud^et
i i d uus neuu eyrer;
uuth
i t e r s e ^ e i i
ek eyk eyn e v t us el. d^ekh ojhor evsedh
ocjh ev"|; e y j rn. u t e r ukhe^ ol_ekh
2 . i i . kha h i i t o ne pey dhuu c h i b h i i ga ghe thuu ho
t h i i k ruuc|h j h i i l t e l mevz dos drcjh b e y l h i t duudh kay hoy nav j e v k e v i khecjuu Jev behu neye b e r i i cjoTa p e y sa krpa d h o b i i J i j u c h a t i i b h i i t i guru t s e v d a b a i i bhauu r s i s u i i eke y e i i r t u eyke o T i i
TRANSCRIPTION 13
maydan rumal "[he v l In jevuun kavtuk nokar becjuuk gariiud. ka"|;hor j i i v a n zamiin deim^ patois laa"haii t a r a z m i 1 Bui"|;ii vagayre -^savpajii p a h i j e mara-|;b.ii "J; ilcaxi-uL b a y r a g i i b h i k a r i i i t a r ek a y k i l a u t a r u u f h g h e i i n aii dhuuun
p. 106. k h i d / k i i kor'cja diis'ra kap'c^e ik'cje t e k ' c j i i k u n / b i i ^ s a v k ' / i i koy'ta guc]/ghe a v ' g h a p a r ' d h i i ev'cjha b a t ' m i i tar 'buuz k e r ' s u n i i p h a v z ' d a r .fik'vari ub 'dar m i k ' t a t s khabar'dar phasav'rjuuk h a t ' u s'na soqav'nuuk l a h a n ' p a n a
kal_at ka^- to pas'ra pasar-tat s a r ' k u u n s a r a k - t i i l ghasar ghas 'ruun g h a s ' r i i l ghasar~.fi i l a^h'Tuun a"|;hav-t i i l bighad^ bigh'cjuun b i g h a d ^ l e l a ad /kha^a t ad/kha^-tat
Chapter 3»
Class 1.
phikka akkal s a k k h i i cjagga k a t ^ s a g a c c i i i c c h a l a j j a ha"j;tii l a " t t n 9 c i t t n i l khacj^a J"a:nr|av p a t t a u t t h a n r a d d i i biiddhi ann chappann lappha d^habbuu h i y y a k i r r h a l l i i savva i / / h i s s a
Class 2 .
yukt i camatkar sadgui | upodghat mugdh sa^kon. utpann Jabd gupt s a t p h a l samapt udbhav -udbodhak phakt lagn atma padma r a t n jnan janm varjmay
Class vaky r a j y gaqya pothya
cjokyala jyane pec[hyatsa udya
dhohyane abhyas karavyas vyakhyan hyala ma^yane Class 3 . i i .
sarjkhya t u j h y a hor|_yas madhye b h y a l a
a v a / y a t m y a t s a
agya p e t y a arjyatse nyahal/ne ramy
r a h a s y raukhy
ghya mo"|;hyane
t y a c y a p y a l a
suury
t i c y a c i t t h y a
naphyatsa kho lya
mamisy nadya
k v a c i t g v a h i i u c c h v as j v a l a v i / v a s s v a t a h i i j v a r svacch svapn dvara s a r a s v a t i i kevha vhava ta t tvaj j ian mahattv anvay s a r v dhvaja vha^ Jvas
Class 3 » i i i -
a. tark imiurkh marg d i i r g h k h u r c i i khurcya arz kor-"; garc[ puurr^ k i i r t i a r t h a t v a r d a l ardha arpar^ uurph barph durbal garbh dharm dharmik dhayry s a r v dar ja n hars nars tarha durlabh kurhac[ p u u r v i i v a r s e s a r v a t ardhya r y a r y a
b. kram kram i r j g r a j i i agraha t r a s c h i d r c i t r prayatn p r i i t i abruu p r a p t namr t i i v r tamra""; Jri imant sahasr tryaipqav samudr
132 MARATHI SECTION
Clas s 3 » i v .
va lgana phalguri s v a l p ko lha k a l h a i i I h o v i i k l a s sle\
Class U.
i . a . a j c a r y pa jc im puskal, us-"; r a s t r J r e s t h r a s t a t a s t v y a v a s t h a s tabdh n i s p h a l krsn. snan s t h i r r a s t y a n e s t r i i s t r y a s p a s t d r s ^ l drs"|;ya s t h i t i a j c a r y s p h u u r t i J a s t r sneha s k u u l s ^ e j a n p o s t
b . v a t s a l p o r i i k s a dur laks t i l k s r ^ k s a t r i y a vansa o k s a b o k s i i suuksm ©ksarajah u t s u k ak'smat
i i . tumhi i amhii kantiane n h a v i i mhatara unha^a c i n h
Marathi Prose P a s s a g e 1
p r a t y e k J o h o r a t s e mahat tv k a h i i ek v i T i s t g o ^ t i i t ahe . a p ' l y a ya mumboii i l a k h y a t az mumboi i , eh'medabad, so lapuur vogoyre Johore v y a -parasa"{;hii p r o s i d d h a h e t . s a t a r a , e h ' m e d ' n o g e r , v i j a p u u r vogoyre Johore e y t i h a s i k drs"|;ya m a h a t t v a c i i a h e t . per]cjher'puur, n a / i k v a -gayre Johore dharmik drs"|;ya Jres^h g e n i l i i z a t a t . pure J o h o r a c i i p r e s i d d h i v i d v a n a n t s e raaher'ghar mhor|Uun v i j e s ahe . karon. ya t h i k a n i i s a r v p r a k a r ' c y a J i k s e n a c y a j i t ' k y a s o y i i a h e t , t i t ' k y a i t e r t h i k a n i i n a h i i t , ani p u u r v i i peJvyancya v e l i i kay kimva h o l l i c y a i r j g r e j i i r a j ' v a ^ i i t kay m a h a r a s t r a t i i l v idvan l o k a n t s e t e ek a v e c f t e s t h a n houun r a h i l e abe . pure Jahar samudrapat i ipasuun 1850 phuu"(; u n t s ahe . ya J a h a r a c i i s thapana don Je v a r s a p u u r v i i J iva j i imaharajan i^s e guru d a d a j i i kor^adev y a n i i k e l i i . maharajantsa vacja ye the h o t a ani ray "gad. g h e i i p a r y a n t t y a n t s e mukhy "[hane puny-asats a s e , maharajancya p a j c a t s a t a r a he Jahar mara^hyancya s a t t e t s e kendr z h a l e . p u q y a n a j i i k s imha-gad. k i l l a , b h a f g h a r y e t h i i l dharan_ va t a l a v ani l a s k a r a t i i l sundar i m a r ' t i i p a h ' n y a s a r ' k h y a a h e t . pur^yat i i l Janivar'vad^yazava^ J r i i J iva j i imaharajan l^se smarak mhanuun t y a n t s a ajvaruud^h bhavy puta^a ubha k e l e l a ahe .
1 . anusvars t o be r e a d w i t h z e r o - r e a l i s a t i o n are not t r a n s c r i b e d i n t h i s p a s s a g e .
GUJARATI S E C T I O N
C H A P T E R 1
ARRANGEMENT OP THE SYLLABARY
The w r i t i n g sys t em of G u j a r a t i ( ? L * Y 3 . l C L l , g u j a r a t i i ) i s "based
on the S a n s k r i t s y s t e m , w i t h some m o d i f i c a t i o n s a s i n the o ther modern
languages of Northern I n d i a which a r e w r i t t e n i n the Devanagari
s c r i p t . The c h a r a c t e r s of t h e G u j a r a t i s c r i p t are arranged i n the same
way as those of the Devanagari s c r i p t , g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t section"1".
understood by a c h i l d ' . Each c h a r a c t e r i s c a l l e d $13. ( a k s a r ) ,
and the s y l l a b i c s e r i e s i s c a l l e d ctl5L^-LLCd.L (vernomala) , ' c h a r a c t e r -
s e r i e s ' . The terms u s e d by G u j a r a t i grammarians to r e f e r t o the
c h a r a c t e r s are s i m i l a r t o t h o s e u s e d i n S a n s k r i t , but as the r e a l i s a -
t i o n of the c h a r a c t e r s i n r e a d i n g G u j a r a t i d i f f e r s somewhat from the
Sanskr i t system i n r e s p e c t of c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h the
vowel o , t h e s e terms are u s e d i n t h i s s e c t i o n i n t h e i r G u j a r a t i form
and t r a n s c r i b e d i n accordance w i t h t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of the c h a r a c t e r s
in G u j a r a t i . The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e t h e d i f f e r e n c e between
the terms used in the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n and the c o r r e s p o n d i n g terms
used i n t h i s s e c t i o n :
The s c r i p t i s r e f e r r e d t o a s ^ I ^ ^ M X ^ I (ba^obodh) , ' t h a t can be
S a n s k r i t ^ T T * T N
fcTTTT:
(akseram) G u j a r a t i ^ i f ^ A ( o k s o r )
( v i r a m o h ) C^.^.LH (v iram)
( o n t o h s t h a ) ^ i M r r l ^ l ( o n t o s t h )
1. See S a n s k r i t , C h . l .
136 G U J A R A T I S E C T I O N
CONSONANTS w i t h 0 .1
Ve lar 2
P a l a t a l 3
R e t r o -f l e x
k D e n t a l
5 L a b i a l
Pl
os
iv
es
Vo
icel
ess
U n a s p i r a t e d ko CO t 9 t o p©
Pl
os
iv
es
Vo
icel
ess
A s p i r a t e kho cho tho t h o ph©
Pl
os
iv
es
Voi
ced U n a s p i r a t e d go q© 1 do b©
Pl
os
iv
es
Voi
ced
A s p i r a t e d gho jho clhe1 dho bh© Pl
os
iv
es
Nasa l fo©)2 (P-9)2 no no m©
Semivowels yo ro l o v©^
F r i c a t i v e s Jo so** s o
A s p i r a t e ho
L a t e r a l I®
VOWELS © a 1 1 u uu e , zJ ©y o , o ©v
MODIFIERS Nasa l - m or A s p i r a t e d
1. - 5. See n o t e s on f o l l o w i n g page .
The t a b l e g i v e n be low shows the arrangement o f the G u j a r a t i
s y l l a b a r y i n roman n o t a t i o n . As t h e s y s t e m of w r i t i n g i s s y l l a b i c ,
and the c h a r a c t e r s i n t h e s y l l a b a r y r e p r e s e n t s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g of
e i t h e r a v o w e l , or a c o n s o n a n t f o l l o w e d by the vowel o , t h e roman
t a b l e s show each c o n s o n a n t w i t h t h i s vowe l . The vowel o , when
r e a l i s e d i n t h i s way w i t h a consonant c h a r a c t e r , i s u s u a l l y r e f e r r e d
t o i n E n g l i s h t e x t s as t h e ' i n h e r e n t v o w e l ' .
ARRANGEMENT OF THE SYLLABARY 137
1 . See Chapter 2 , under 2 . i i . V o w e l S i g n s .
1. The c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t e d by cjo and c|he are r e a l i s e d m e d i a l l y
and f i n a l l y w i t h the f l a p p e d c o n s o n a n t s r and rh i n some words.
2. The c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t e d by no and no occur o n l y i n combinat -
ion w i t h other c o n s o n a n t s , i n S a n s k r i t l oanwords .
3 . The c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t e d by ve i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h l a b i o -
denta l a r t i c u l a t i o n .
h. The c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t e d by s o and s y l l a b i c r occur o n l y i n
Sanskr i t loanwords .
5. The vowels e and e are w r i t t e n i n t h e s c r i p t w i t h t h e same
c h a r a c t e r , or vowel s i g n , u s u a l l y t r a n s c r i b e d as e . The vowels
o and o are a l s o w r i t t e n w i t h t h e same c h a r a c t e r , or vowel s i g n ,
u s u a l l y t r a n s c r i b e d as o .
The s e r i e s of vowels i n c l u d e s ' s h o r t ' i and ' l o n g ' i i , ' s h o r t '
u and ' l o n g ' uu. These p a i r s of v o w e l s occur i n Gujara t i words ,
and the c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g t h e ' s h o r t ' and the ' l o n g ' vowels
are w r i t t e n accord ing t o c e r t a i n r u l e s o f o r t h o g r a p h y 1 . This d i s t i n c t -
ion between the ' s h o r t ' and ' l o n g ' v o w e l s i s p r e s e r v e d i n t n i s work i n
the t r a n s c r i p t i o n of the c h a r a c t e r s , though i n modern G u j a r a t i
speech t h e r e i s o f ten l i t t l e d i f f e r e n c e between t h e p r o n u n c i a t i o n of
words w r i t t e n w i t h the c h a r a c t e r s - r e p r e s e n t i n g t h e ' s h o r t ' or the
' l o n g ' vowe l s .
C H A P T E R 2
CHARACTERS OP THE SYLLABARY
The G u j a r a t i c h a r a c t e r s are a m o d i f i e d form of t h e Devanagar i
c h a r a c t e r s , w i t h some c h a n g e s of l i n e and form which have come about
through an a d a p t a t i o n of t h e s c r i p t f o r c u r s i v e w r i t i n g . The c h a r a c t -
e r s are more rounded t h a n t h o s e of the Devanagari s c r i p t , and do n o t
have a h e a d - s t r o k e . Comparison w i t h the c h a r a c t e r s i n the S a n s k r i t
s e c t i o n w i l l show how t h e G u j a r a t i c h a r a c t e r s are r e l a t e d i n form t o
t h o s e of the Devanagari s c r i p t . The method of w r i t i n g t h e G u j a r a t i
c h a r a c t e r s i s i n g e n e r a l t h e method d e s c r i b e d i n the I n t r o d u c t i o n ,
and r e f e r e n c e s h o u l d be made to the n o t e s on c a l l i g r a p h y g i v e n w i t h
each group of c h a r a c t e r s i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n . S p e c i a l n o t e s are
g i v e n be low on the c a l l i g r a p h y of any c h a r a c t e r s of which the order
of s t r o k e s cannot be e a s i l y deduced from t h e Devanagari c h a r a c t e r s .
The G u j a r a t i c h a r a c t e r s are d e s c r i b e d i n t h i s c h a p t e r under the
same h e a d i n g s a s t h e c h a r a c t e r s i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n : Consonant
C h a r a c t e r s , Vowel C h a r a c t e r s and Vowel S i g n s , and M o d i f i e r s .
1 . Consonant C h a r a c t e r s .
The consonant c h a r a c t e r s are arranged i n t h r e e g r o u p s : ' v o r g i i y '
c h a r a c t e r s , ' o n t o s t h ' c h a r a c t e r s and 'uusm' c h a r a c t e r s 1 . As t h e y are
g i v e n i n t h e s y l l a b a r y , t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s a re r e a l i s e d a s s y l l a b l e s
c o n s i s t i n g of an i n i t i a l c o n s o n a n t , or s e m i - v o w e l , f o l l o w e d by the
vowel a , and t h e y a r e d e s c r i b e d as ^ H B l ^ ( o k a r ) . The r e a l i s a t i o n
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , l . i - i i i .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 139
1 . See S a n s k r i t ,Ch. 2 , 1 . 2 . The v i r a m i s n o t w r i t t e n i n Gujara t i w i th c h a r a c t e r s which are r e a l i s e d i n t h i s way; i t i s w r i t t e n o n l y i n a few S a n s k r i t l oanwords . 3 - See be low ,Ch. 3 , 2 .
U. See be low, 3 . i . b . 5 . See b e l o w , 2 . i i .
of a consonant c h a r a c t e r w i t h o u t t h i s v o w e l , t h a t i s , as the c o n s o n -
ant e lement of the s y l l a b l e o n l y , i s i n d i c a t e d by a d i a g o n a l s t r o k e
w r i t t e n a t the f o o t of the c h a r a c t e r , t h u s ^ , k - , t - , and
so on, as i n S a n s k r i t . Th i s s t r o k e i s c a l l e d (p(j^LH ( v i r a m ) 1 and a
character w r i t t e n w i t h t h i s s t r o k e i s c a l l e d • h a l o n t ' by G u j a r a t i
grammariansj but i n the t e a c h i n g o f w r i t i n g i n s c h o o l s , c h a r a c t e r s
w r i t t e n w i t h t h i s s t r o k e ar e d e s c r i b e d as **JlX^ (khodu, ' l a m e ' ) .
The r e a l i s a t i o n of okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s i n r e a d i n g G u j a r a t i
d i f f e r s somewhat from the r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s i n S a n s k r i t .
The f o l l o w i n g n o t e s may be r e g a r d e d a s g e n e r a l g u i d i n g p r i n c i p l e s t o
which r e f e r e n c e may be made l a t e r when t h e c h a r a c t e r s are d i s c u s s e d
in d e t a i l .
a. A f i n a l okar consonant c h a r a c t e r i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o -
vowel , e x c e pt i n a few S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s . ^
b . A f i n a l ©kar consonant c h a r a c t e r formed by combining two or more
c h a r a c t e r s ^ , 0 r a f i n a l okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d e d by a
c h a r a c t e r w r i t t e n w i t h the o n u s v a r r e p r e s e n t i n g a n a s a l c o n s o n -
ant*4-, i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h an e - g l i d e .
c . A medial okar consonant c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d i n c e r t a i n c o n t e x t s
wi th z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an o - g l i d e , f o r i n s t a n c e , when such a
c h a r a c t er occurs as the s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r of a t h r e e c h a r a c t e r
word, and the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r h a s one of the vowel s i g n s ^ .
d. When an okar consonant c h a r a c t e r i s t h e f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of a
verba l b a s e , i t i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an
Ho GUJARATI S E C T I O N
k o - v o r g
c e - v o r g
•];©'-verg
t e - v e r g
p e - v o r g
H ke khe g 9 ghe - n e 2
H >»> CO che jhe -jie
d 6 vS d t 9 t he ahe -n.o
d H ii H t e the de dhe no
H A (H H po phe be bhe mo
An o l d e r form of Q i s ^ .
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 1 . i . 2 . Charac ter s which do not occur i n i t i a l l y are shown by a hyphen p r e f i x e d to the s y l l a b l e i n the roman t r a n s c r i p t i o n .
e - g l i d e , b e f o r e t b e a d d i t i o n of s u f f i x e s c o n s i s t i n g o f , or b e g i n -
n i n g w i t h , a c o n s o n a nt c h a r a c t e r w i t h one of the vowel s i g n s .
For gu idance i n r e a d i n g , f i n a l okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s -
ed w i t h z e r o - v o w e l are t r a n s c r i b e d w i t h o u t o , and m e d i a l okar c o n -
sonant c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l or w i t h an o - g l i d e are
t r a n s c r i b e d t h u s : k' , t ' , p ' .
i . Charac ters of t h e v o r g i i y group (ct?!^^. ) 1 .
The f i r s t group of consonan t c h a r a c t e r s c o n s i s t s of t w e n t y f i v e
c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g s y l l a b l e s w i t h an i n i t i a l p l o s i v e c o n s o n a n t
f o l l o w e d by t h e vowel a . These c h a r a c t e r s f a l l i n t o f i v e ct^^L
( v e r g ) , or c l a s s e s , a c c o r d i n g t o the f i v e p o s i t i o n s of a r t i c u l a t i o n .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 141
1. See be low, under 2 . i i . 2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . l 6 8 .
The c h a r a c t e r s » § . » 06 a n d 6 a r e w r i t t e n t h u s :
£ <- * 3 $ c * *L
36 D 36 6 c S 6
The okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s a r e r e f e r r e d t o , as f o r i n s t a n c e i n
s p e l l i n g , t h u s : g , >&^L (kekko) , ct » CITHX ( t e t t o ) , and so on 0
The c h a r a c t e r s \$« and do n o t occur i n G u j a r a t i words , hut
they are w r i t t e n , in c o m b i n a t i o n w i t h o t h e r c h a r a c t e r s , i n some
Sanskri t loanwords i n the l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e . The c h a r a c t e r s £ and
& are r e a l i s e d m e d i a l l y and f i n a l l y as re and rhe i n c e r t a i n
words. Examples of t h i s r e a l i s a t i o n a r e g i v e n l a t e r , a f t e r the
vowel s i g n s are d i s c u s s e d . l
Reading e x a m p l e s 2
1 . One c h a r a c t e r words. Pour of t h e v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s occur as
words: - t 9 V <!»
2. Two c h a r a c t e r words , f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
Qrl H 3 L d H H V *M.vS H 6 # d CH^L V6
:*bd Hv5 *4.d d 6 UvS <dd $ d YvS H£l
3 . Three c h a r a c t e r words , f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
<Hfri U6v5 ^vSH Hfcfc H H d $d6 d>LS =>Otd
<HHvS d H f c *<.H6 & H d d d H C H Y d U 6 d
U. Four c h a r a c t e r words , s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h zero-'vowel
or w i t h an e - g l i d e ; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
%VA£l (HdS^t =M.£H$ lySdHd <HAV£ H Y ^ t
i 4 2 GUJARATI S E C T I ON
i i . C h a r a c t e rs of t h e o n t o s t h group ( ^ H r T l ^ ^ i ) 1
There ar e f o u r G u j a r a t i c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s g r o u p , as i n the
same group of S a n s k r i t c h a r a c t e r s .
H a ^ «l ye l e r e ve
When the c h a r a c t e r s M. and ol occur i n i t i a l l y , or m e d i a l l y
r e a l i s e d w i t h a f o l l o w i n g v o w e l , they are r e a l i s e d as c o n s o n a n t s . When
they occur m e d i a l l y , i n p o s i t i o n s i n which ekar consonant c h a r a c t e r s
are r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or f i n a l l y , they are r e a l i s e d as s e m i -2
v o w e l s , forming d i p h t h o n g s w i t h the vowel of the p r e c e d i n g s y l l a b l e . e . g . U V t otH W 4 . ° # t
y e j e n v e n bhey j ev
Reading examples3
1 . None of the o n t e s t h c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r s as a word.
2 . Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
* U M3. H a ° ik W *t «LH
*w. & h w. ^>( r t CLR. ^ a =mm w . y h
3 . Three c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
Vtt?. a b ^ l CNAS <=OHct * R rl^A
a^LQi m f m n a n h ^ h c h ^ l
k. Pour c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l
or w i t h an e - g l i d e ; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
£&ct t &H(H?l UvSctt (dbSSqi c t t r t Y ^ftdA
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , l . i i . 2 . Fur ther examples of the r e a l i s a t -ion of t h e s e two c h a r a c t e r s are g i v e n b e l o w , under 2 . i i .
3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . l 6 8 .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY i 4 :
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 1 . i i i . 2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . l 6 8 . 3 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 1 . i i i . V e d i c c h a r a c t e r .
i i i . Characters of the uusm group ( (3l"t»H. ) X
These c h a r a c t e r s a s g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n are w r i t t e n
in the Hindi s t y l e . The G u j a r a t i c h a r a c t e r s a r e :
U H <* J"o s o s o ha
The c h a r a c t e r X o c c u r s o n l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , and when
w r i t t e n in words i n common u s e i n G u j a r a t i , i t i s o f t e n r e a l i s e d as
Jo except i n formal r e a d i n g . 2
Reading examples . 1 . None of the c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s group o c c u r s as a word.
2 . Two c h a r a c t e r words; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
* U *16 m. &L H*l ^ <SH * t d 3 . Three c h a r a c t e r words; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
a uat *iu*i U H H ^ I H U. Pour and f i v e c h a r a c t e r words ; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o -
vowel , second c h a r a c t e r i n f o u r c h a r a c t e r words , t h i r d c h a r a c t e r
in the f i v e c h a r a c t e r word, r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l or w i t h an
o - g l i d e .
3iHY£l U W d . ?&SZ ^ U ^ d c&Sd < £ d W l
The l a s t consonant c h a r a c t e r i n t h e G u j a r a t i s y l l a b a r y i s
, ~T,o » r e a l i s e d as a r e t r o f l e x l a t e r a l consonan t w i t h o . 2
Reading examples .
# t m. m. o w j o H<<t 3H<a HR.<=L I mste
144 G U J A R A T I S E C T I O N
1 . See b e l o w , C h . 3 . C l a s s e s 2 . and U. 2 . For the u s e of vowel c h a r a c t e r s and vowel s i g n s , s e e S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 2 . i . 3 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 2 . i . h. See a b o v e , C h . l . The r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e s e vowel c h a r a c t e r s a s e or e , and as o or o , i s d i s c u s s e d below under i i . Vowel S i g n s .
The two c h a r a c t e r s *Q and , each r e p r e s e n t i n g s y l l a b l e s
c o n s i s t i n g of two c o n s o n a n t s f o l l o w e d by the vowel o , are o f t e n
p l a c e d a t the end of t h e s e r i e s of consonant c h a r a c t e r s i n the vori^o-
m a l a , but t h e y do n o t p r o p e r l y b e l o n g t o the s y l l a b a r y , and t h e y are
d i s c u s s e d l a t e r 1 .
2
2 . Vowel C h a r a c t e r s and Vowel S i g n s ,
i . Vowel C h a r a c t e r s .
The vowel c h a r a c t e r s u s e d i n w r i t i n g G u j a r a t i c o r r e s p o n d w i t h
the vowel c h a r a c t e r s i n S a n s k r i t though the forms d i f f e r . S y l l a b i c
rr , 1 and 11 do n o t occur i n G u j a r a t i ^ . The vowel c h a r a c t e r s are
u s u a l l y p l a c e d f i r s t i n the vornomala .
» > i £ S S i © a i i i u uu
s y l l a b i c r e , oy 0,0** ov
The c h a r a c t e r , s y l l a b i c r , occurs o n l y i n a few S a n s k r i t
l o a n w o r d s , u s e d m a i n l y i n the l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e . The vowel c h a r a c t e r s
are r e f e r r e d t o as o k a r , a k a r , i k a r , u k a r , and so on.
In a l l r e a d i n g examples which f o l l o w , ©kar consonant c h a r a c t e r s
which occur i n words h a v i n g vowel c h a r a c t e r s or vowel s i g n s s h o u l d be
r e a l i s e d a c c o r d i n g t o t h e g e n e r a l r u l e s a l r e a d y g i v e n , u n l e s s s p e c i a l
n o t e s are added.
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 145
Reading e x a m p l e s 1
1. Vowel c h a r a c t e r s o n l y . ^ I t 5 ^
2. Vowel c h a r a c t e r s w i t h okar c h a r a c t e r s .
SlH *>tlU ^ L d ^ 1 ° * 5>tl6
^ 6 H@ <a*T fesP utf fcsftV &$$t i i . Vowel s i g n s .
Vowel s i g n s c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o e a c h vowe l c h a r a c t e r , e x c e p t 3>-C ,
are added to the okar form of t h e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s to r e p r e s e n t
s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g of an i n i t i a l c o n s o n a n t f o l l o w e d by one of the
vowels a to ev . The vowel s i g n s a r e g i v e n here added t o t h e
character .
si & £1- f ^ 4 ^ ^ & ka k i k i i ku kuu k r k e , k e key k o , k o kov
The order of s t r o k e s i n w r i t i n g c h a r a c t e r s w i t h vowel s i g n s i s
i n general the same as t h a t d e s c r i b e d i n t h e n o t e s on c a l l i g r a p h y i n
the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n . Some of t h e c h a r a c t e r s are m o d i f i e d i n form
when c e r t a i n of the vowel s i g n s a r e a d d e d .
a. The u p r i g h t s t r o k e of a c h a r a c t e r i s w r i t t e n w i t h o u t rounding the
f o o t when the vowel s i g n s f o r u or uu are added:
gu guu pu puu s u suu
b . S p e c i a l forms:
•KI fir « •<!, ^ ^ $ 3 $ ja j i j i i ju juu nu r u ruu dr J*r hr
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s , s e e p . 1 6 8 , 2 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 2 . i i .
146 GUJARATI S E C T I O N
1 , h r o s v , ' s h o r t ' ; d i i r g h , ' l o n g ' . 2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . l 6 8 .
In the t e a c h i n g of w r i t i n g i n s c h o o l s , and i n s p e l l i n g , t h e u p -
r i g h t s t r o k e of a c h a r a c t e r , and of the vowel s i g n s c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o
the c h a r a c t e r s *D\X ,^\X and are r e f e r r e d t o as £ L H l ( k a n o ) , and
the d i a g o n a l s u p e r s c r i b e d s t r o k e s i n t h e vowel c h a r a c t e r s and s i g n s ,
as i n 5^ , , d n d s y t l > a r e r e f e r r e d t o as HL^LL ( m a t r a ) . The
vowel s i g n s f o r ^ and $ are c a l l e d §.^ct ^ ( h r o s v i ) and
^1^1 $ ( d i i r g h i i ) , and t h e vowel s i g n s f o r and (3^ are c a l l e d
^ ^ • 0 ^ ^ ( h r o s v u) and ( d i i r g h u u ) 1 . C h a r a c t e r s h a v i n g vowel
s i g n s are d e s c r i b e d as ' a k a r ' , ' u k a r ' , ' e k a r ' and s o on.
Reading e x a m p l e s 2
1 . One c h a r a c t e r w o r d s .
2 . Words of two or more c h a r a c t e r s .
£ i 6 $ i y £L& a i ^ * ( t a f &$> fed °o iH
a i d d f e Mk Ufcft (§L(Hl S ^ l
^IMX *bfo *b<i ^ £ l A oiteT e f l A
<3t(L %«iX <tute ^Udl ^ ^ a l §HL O X
PL^L&L S v i ^ d S p l R l d l A u C l ^ . l A L H l C L ( H l ^ d t A
R e a l i s a t i o n o f t h e v o w e l s and •
These vowel c h a r a c t e r s , and the c o r r e s p o n d i n g vowe l s i g n s , each
r e p r e s e n t two v o w e l s o f d i f f e r e n t q u a l i t y . The vowel c h a r a c t e r
and the c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n are r e a l i s e d i n t h e m a j o r i t y of words a s
e , but i n some words a s e ; the vowel c h a r a c t e r and the c o r r e s -
ponding s i g n are r e a l i s e d i n the m a j o r i t y of words as o , b u t i n
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 147
some words as o . The r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s as e and o
i s d e s c r i b e d by Gujara t i grammarians a s Ceejrt ( v i v r t , ' o p e n ' ) . Some
p a i r s of words, w r i t t e n i n the same way , are d i s t i n g u i s h e d i n meaning
only by the r e a l i s a t i o n of the vowe l «yX a s 0 or as o . Some words
in f requent use i n which t h e s e v o w e l s are r e a l i s e d as ' open ' vowe l s
are g i v e n be low; a f u l l e r l i s t of s u c h words i s g i v e n i n the G u j a r a t i 1 2 d i c t i o n a r y ' Narmakosh' , and i n t h e d i c t i o n a r y ' J o d n i k o s h ' words i n
which the 'open' vowe l s occur a re s p e c i a l l y n o t e d .
Words in which , or t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n , i s r e a l i s e d as e :
^ L H ^ 6 1 s \ - *£s ~h?> ISH "Ml i & &LC£L £>-t
^ ?IH \%i u \ v 3 ^ ^ u -
^ ^ 6 - " l 6 S < ^ U - <^-t o & * t ^ H t t ^ \ &
§ t - £U>1 <£i\ ^MlSL d^C-lL *&c±t Words i n which tyX. > o r the c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n , i s r e a l i s e d as o :
*%>Ut *HXV16 =*tXy>H ^iu^- SlMfct Anc-tl £lual al6 SL L sia iX slCa X >tvi
ril €lvs- ileo *4l(± ^X i- -tXs^ -iX^X H I H U&ytl Ml^ t l 6 H i MXdluti HU&U ' l MX^
£l§. d ^ U sils Cl Ci 4-When c h a r a c t e r s w i t h t h e s e v o w e l s a r e w r i t t e n w i t h t h e mark of
n a s a l i s a t i o n known as the a n u s v a r ^ , t h e y ar e r e a l i s e d as ' open ' v o w e l s .
1 . n4sl$.l , narmako;, pub. 1 8 7 3 . 2 . W U r C l *&vS»$tUstfU sartha g u j o r a t i i jodjanii k o / , p u b . l 9 U 9 . The ' o p e n ' r e a l i s a t i o n of these vowel c h a r a c t e r s and s i g n s i s i n d i c a t e d i n t h i s d i c t i o n a r y by i n v e r t i n g the matra. 3 . The words w r i t t e n w i t h a hyphen are verbal b a s e s . L. In t h i s and l a t e r words i n which t h e r e are two okar c h a r a c t e r s , i t i s the f i r s t w h i c h i s r e a l i s e d w i t h o .
5. S i m i l a r l y a l l words i n which t h e f i r s t s y l l a b l e i s a£l , ' f o u r ' . 6. S i m i l a r l y o ther words i n which t h e f i r s t s y l l a b l e i s "Hist- > ' l e s s a
q u a r t e r ' . 7 . See b e l o w , under 3 . M o d i f i e r s , i . onusvar .
148 GUJARATI SECTION
Some words which are d i s t i n g u i s h e d i n meaning o n l y by t h e r e a l i s
of as 0 or as 0 :
go\, 1 round' g o l , ' t r e a c l e '
khol , ' e n q u i r y ' k h o l , ' o i l - c a k e '
copop i i , ' smeared' c o p o r i i , 'book'
kon,, ' a n g l e ' kon^, 'who'
c o l l i , ' b o d i c e ' c o l i i , (name of a v e g e t a b l e )
s o l , ' s i x t e e n ' s o l , ' w e a l ' , ' s t r i p e '
R e a l i s a t i o n of okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s i n words w i t h vowel
c h a r a c t e r s and s i g n s i n c e r t a i n p o s i t i o n s ,
a. When a m e d i a l okar consonant c h a r a c t e r , i n a t h r e e c h a r a c t e r
word, i s f o l l o w e d by a f i n a l c h a r a c t e r w i t h a vowel s i g n , i t i s
u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an o - g l i d e , and t h e
s e m i - v o w e l s r e p r e s e n t e d by and form d i p h t h o n g s w i t h the
vowel of the p r e c e d i n g s y l l a b l e , as i n
^ d < a i v&<+CL H ^ i i l £>c& e ^ ' l o c o r ' b i i men/ko phay'do chev'"(;e
The r e a l i s a t i o n o f m e d i a l okar c h a r a c t e r s i n words of more than
t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s v a r i e s a c c o r d i n g t o the p o s i t i o n i n each word
of the c h a r a c t e r s w i t h vowel s i g n s . In compound w o r d s , t h e
r e a l i s a t i o n depends upon the form of the words j o i n e d i n the
compound. The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e the r e a l i s a t i o n of
okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s i n such words .
Second c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an o - g l i d e :
$lct&<l "&daiS ^ 6 H L - t Yl-LctR,
J e t ' k o r i i k e f l a k nuk' san j a n ' v o r
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 14
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 6 8 .
Other c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an o - g l i d e :
dL"t6rCl<d 6U6<dl£9 UM-MPCl dukan'dar tabod^'tob kopa-);'ba j i i p a r ' v a n ' g i i
b . When a s u f f i x b e g i n n i n g w i t h a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i s added to a
noun or pronoun, or t o a v e r b a l b a s e , ending i n an okar consonant
c h a r a c t e r , t h i s f i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or
with an o - g l i d e , as i n t h e s e e x a m p l e s :
HtR-Cl d^A £^dX " i i a d i <au>ul gam-no tom-ne k o r - t o b o l - v a l a g - J e
When such s u f f i x e s are added t o v e r b a l b a s e s of t h r e e or more
c h a r a c t e r s , of which t h e f i n a l and p r e - f i n a l consonant c h a r a c t e r s
are okar , the r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e p r e - f i n a l c h a r a c t e r v a r i e s i n
the way i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e f o l l o w i n g e x a m p l e s : ^ & H Y U H Y d t U H V l d d l somoj s e m ' j i i s o m o j - v a s o m ' j a v - v a
therok t h o r ' k e t h o r o k - t o t h o r ' k a v - v o
Reading examples"1"
1 . okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d a s i n n o t e a.
£ l S 5 l *HH $ l <d6€l d 6 U l H l n ^ t l
HlU<tfl Y H j d UlHfc^ 6l6*ll<<± ^Y^lc t l S U ^ d ^ l A
2 . okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d a s i n n o t e b .
d d * &d*=Cl U 6 6 U S 6 d l
HUCIA HU^CI HiaeCl Hl&a<=&
150 GUJARATI S E C T I O N
R e a l i s a t i o n of m e d i a l and f i n a l ^ and £
The c h a r a c t e r \$ i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d m e d i a l l y or f i n a l l y as a
f l a p p e d c o n s o n a n t , p o 1 , e x c e p t when p r e c e d e d by a c h a r a c t e r w r i t t e n p
w i t h the onusvar . In some w o r d s , however , i t i s a lways r e a l i s e d a s
a s t o p , q© . The c h a r a c t e r i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d as a s t o p , c|h© ,
and sometimes as a f l a p p e d c o n s o n a n t . In some words the r e a l i s a t i o n
as a s t o p i s c o n s t a n t . The f o l l o w i n g examples are some of t h e words i n
f r e q u e n t use i n which £ and d are always r e a l i s e d as s t o p s ^ : .
5 d i 3 l Si- £ u H i i l n t s t m £ l rCU ^ 5 - & u s e u . V * t l =HL<SL *Hl4l<*t £ 1 6 - £ 1 6 & L & <*$L *=tL6-These c h a r a c t e r s are a lways r e a l i s e d as s t o p s a f t e r n a s a l i s a t i o n .
In the f o l l o w i n g p a i r s of words t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of vS as c|© or
as r© i s n e c e s s a r y f o r d i s t i n c t i o n of meaning:
p a d j D , 'male b u f f a l o ' p a r o , ' n e i g h b o u r h o o d '
Y b j jad/u^4", ' t h i c k ' j a r u ^ , ' jaw'
CUSL v o d j D , ' c a n c e l l e d ' vo^o , ' e l d e r l y '
Orthography of t h e ' s h o r t ' and ' l o n g ' v o w e l s .
The f o l l o w i n g g e n e r a l r u l e s are u s u a l l y a p p l i e d i n w r i t i n g t h e
vowel c h a r a c t e r s ^ , $ and (3 , (§L > and the c o r r e s p o n d i n g vowel
s i g n s , though p r a c t i c e v a r i e s , and numerous e x c e p t i o n s o c c u r ,
a. ^ , and the c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n , are u s u a l l y w r i t t e n i n f i n a l
c h a r a c t e r s , or i m m e d i a t e l y p r e c e d i n g a f i n a l ©kar consonant
1 . See n o t e i n l . i . a b o v e . 2 . See b e l o w , under 3 « i . ©nusvar. 3 . See Notes on G u j a r a t i Phono logy , T.N.Dave , B u l l e t i n of the Schoo l
of O r i e n t a l S t u d i e s , V o l . V I . p . 6 7 3 f f . h. For the mark of n a s a l i s a t i o n on the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of t h i s word,
s e e b e l o w , under 3 . i . © n u s v a r . 5 . P u l l e r n o t e s on G u j a r a t i o r t h o -graphy are g i v e n i n ' J o d n i k o s h ' , I n t r o d u c t i o n , p . 3 0 f f .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 151
c h a r a c t e r , u n l e s s t h i s i s a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r 1 ; e . g .
l a i i k o r i i p a n i i t n i i k c i i j g e r i i b
ff) , and the c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n , are u s u a l l y w r i t t e n i n a l l
o ther p o s i t i o n s 2 ; e . g .
CrLHd PtatSl &GX*UA ed&U.ui
d i v o s tikhe-J; b i l a d ^ i i h o j i y a r ghod^iyaT,
Some e x c e p t i o n s :
b i i j o h o k i i k o t l i i d h e k i i d h o J i i k h i i n e
h. (§t » and the c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n , are u s u a l l y w r i t t e n i n a
medial p o s i t i o n when i m m e d i a t e l y p r e c e d i n g a f i n a l akar consonant
c h a r a c t e r , u n l e s s t h i s i s a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r ; e . g .
uu^h duudh hhuukh phuul mejuur
(3 » and the c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n , are u s u a l l y w r i t t e n i n o t h e r
p o s i t i o n s , though many words o c c u r in . G u j a r a t i t e x t s w r i t t e n w i t h 2
e i t h e r the ' s h o r t ' or t h e ' l o n g ' vowel ; e . g .
una^o dukan s u t h a r varu a l / s u
Some e x c e p t i o n s : ^ L l SJjH-uucok uupar uubho kuuvo s u u j h -
The S a n s k r i t orthography i s u s u a l l y p r e s e r v e d i n S a n s k r i t l o a n -
words; e . g . QiXl L j ^ U ^ ( > l *>t<f
h i t b h i i t i purus bhuumi bohu
1 . See b e l o w , Chapter 3» 2. For t h i s vowel w r i t t e n with, t h e o n u s v a r , s e e b e l o w , under 3.i.
152 GUJARATI S E C T I O N
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i . and i i . 2 . i b i d . , n o t e on c a l l i g r a p h y of the onusvar .
3 . M o d i f i e r s .
The m o d i f i e r s > H^^Ll^. ( o n u s v a r ) and (^^i^C ( v i s o r g ) , u s e d i n
the Devanagari s c r i p t , a re b o t h use d i n w r i t i n g G u j a r a t i . 1
i . onusvar .
The onusvar i s a mark r e p r e s e n t i n g n a s a l i s a t i o n , and i s w r i t t e n
i n G u j a r a t i i n the form o f a dot above a c h a r a c t e r , t h u s :
oil) am irrj urrj err) orrj karg kiirj kurrj kern korrj
The onusvar i s p l a c e d a t the r i g h t s i d e of any s u p e r s c r i b e d
s t r o k e , and i t i s w r i t t e n on the c h a r a c t e r a f t e r e v e r y o t h e r s t r o k e , 2
as i n the Devanagari s c r i p t .
R e a l i s a t i o n of t h e anusvar .
a. The anusvar i s r e a l i s e d i n some words as the n a s a l i s a t i o n of the
vowel of the c h a r a c t e r w i t h which i t i s w r i t t e n . This r e a l i s a t i o n
o c c u r s u s u a l l y when t h e onusvar i s w r i t t e n w i t h any of the v o w e l s
t o , e x c e p t i n some S a n s k r i t l oanwords . The onusvar
r e a l i s e d i n t h i s way o c c u r s i n many grammatical f o r m s . Examples :
h$ H I # 6 ^ SlH *t U & X Midi
k o i i ma 11\ t u uuc me" pohoc povva
Grammatical forms:
n u i A %q HU? Vl(3 * H l d ^
chokorS bodhae k e l u maru jau a v - v u ,
The ' l o n g ' v o w e l s fcj and (§1 are u s u a l l y w r i t t e n i n c h a r a c t e r s
w i t h the onusvar when i t r e p r e s e n t s n a s a l i s a t i o n of a v o w e l ,
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 153
1 . See above, l . b . R e a l i s a t i o n o f ©kar consonant c h a r a c t e r s . 2 . See be low, C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s 2 . i i .
except in grammatical forms d e s c r i b e d as ' n e u t e r s i n g u l a r ' , which
are always w r i t t e n w i t h t h e ' s h o r t ' v o w e l ; e . g .
e(M ettct StvSt H I S ? <#>i § t § v i i c h i i b h i i t uucjo maru l i i b u uuc|u Some words are w r i t t e n w i t h e i t h e r ' s h o r t ' or ' l o n g ' v o w e l s .
The vowel c h a r a c t e r s , and the c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n s ,
are r e a l i s e d w i t h the onusvar a s £ and 0 ; e . g .
khec-vu bh£s s o p - v u p e h o c - v u
b . The onusvar w r i t t e n on a c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d i n g one of the v o r g i i y
c h a r a c t e r s may be r e a l i s e d a s t h e n a s a l c o n s o n a n t of the same
c l a s s as the f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r , or as n b e f o r e a c h a r a c t e r of
the c o - v o r g . This r e a l i s a t i o n o f t h e ©nusvar occurs main ly i n
reading S a n s k r i t l oanwords . When t h e ©nusvar i s r e a l i s e d as a
n a s a l consonant b e f o r e a f i n a l ©kar consonant c h a r a c t e r , the
f i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h an © - g l i d e 1 . Examples:
k©nj;h J a n t i j s n t u ssmbha"! s©mb©ndh
As in S a n s k r i t , t h e r e i s an a l t e r n a t i v e method of r e p r e s e n t i n g
n a s a l consonants i n t h i s c o n t e x t . T h i s method i s d e s c r i b e d l a t e r .
The ' s h o r t ' forms of t h e v o w e l s $ and are u s u a l l y w r i t t e n
wi th the ©nusvar r e p r e s e n t i n g a n a s a l c o n s o n a n t ; e . g .
l i n g c i n t a sundor kumbhar
154 GUJARATI S E C T I O N
c . When the onusvar i s w r i t t e n on a c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d i n g an o n t o s t h
or an uusm c h a r a c t e r , a s i n S a n s k r i t loanwords and l e a r n e d words
used i n t h e l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e , i t i s r e a l i s e d i n v a r i o u s w a y s ,
a c c o r d i n g t o t h e p o s i t i o n of a r t i c u l a t i o n of the f o l l o w i n g c o n s o n -
a n t . The r e a l i s a t i o n of the onusvar i n t h e s e c o n t e x t s hy s p e a k e r s
i n v a r i o u s p a r t s of I n d i a i s d e s c r i b e d i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n 1 .
The u s u a l G u j a r a t i p r a c t i c e i s i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e s e e x a m p l e s :
©nusvar b e f o r e , r e a l i s e d as y , a s i n ^ i ^ l , > s o y y o g
©nusvar b e f o r e (j^ , r e a l i s e d a s 1 , as i n *^C^l5l > P o l l i n g
©nusvar b e f o r e a l l o t h e r © n t s s t h and uusm c h a r a c t e r s , r e a l i s e d
as v ; e . g . sfcttygl <=ttA<=llA *HXi ^G^Ll s e v r s k s s i ] 2 v a r s v v a r ©vj ©hivsa s i v h
Reading examples-^
1 . onusvar r e a l i s e d a s i n n o t e a.
*] § 5$ (HtH \ b % l ULY (§LH *£bl
° t iH DMJM. cl t ' lV HL§ H & X HtJSt <=Ct<>i 2 . ©nusvar r e a l i s e d a s i n n o t e s b . and c . *>U-l& Vci <m<± M.6 ZHPil
i i . v i s o r g
This m o d i f i e r , d e s c r i b e d i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n * 4 - , does n o t occur
i n G u j a r a t i w o r d s , b u t i t o c c u r s m e d i a l l y i n a few S a n s k r i t loanwords
and i s r e a l i s e d a s the d o u b l i n g of t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n s o n a n t , as i n
%g*H.» dukkh ( a l s o w r i t t e n ^"l^ , dukh) and « H,rti ft l > ©ntskksr©^.
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i . e . 2 . $1 r e p r e s e n t s k - j o i n e d w i t h -s© . See C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s U. i . b . 3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 6 9 . U. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 » i i .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 155
=^1
n H H V
d 6 d
H (H H
H < •4. u 6
The vowel c h a r a c t e r -sfe i s n o t u s u a l l y i n c l u d e d i n the t a b l e .
The t a b l e i n which the vowel c h a r a c t e r s ( e x c e p t ) , and the
m o d i f i e r s added to the c h a r a c t e r , are p l a c e d a t the head of a
s e r i e s of columns c o n s i s t i n g of e v e r y c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i n the ©kar
form, w i t h each of the vowel s i g n s and e a c h of t h e m o d i f i e r s , i s
c a l l e d in Gujarat i the ^L^. l '^ ivSl > b a r a k h o d i i , the ' t w e l v e c h a r a c t e r s ' .
This t a b l e i s o f t e n r e c i t e d i n s c h o o l s by c h i l d r e n l e a r n i n g to read .
1. Cf. Devanagari t a b l e i n S a n s k r i t ,Ch. 2 , U.
U. The Complete S y l l a b a r y .
The t r a d i t i o n a l order of t h e c h a r a c t e r s i n the s y l l a b i c s e r i e s
i s shown i n the f o l l o w i n g table^- :
156 G U J A R A T I S E C T I O N
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 6 .
These two t a b l e s show t h e order i n which c h a r a c t e r s are p l a c e d
as i n i t i a l c h a r a c t e r s o f words i n d i c t i o n a r i e s , which i s the same as
t h e order i n S a n s k r i t , e x c e p t t h a t words b e g i n n i n g w i t h c h a r a c t e r s
w i t h the onusvar are p l a c e d a f t e r words b e g i n n i n g w i t h the same
c h a r a c t e r w i t h o u t the o n u s v a r , as i l l u s t r a t e d b e l o w :
S a n s k r i t : a a i arrjy© arrjje arrjho ako akho . . .
G u j a r a t i : a a i ak© akh© . . . as© ah© arrjk© airjkh© . . .
5 . Numerals .
The G u j a r a t i numerals are w r i t t e n t h u s :
A ^ 3 Y H \ V3 £ Hp 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6. P u n c t u a t i o n .
In p r o s e w r i t i n g , t h e same sys tem of p u n c t u a t i o n i s u s e d as i n
E n g l i s h p r o s e . The s y s t e m u s e d i n G u j a r a t i v e r s e i s the same as the
S a n s k r i t s y s t e m . ^
C H A P T E R 3
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
Consonant c h a r a c t e r s may be combined, t o r e p r e s e n t two or more
consonants which are t o be r e a l i s e d w i t h o u t an i n t e r v e n i n g vowe l .
Characters formed by j o i n i n g o t h e r c h a r a c t e r s a r e c a l l e d • t L ^ B c i L ^ R .
( soyyuktaksor) by G u j a r a t i grammarians or *$tv5L^L^ ( j o q a k s e r ) i n
the t e a c h i n g of w r i t i n g i n s c h o o l s . The c o n s t r u c t i o n and c a l l i g r a p h y
of conjunct c h a r a c t e r s i n t h e D e v a n a g a r i s c r i p t i s d e s c r i b e d i n t h e
Sanskr i t s e c t i o n 1 . G u j a r a t i c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s are c o n s t r u c t e d by
s i m i l a r methods , w i t h t h e s e m o d i f i c a t i o n s '
i . Some conjunct c h a r a c t e r s a r e formed by w r i t i n g two c h a r a c t e r s
t o g e t h e r , w i t h o u t the u s u a l s e p a r a t i n g space , a s i n , kko.
i i . When conjunct c h a r a c t e r s a r e formed by o m i t t i n g the u p r i g h t
s t roke of the f i r s t c h a r a c t e r ^ , t h e r e m a i n i n g p a r t of the f i r s t
charac ter i s o f t e n w r i t t e n on a l o w e r l e v e l than the f i r s t p a r t
of the second c h a r a c t e r , a s i n , gg© , Q U O ^ , bbo .
1 . Contexts of Conjunct C h a r a c t e r s i n G u j a r a t i .
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s occur i n G u j a r a t i i n the f o l l o w i n g c o n t e x t s
i . In Gujarat i words , t h a t i s , words n o t borrowed from S a n s k r i t or
from modern l a n g u a g e s ; e . g .
vSl^ H ^ l &£l qahyu b s c c u n©kki i c i - | ; t n i i
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 1 . 2 . i b i d . , C h . 3 , 1 . i i .
158 G U J A R A T I S E C T I O N
i i . In S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , e i t h e r words u s e d commonly i n G u j a r a t i ,
or l e a r n e d words u s e d o n l y i n the l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e ; e . g .
p u s t o k p e t r i i j v o r
i i i . In loanwords from o t h e r l a n g u a g e s ; e . g .
r o s t o gard^ s ^ e / o n
2 . R e a l i s a t i o n of Conjunct C h a r a c t e r s i n G u j a r a t i .
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s a re r e a l i s e d i n r e a d i n g as s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t -
i n g of two or more c o n s o n a n t s f o l l o w e d by a • v o w e l . When an okar c o n -
junct c h a r a c t e r o c c u r s a s t h e f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of a word, i t i s u s u a l -
l y r e a l i s e d w i t h an o - g l i d e , as i n , jenm' , %tX|J^^ , J a s t r ' . 1
The r e a l i s a t i o n i n modern G u j a r a t i of okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s
w i t h z e r o - v o w e l i n c e r t a i n p o s i t i o n s i n words g i v e s r i s e t o a problem
of s p e l l i n g . For i n s t a n c e , when a f o r m a t i v e p a r t i c l e b e g i n n i n g w i t h
a consonant c h a r a c t e r i s added t o a v e r b a l b a s e e n d i n g i n a f i n a l
okar consonant c h a r a c t e r , t h e f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of t h e b a s e i s r e a l i s e d
w i t h zero^vowe l . This r e a l i s a t i o n of the c o n s e c u t i v e c h a r a c t e r s i s
s i m i l a r t o the r e a l i s a t i o n of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r . S i m i l a r problems
a r i s e i n o t h e r c o n t e x t s , where an okar consonant c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s -
ed w i t h z e r o - v o w e l b e f o r e a f o l l o w i n g consonant c h a r a c t e r , and i n
compound words i n which t h e f i r s t p a r t ends i n an okar c o n s o n a n t
c h a r a c t e r and the s e c o n d p a r t b e g i n s w i t h a consonant c h a r a c t e r .
Examples of such words a re g i v e n below w i t h the v a r i o u s c l a s s e s of
c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s .
1 . See a b o v e , C h . 2 , l . a . and b . This g l i d e i s n o t r e p r e s e n t e d i n t h e t r a n s c r i p t i o n of words t o which t h i s r u l e a p p l i e s .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 1 5 9
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . 2 . Cf. S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s 1 . 3 . See b e l o w , C las s 3 . i i i - a .
3 . C l a s s e s of Conjunct C h a r a c t e r s i n G u j a r a t i .
• The conjunct c h a r a c t e r s u s e d i n w r i t i n g G u j a r a t i are c l a s s i f i e d
in t h i s chapter i n the same way a s t h e c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n
the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n 1 . Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s of a l l t h e c l a s s e s occur
i n G u j a r a t i , hut i n some of t h e c l a s s e s o n l y a few of t h e c h a r a c t e r s
are used . Those which are u s e d i n w r i t i n g G u j a r a t i are shown by the
examples g i v e n i n each c l a s s , w h i c h i n c l u d e some S a n s k r i t loanwords i n
frequent u s e . Some of t h e r e a d i n g e x a m p l e s g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t -
ion occur i n l i t e r a r y t e x t s as l e a r n e d l o a n w o r d s , and t h e s e may be
t r a n s c r i b e d wi thout d i f f i c u l t y i n G u j a r a t i c h a r a c t e r s .
Class 1 . Two s i m i l a r c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d . ^
Most of the c h a r a c t e r s of t h e G u j a r a t i s y l l a b a r y occur i n t h i s
c l a s s , as 'doubled' c h a r a c t e r s . The c h a r a c t e r f o r - r r e i s w r i t t e n
as , the s u p e r s c r i b e d s t r o k e r e p r e s e n t i n g r - p r e c e d i n g another
consonant-3,
A c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t i n g an a s p i r a t e d c o n s o n a n t i s no t u s u a l l y
w r i t t e n as the f i r s t p a r t of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r i n t h i s c l a s s ; but
in Gujarat i w r i t i n g the c h a r a c t e r s , khkho , ^ , " ( ; n t n 9 » a n < ^
^Jd^ , dhdho are o f t e n u s e d . The c o m b i n a t i o n s -nno and -mmo are
represen ted i n some words by w r i t i n g t h e ©nusvar over the c h a r a c t e r
preced ing or ^ ; e . g .
sommoti s©nnidh i but ©nn
The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e G u j a r a t i words i n which two
c o n s e c u t i v e consonant c h a r a c t e r s , t h e f i r s t b e i n g ©kar, are r e a l i s e d
i6o G U J A R A T I S E C T I O N
i n ord inary s p e e c h i n t h e same way as c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s :
^WllvSl niHHl OUA^ <Hkddl H P % ?
ag-gaq^ii gam-ma bhav-vu-' b e h e n - no
Reading examples^-
'i/sSi ^tb>iX a ^ j > d A e S W i ^ e > l u ^ v s
@ £ c £ l y g t CH£L P*£L. H>S&L ftbrut w ^ Q * 5
^ H-*£ C^Hd ( f ed l C l a s s 2 . Two v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d .
The c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s occur f o r t h e most p a r t i n S a n s k r i t
and o t h e r l oanwords . Those which are most f r e q u e n t l y u s e d i n w r i t i n g
Gujara t i are g i v e n "below, i n the same groups as the c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n
i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n ^ . u 6r l M cH
- k t o - t k o -pt© -tp© -bd©
i i . Most of the c h a r a c t e r s c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h o s e of t h i s group i n
the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n , under i i . a . , are w r i t t e n i n l i t e r a r y Guja-
r a t i , r e p r e s e n t i n g homorganic n a s a l c o n s o n a n t s . This method of
r e p r e s e n t i n g n a s a l c o n s o n a n t s p r e c e d i n g v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s i s
g e n e r a l l y u s e d o n l y i n w r i t i n g S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s . An a l t e r n a t i v e
method, r e p r e s e n t i n g n a s a l c o n s o n a n t s of each c l a s s by w r i t i n g
the ©nusvar on the p r e c e d i n g c h a r a c t e r , has been d e s c r i b e d above^.
Of the c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n under i i . b . , o n l y
, jn© and <?!,, - i n © occur i n G u j a r a t i . The c h a r a c t e r ^
i s n o t c a l l i g r a p h i c a l l y a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r and i s o f t e n 1 . Compound word. 2 . Noun w i t h s u f f i x . 3 . Verbal form. i+. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . l 6 9 . 5. The second c h a r a c t e r i n t h e s e words i s formed from the Devanagari c h a r a c t e r f o r d© ; C f . S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 1 . i . . 6. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 2 . 7. See a b o v e , C h . 2 , 3 . i . b .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 161
1 . Verbal form. 2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 6 9 . 3 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s 3 « i .
M
i n c l u d e d i n the s y l l a b a r y . In G u j a r a t i d i c t i o n a r i e s words b e g i n -
ing w i t h 5[L are p l a c e d a f t e r words b e g i n n i n g w i t h . « jL i s
o f t e n r e a l i s e d as gye .
i i i . Some of the c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s group occur i n S a n s k r i t l oanwords :
-kmo -gno -ghn© - t m o -dm© -pn©
i v . Of t h i s group, o n l y , -nm© , o c c u r s i n G u j a r a t i , though
v^pi-L , -rjm? and l ^ H , , -nm© may o c c u r i n l e a r n e d loanwords i n
a l i t e r a r y t e x t .
The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of c o n s e c u t i v e
consonant c h a r a c t e r s , when t h e f i r s t i s ©kar, i n the same way as c o n -
junct c h a r a c t e r s : UCfel SlScCl ^ V t ^ U d l J s k t i J s k - t i i 1 gupt a p - t o 1
Reading examples^
(Ml&t ctcSia UHc8lR. ^ V t ctrM*. 31c^> A&L
Class 3 . Characters j o i n e d w i t h ©nt©sth c h a r a c t e r s ,
i . Characters j o i n e d w i t h f o l l o w i n g M. .
A l l the c h a r a c t e r s of the G u j a r a t i s y l l a b a r y , e x c e p t S* and V >L occur in t h i s c l a s s . Many of t h e c h a r a c t e r s occur i n v e r b a l forms
in which the s u f f i x ^(X > a n d o t h e r forms of t h i s s u f f i x , are added to
the verba l base by j o i n i n g t h e c h a r a c t e r o f t h e s u f f i x w i t h the f i n a l
character of the b a s e .
i6z G U J A R A T I S E C T I O N
Reading examples^
Q&AL v^iej dJ .Wl ai^i *£fo£i
^ f e ^ d H L §16^ HvSHl 6ltf£l
^>cMl cHL *IL*J GfclL H**l HlrMl
% ^ ^ 6 m J °iLeMl OU<>*4 ^cu*4. x C l W £ H-i^l 8 ^ H m ^ C l 6 i / r f t 5H<S^l
i i . Charac ters j o i n e d w i t h f o l l o w i n g .2
Only a few of the G u j a r a t i c h a r a c t e r s are combined w i t h , and
t h e s e occur o n l y i n S a n s k r i t l oanwords . The r e a l i s a t i o n of a f i n a l
okar consonant c h a r a c t e r i n some compound words formed w i t h t h e words
LUill 9 v a l a and cJJA , var , i l l u s t r a t e the r e a l i s a t i o n of c o n s e c -
u t i v e consonant c h a r a c t e r s , when the f i r s t i s o k a r , i n t h e same way as
c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s ; e . g .
U&=Ll-*L ^6cllCs*i * & H < m ° J ^ L l
pokvann o^h'vad^iyu cjak'vala som'var budh'var
Reading examples-^
i i i . Charac ter s j o i n e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g or f o l l o w i n g v
a. p r e c e d i n g a n o t h e r c h a r a c t e r . 5
These c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s are formed by p l a c i n g a s t r o k e known^
a s » reph , above the c h a r a c t e r b e f o r e which i s t o be r e a l i s -
ed as the f i r s t of two or more c o n s e c u t i v e c o n s o n a n t s . The p l a c e of
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . l 6 9 . 2. See S a n s k r i t , Ch.3j .3-CI.3 . i i . 3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . l 6 9 . U. For the c h a r a c t e r * C , f © ,
s e e S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 1 . i i i . 5. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 3 . i i i *
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 163
t h i s s t r o k e on Gujara t i c h a r a c t e r s , w h e t h e r akar or w r i t t e n w i t h vowel
s i g n s , corresponds w i t h the p l a c e of t h e s t r o k e on the Devanagari
c h a r a c t e r s , and the order of w r i t i n g t h e s t r o k e s of c h a r a c t e r s w i t h
reph i s the same as the o r d e r d e s c r i b e d i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n 1 .
The c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s w h i c h o c c u r i n G u j a r a t i are i l l u s t r a t e d
in the r e a d i n g examples g i v e n b e l o w .
The f o l l o w i n g words i l l u s t r a t e t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of c o n s e c u t i v e
consonant c h a r a c t e r s , when t h e f i r s t i s o k a r , i n the same way as c o n -
junct c h a r a c t e r s w r i t t e n w i t h r e p h a r e r e a l i s e d :
6 d l 6* .d l ^LH d § t P & l ^ C t
korta k o r - t a ^ dharm ghar-m§3 varn. n i s a r ' n i i
Reading examples**"
d S <H?t * d O f d H * £ t l oUi t - t \ d <=td-t *H&
b . ^ f o l l o w i n g another c h a r a c t e r .
These c h a r a c t e r s are formed by w r i t i n g a short , d i a g o n a l s t r o k e
e i t h e r a g a i n s t the u p r i g h t s t r o k e o f a c h a r a c t e r , or below a rounded
c h a r a c t e r .5 Two c h a r a c t e r s s i m i l a r t o t h e Devanagari c h a r a c t e r s are
used i n forming t h e s e c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s : ^ f o r do , and > i . f o r
Jo .6 The examples g i v e n be low i l l u s t r a t e the c h a r a c t e r s o f t h i s c l a s s
which occur i n G u j a r a t i , m o s t l y i n S a n s k r i t and E n g l i s h l o a n w o r d s .
Reading examples7
# i S id V U S d *U£t Jty
V)i W&l *H1?A& d* l URl§L
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 - C I . 3 . i i i . a. C a l l i g r a p h y . 2 , Verbal form. 3 . Noun w i t h s u f f i x . L. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 6 9 . 5. C f . S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 3 . i i i . b . 6 . i b i d . , C h . 2 , 1 . i . and i i i . 7 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 6 9 .
164 G U J A R A T I S E C T I O N
1 . Cf. S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C l . 3 . i v . a . and b . 2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 6 9 .
i v . C h a r a c t e r s w i t h p r e c e d i n g or f o l l o w i n g ^ . 1
The c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s which are used i n w r i t i n g G u j a r a t i
are i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e r e a d i n g examples g i v e n b e l o w .
a. p r e c e d i n g .
C h a r a c t e r s w i t h p r e c e d i n g Q a r e n o t u s u a l l y w r i t t e n i n G u j a r a t i
e x c e p t i n a few S a n s k r i t l oanwords . Some words are w r i t t e n e i t h e r w i t h
a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r or w i t h s e p a r a t e c h a r a c t e r s , s u c h as ,
b o l k e , or <H<&£>-t>al'ke.
In r e p r e s e n t i n g c o l l o q u i a l s p e e c h forms i n modern G u j a r a t i , the
c h a r a c t e r i s somet imes w r i t t e n f o r (^J^ , as i n
f o r , l o h e r , and o t h e r s i m i l a r words .
b . f o l l o w i n g .
C h a r a c t e r s combined w i t h f o l l o w i n g Q occur m a i n l y i n S a n s k r i t
and E n g l i s h l o a n w o r d s .
The f o l l o w i n g words i l l u s t r a t e the r e a l i s a t i o n of c o n s e c u t i v e
consonant c h a r a c t e r s , when the f i r s t i s okar , i n t h e same way as c o n -
j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s :
b i l ' k u l v o T / g o n i i b o d ' l i i a m ' l i i
Reading e x a m p l e s 2
ftt©i*t ae-L-ii ate& *<=ieu Kie-i Me^is £ & A I vsaiu ^ e u u
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 165
1 . Cf. S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s k . i . a . and b . 2 . i b i d . , C h . 2 , 1 . i i i . 3 . i b i d . , C h . 2 , l . i . c a - v a r g a h , U. G f . n o t e on $t » under C 1 . 2 . i i . b . 5.. Verbal form. 6. Noun w i t h s u f f i x . 7 . Noun w i t h p a r t i c l e .
Class U' v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g or f o l l o w i n g uusm
c h a r a c t e r s .
i . v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d w i t h > o r *H . ^
a. $X > H o r p r e c e d i n g a v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r .
The c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s w h i c h occur i n G u j a r a t i , m o s t l y i n
Sanskr i t loanwords , are i l l u s t r a t e d by the examples g i v e n be low. The
formation of the c h a r a c t e r s i s s i m i l a r t o the f o r m a t i o n of the Deva-
nagari c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s , u s i n g the form ^ f o r 3 . 1 , and
u s i n g the form " C ^ 3 f o r 5^ when combined w i t h ^ •
b . ^ or ^ f o l l o w i n g a v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r .
Only a few of the G u j a r a t i c h a r a c t e r s occur i n t h i s c l a s s . Those
which occur are i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e example s be low. The c h a r a c t e r
> kso , i s not c a l l i g r a p h i c a l l y a c o n j u n c t c n a r a c t e r and i s o f t e n
inc luded i n the G u j a r a t i vornomala.^- Words b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h i s are
p l a c e d i n Gujarat i d i c t i o n a r i e s a f t e r words b e g i n n i n g w i t h .
The f o l l o w i n g words i l l u s t r a t e t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of c o n s e c u t i v e
consonant c h a r a c t e r s , when t h e f i r s t i s akar , i n the same way as
conjunct c h a r a c t e r s : • ' HlUdX ' £ l f t w l _ fedUHl
nuk'san n a s - t o 5 b h £ s - n o 6 d i v e s - m a ?
The c h a r a c t e r i s w r i t t e n i n some words for^RQS t o r e p r e s e n t
the p r o n u n c i a t i o n i n modern G u j a r a t i o f such words as (d» S 9 n e l
a n d ^ Y , s a h e j ( ^ Y ) .
i66 G U J A R A T I S E C T I O N
Reading examples^
y <a £ W l 3 I £ < t * d , R.*rtl * U 3 * l **Cl W l S k C d Gtt fcSUl W f c § d ^ H ^ L ^ L ^ r d
fe-H^L ( ^ H i l g ^ t
i i . preceding-or fo l lowing onunasik ( ' n a s a l ' ) c h a r a c t e r s 2 .
a. preceding.
Two characters occur with preceding (6 , in the Sanskrit l oan-s
words Cty£§U£l »brahmon, , and p j . ^ , c ihn b. fo l lowing .
The characters which occur with fol lowing are i l l u s t r a t e d in
tbe examples given below. The characters and V(£ are sometimes
wri t ten to represent the tendency to aspirat ion in some words in
co l loquia l speech.
Reading examples 3 -<*l% U L ^ [ * U & ] d ^ [tih]
Gujarati prose passaged
5*1 ° t*i * d t « W U £ & r l d ^ * Y , ^ i R d L c l d l # l d £ l ,
<£tR r l d l M £ l «VLv^d ^ Y d R l - H ^ d r l Gd l^ ld UeT ° y l R , ^ l
c l^ lD l ^ I d ^ U s ^ L L ^ = d i l ^ C d l R l - f l °vlvS^Cl <d^£l €A
U & 4 % A & c t l i ^ d l M V d f e ; "ideOA < d l < t d R t
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , see p .169. 2. Cf .Sanskri t , Ch.3 ,3 .Class U. i i . 3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , see p .170. k» Sarpha Jodnikosh, by Maganlal
Prabhudas Desai , Uth ed. 19U9, p .16 , pub. Navajivan Prakashan Mandir, Ahmedabad.
C O N J U N C T C H A R A C T E R S 167
*k ( k ^ v S l ctU^-Cl €>. rL VCVIHL W t d d d R l rlLC^lH-
< H * A d l S i d l A fcQA cHL 9lvS^dHL * d U Y 5 d l \ < = U d l R l 4 l
H ^ l . * d 5 t o (RlRlAl Y t v S ^ d ^ H d H L - H *4J& %ii &, AMI
Vto^QAl ^IL^iclHL < d A fctftUH ^ ( A e>. ^
<=LR 5HUV£rLLHl4l ° R d * * U @ < H v l HfcF ReT aAdik U f c / l
^ U A L - i l Vldl& H l - H ( A ^ e i l d l H U i e i H l V d & l
e>. «= i> id Y d ! ( A £ £ H I H ! ^ H H ^ ° * t d - d 9ui>d Y <=txk
3d * U R e> ( A & f c H t ^ H A H l - M - d £ t R d l M ^ l
d M ^ & l A = * l ( d l A ^ L a U ^ b d H f c f Y L H £> * d A "ORI HO d .
G U J A R A T I S E C T I O N
T r a n s c r i p t i o n of Reading Examples
Chapter 2.
1.1. no ch© j o
ghon p©g nakh jho-j; gho<^ dhon t o k
d h o
cec[ me^h thed^ dom
k©kh hh.Qi{ ch©-|;h cjheg ben ph©1; jed^ pen_
b©d©n p © k © 4 jhecjep m©d©d c©m©n phs^sk teged^ gomen jomer^ beged^ nogod dhemek depe^ tenekh b h e j e n p e a h e n
dhod^'por^ b h o - J i ' k o n cek'mek Dhe-fpo-]; bed^'che-!; g e j ' k e n
l . i i . r o t h per yov l o y
l e k h ghor kho l bor r e j r e v l e g v e y char j h o l v e r red^ k o l cay bher joy
l e c e k c h e l e r v e r e d h jheror^ bherec[ v e k h e t r e t e n ; t ereph reved^ v e r e d l e g e r ; y e v e n corek p e l o k h peven bhereri
k e l ' t e r l e g ' b h e g p o s t e r led^'ken^ t o r ' t e j d e p h ' t e r
1. i i i . r e s Je"|;h sedh Jon, h e s d e j y o j s e r J e t
l e s e ^ h e l e k s e r e s herekh Jepe th semey heren^ phenes
s e m 1 j e n _ J e r ' b e t
p h e X d e l h&\.
a 2.1.
i s uun uucek iya"t
mau
ke
e
sar'ke-j; . k e s ' r e t h e r ' k o t
ba^ad d h e v e l kernel
ao eo
v e k e t 1 s e r
p e r ' v e l . hel 'ke-j;
2 . 1 i .
ek uu~J;h l e i i
ap e t h
d e i i
e<]h ri^ a j ev^h e v s e d h ogh ubheq i i j f g e i i j e i i e d e i i e l e i i e
s e v che Da g h i i t e c a j e bhuu dho j i i
J e j h r o j t n i i k duudh l o k ruup c i i j drdh h i t jay god l a v n e h i behu mehe p e c h i i a j e uubho uge apo r s i r t u s e v e t e o b h a i i c h i i e juo b o y r i i g o l o varu p e y s o iriuke r a j i i p e l o d ivo krpa v i s e n i j a l e u j a n i i r u u p i y o t a b e d a r i i h o j i y a r i i b h a i o e
P .1U9. e k ' t h a a p ' n e b e k ' r i i n e k ' j o p o g ' l i i a l ' s u k o s ' b i i p a y ' I i i • jem'rukh p a y ' d e l k o ^ ' v a l g u j f r a t i i k o s e b ' c o r
c h e t e r c h e f r e c h e t e r - v i i peked^ pek'cjo pekecj-vo p e s e r p e s ' r i i n e p e s o r - v i i m o k ' l i i m o k a l - v i i
TRANSCRIPTION 169
3 . i . pa hu k § i i bhoy ph£:k kh£c s S j uugh s l i c bhes badh jhakh t e v a j madu. pehoc v l ^ i i thau" l l b a
i i . anand j s n t u v s s a n t msr^ endor k e n j u s gmba somp
Chapter 3 »
Glass 1 .
nokki i lokk&d^ cokkho l a g g u v s c c e b e c c u i c c h a goccho S 9 j j 9 d _ u j j h o t l i chu-J;t© D h 9 t t i i c i t t h i i khsd^o p i t t g T , p o t t h g r muddgl buddhi oddho grins cgppu bebbe h i m m 9 t r e y y g t c h e l l o h S l i i i h i s s o
Class 2 .
jukt i b h g k t i t 9 t k a l C 9 m 9 t k a r gupt t 9 t p a r Jebd y g t n l 9 g n rukmir^ii j 9 n m rgrjg sundgr p g n t h argmbh pgrgnt u sembgndh jpan
Class 3 - i -
kyare / 9 k y o khya lu fiakhyo l a g y u sughyu s l i c y o puchyo jyare khojyu suujhyu chu^yo uuthyu p9d _ y o kadjiyo bher|yo j i i t y o t y a athyu v i d y a / o d h y o medhye manyo nyay pyare apyfl haphyo dgbyCf thobhyu gamyu suury kgryo b o l y o avyu bhavyu 9 V 9 / y p i i r ' s y u monusy kshyu" rnelyu n i k g l y o 9 d r J " y
Class 3 . i t .
s e t t v p r t h v i i s e r v i i / v s r v i / v a s s v 9 b h a v svgpn d v e / dhvgni t o t t v s j j i a n
Class 3 » i i t »
a. t©rk muurkh vorg s r j i t g e r j s n a vernon puurr^ v a r t s n 9 r t h
v i d y a r t h i i n i r d 9 y erdhu ©rpgr^ dhsnn d 9 r m i y § k h e rv puurve h o r s
b. krom r a t r cgndr sgmudr prem prar j i i trsr i t r i i j u Jukrovar from Jravar^ agreh© t r a b u i r j g r e j i i n 9 m r prsmane bhramor
Class 3 - i v . phalgun k 9 l p g n a k o l h a k 9 l h 9 i i s v ^ l p J i l p p r a l h a d Jlok klej* k l a s g l a s s l e t
Class U . i . a. m e / k a r l i paj"cim ce/ma p e j c a t t a p a / c o r y dus t s P s ? t
p u s k 9 \ duskorm r a s t r v o s t u r s s t o p u s t g k J a s t r s t r i l stheT, s t h i t i t i r o s k a r sgrrjskrt smeror^ r a s t
b . p o r i i k s a r 9 k s 9 r ^ Q k s a r Igksmoi; k r s : q 9 p s 9 r a insaph
170 GUJARATI S E C T I O N
C l a s s U . i i .
nhavu samhe (same) tamhe (tome)
Gujara t i p r o s e p a s s a g e
jod^onii J a s t r o p u u t h o y , bohoTi i J i s t ruuq^hine e n u s e r o t i i hoy , e
bodhu j e f l u avojyok che tefrCL j , e'thova t ena k a r ' t a y e , j e v i i hoy
t e v i i poi\ jocjanii behujonomany one n i j c i t t h a i i j a y , e vodhare a v o j y o k
c h e . a j e ongre j i i b h a s a n i i joc |on i i b o d h i i r i i t e J a s t r o j u d d h che em
t o kehevayo j n e h i ; k e f l i i y e babot-ma e cjhangadhacja. v a g a r - n i i c h e .
pan_ t e proja-ma sanga-|;han t a t h a t a l i i m ' b a d h a t a hovane l i i d h e t y §
jocjonii-ma a r a j a k a t a p h e l a v a pamii n a t h i i . a n g r e j i i b h a s a n i i jod^anii
sarvamany t h a i i c u k i i c h e , t e t h i i jod^aniini l babet-ma badhe ekMharu'
lakhan_ jad^ii ave c h e . ek var a r a j a k a t a - m S t h i i v y a v a s t h a utpann t h a i i
g a i i e f l e p a c h i i sudhara karva j hoy t o t e kam prama^-ma ghanu s a h e l u
t h a i i jay c h e .
sudharano pravaha many v i k a l p o n i i moryada-mg j v a h i i Joke c h e .
vakhot j a t a v i k a l p o - m a amuk j a t - n i i jod^anii j vadbare ruud^h thay che
ane b i i j a v i k a l p o avamahy na hoy topan_ v a p a r a j - n e abha've k a l a g r a s t
t h a i i jay che ane k h a r i i pacje che .
BENGALI S E C T I O N P R E P A R E D I N C O L L A B O R A T I O N W I T H
MISS G. M. SUMMERS formerly Lecturer in Bengali in the
School of Oriental and African Studies
University of London
1.
C H A P T E R !
ARRANGEMENT OP THE SYLLABARY
The Benga l i s c r i p t , as a w r i t i n g s y s t e m , i s "based on t h e same
s y l l a b i c system as t h e Devanagar i s c r i p t . The c h a r a c t e r s of t h e
s y l l a b a r y are arranged i n t h e same w a y , and though t h e m a j o r i t y of
the c h a r a c t e r s seem a t f i r s t s i g h t t o be v e r y d i f f e r e n t i n l i n e and
form from t h o s e of the Devanagar i s c r i p t , some o f them are r e c o g n i s -
ably of the same o r i g i n .
The same system of n o t a t i o n i s u s e d i n t h i s s e c t i o n f o r the t r a n -
s c r i p t i o n of the B e n g a l i s c r i p t a s t h a t u s e d i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n ,
and i n the t r a n s c r i p t i o n of t h e modern l a n g u a g e s which are w r i t t e n
wi th the Devanagari s c r i p t . As i n t h e Devanagari s c r i p t , each
charac ter of the B e n g a l i s c r i p t r e p r e s e n t s a s y l l a b l e c o n s i s t i n g
e i t h e r of a vowel or of a c o n s o n a n t f o l l o w e d by t h e f i r s t vowel of t h e
vowel s e r i e s . This v o w e l , i n B e n g a l i a s i n S a n s k r i t , i s u s u a l l y r e f e r -
red to i n E n g l i s h t e x t b o o k s a s t h e ' i n h e r e n t ' vowe l . In r e f e r r i n g to
a consonant c h a r a c t e r of the B e n g a l i s y l l a b a r y , or i n r e c i t i n g t h e
s y l l a b a r y , the i n h e r e n t vowel i s , h o w e v e r , t h e vowel which i s u s u a l l y
r e p r e s e n t e d by the p h o n e t i c symbol ' o ' . In order t o p r e s e r v e un i form-
i t y in the s y s t e m a t i c t r a n s c r i p t i o n t h r o u g h o u t t h i s work t h e symbol T e T i s used i n t h i s s e c t i o n t o r e p r e s e n t t h e i n h e r e n t v o w e l , and as
there are v a r i o u s o t h e r d i f f e r e n c e s i n t h e q u a l i t y of vowel sounds
used i n r e a l i s i n g the B e n g a l i c h a r a c t e r s , t h e s y s t e m a t i c t r a n s c r i p t i o n
174 - B E N G A L I S E C T I O N
i n t h i s s e c t i o n i s accompanied , b o t h i n the examples g i v e n i n t h e
t e x t and i n t h o s e g i v e n f o r p r a c t i c e i n r e a d i n g , by a p h o n e t i c t r a n -
s c r i p t i o n . The p h o n e t i c t r a n s c r i p t i o n i s g i v e n i n b r a c k e t s t o d i s -
t i n g u i s h i t from t h e s y s t e m a t i c roman t r a n s c r i p t i o n .
In t h e roman s y l l a b a r y g i v e n b e l o w , t h e s y l l a b l e s a re r e p r e s e n t e d
i n t h e t a b l e i n t h e s y s t e m a t i c t r a n s c r i p t i o n u s e d i n t h e S a n s k r i t
s y l l a b a r y . For t h e t r a n s c r i p t i o n of c e r t a i n a d d i t i o n a l c h a r a c t e r s
which do n o t occur i n t h e S a n s k r i t s y l l a b a r y , and f o r the p h o n e t i c
t r a n s c r i p t i o n , t h e f o l l o w i n g s y m b o l s , n o t i n c l u d e d i n t h e A l l - I n d i a
Roman N o t a t i o n , ar e u s e d i n t h i s s e c t i o n : -
i . S y s t e m a t i c roman n o t a t i o n .
po and ph© , f o r t h e r e t r o f l e x f l a p p e d c o n s o n a n t s , r e p r e s e n t e d i n
the s c r i p t by m o d i f i e d forms of the c h a r a c t e r s c o r r e s p o n d i n g
t o 4© and cjh©1.
y© , f o r t h e m o d i f i e d form of the c h a r a c t e r c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o y© , 2
and r e a l i s e d i n v a r i o u s w a y s , d e s c r i b e d i n Chapter 2 .
nj , f o r t h e m o d i f i e r r e f e r r e d to as t h e ©nusvar .3
i i . P h o n e t i c n o t a t i o n .
( o ) , f o r t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e i n h e r e n t vowel i n most c o n t e x t s .
(as) , f o r t h e r e a l i s a t i o n , i n c e r t a i n c o n t e x t s , of the vowel t r a n -
s c r i b e d i n roman n o t a t i o n as a ; and f o r t h e r e a l i s a t i o n , i n
s p e c i a l c o n t e x t s , o f t h e vowel t r a n s c r i b e d as e .
(") ' , s u p e r s c r i b e d t o vowel s y m b o l s , t o r e p r e s e n t n a s a l i s a t i o n .
( * ) , t o r e p r e s e n t t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e i n h e r e n t v o w e l , m e d i a l l y ,
as an © - g l i d e , or a s z e r o - v o w e l , "in c e r t a i n p o s i t i o n s .
1 . See C h . 2 , l . i . 2 . i b i d . , l . i i . ©nt©sth© y©. 3 . See C h . 2 , 3 . i i .
ARRANGEMENT OF THE SYLLABARY
B e n g a l i S y l l a b a r y i n Roman N o t a t i o n
J 75
CONSONANTS w i t h o 1
V e l a r 2
P a l a t a l 3
R e t r o -f l e x
Denta l 5
L a b i a l V
oic
eles
s U n a s p i r a t e d ka ca t 9 t a pa
CQ
CD
> Vo
icel
ess
A s p i r a t e d kha cha tha tha pha
•H
CQ o U n a s p i r a t e d J 9 $ da ba
O
H PH
•H O
> A s p i r a t e d gha Jha d h a 1 dha bha
Nasal 9 9 ( p - o ) 2 n8 na ma
Semivowels 3 ya-' ra l a va**
F r i c a t i v e s jfa s a ^ sa
A s p i r a t e ha
VOWELS a a i i i u uu e ay o av
MODIFIERS Nasa l - nj and A s p i r a t e d - h
Notes on the s y l l a b l e s marked 1 - 6 i n t h e above t a b l e :
1 . The c h a r a c t e r s c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e s e two s y l l a b l e s are m o d i f i e d
to r e p r e s e n t the media l and f i n a l r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s
as f l apped s o u n d s , w r i t t e n a s pa and pha i n the t r a n s c r i p t i o n .
2. The c h a r a c t e r c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h i s s y l l a b l e i s n o t w r i t t e n as a
s i n g l e c h a r a c t e r i n B e n g a l i , b u t o n l y i n c o m b i n a t i on w i t h o t h e r
c h a r a c t e r s , i l l u s t r a t e d b e l o w i n Chapter 3.
176 B E N G A L I S E C T I O N
3 . As the c h a r a c t e r c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h i s s y l l a b l e i s a lway s r e a l i s e d
i n the same way as the c h a r a c t e r c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o j© , a m o d i f i e d
form of i t i s u s e d t o r e p r e s e n t y© i n c e r t a i n c o n t e x t s . The u s e
of t h i s m o d i f i e d c h a r a c t e r , r e f e r r e d t o as '©nt©sth© y © ! , and t r a n -
s c r i b e d i n t h i s work as y© , i s d i s c u s s e d i n Chapter 2 . 2 . i i .
h. The c h a r a c t e r c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h i s s y l l a b l e i s t h e same as t h e
c h a r a c t e r c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e s y l l a b l e b© .
5 . The c h a r a c t e r c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h i s s y l l a b l e o c c u r s o n l y i n
S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s .
6 . This v o w e l , s y l l a b i c r , o c c u r s o n l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s .
The c h a r a c t e r s o f t h e E e n g a l i s c r i p t are a r r a n g ed i n t h e same
groups as the s y l l a b l e s g i v e n i n t h e above t a b l e , and t h e terms u s e d
by B e n g a l i grammarians i n d e s c r i b i n g t h e c h a r a c t e r s and t h e i r r e a l i s -
a t i o n i n r e a d i n g ar e s i m i l a r t o t h o s e g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
These terms are S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , and when t h e y a r e r e a l i s e d i n r e a d -
i n g , the same c o n v e n t i o n s are o b s e r v e d as t h o s e u s e d i n modern B e n g a l i
r e a d i n g from a t e x t . They sound , t h e r e f o r e , somewhat d i f f e r e n t from
t h e S a n s k r i t t e r m s , though when the S a n s k r i t and the B e n g a l i t erms are
p l a c e d s i d e by s i d e , t h e y are r e c o g n i s a b l e a s l o a n w o r d s . The f o l l o w i n g
examples i l l u s t r a t e t h e s i m i l a r i t i e s and d i f f e r e n c e s be tween the two
s e t s of t e r m s , i n s c r i p t and i n s y s t e m a t i c and p h o n e t i c t r a n s c r i p t i o n :
S a n s k r i t ^T ^ T R " ©ks©r©m B e n g a l i ^SJ^^f ©ks©r©,, (okkhor)
lo) \m*. v iramoh v| viram© (b iram)
v©rg© (borgo )
^FcT^ST o n t s h s t h ©
^ ^ " { • T uusman
5 2 T ^ R T T V vyajijanam
vs>| a n t a s t h a ( o n t o s t h o )
^ " ^ J uusm© (u/J"8)
^5$*7 vyejijsn© (been j on)
ARRANGEMENT OF THE SYLLABARY 1 7 7
Bengal i C a l l i g r a p h y .
In the modern t e a c h i n g of B e n g a l i w r i t i n g , o r d i n a r y pens are
g e n e r a l l y u s e d , and c o n s e q u e n t l y l i t t l e a t t e n t i o n i s p a i d t o the b a l -
ance or d i r e c t i o n of t h e broad and t h i n s t r o k e s . Former ly , however ,
w r i t i n g was taught w i t h a broad pen s u c h as t h a t d e s c r i b e d i n the
no te s on c a l l i g r a p h y i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n 1 . Though the r e l a t i v e
p o s i t i o n of the broad and t h i n s t r o k e s i s n o t s o s t r i c t l y adhered t o
i n w r i t i n g Benga l i as i n w r i t i n g t h e Devanagar i s c r i p t , t h e g e n e r a l
d i r e c t i o n of them i s the same a s t h a t i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h o s e n o t e s .
There i s a c o n v e n t i o n a l o r d e r o f w r i t i n g the s t r o k e s i n each
character? the f i r s t s t r o k e i n w r i t i n g most of t h e c h a r a c t e r s
beg ins a t the top l e f t hand s i d e and t h e l a s t s t r o k e b r i n g s the pen
to the top r i g h t hand s i d e s o t h a t i t i s p o s s i b l e t o p a s s s t r a i g h t on
to the b e g i n n i n g of the n e x t c h a r a c t e r . I f a c h a r a c t e r has a h o r i z o n -
t a l h e a d - s t r o k e , or i s comple te d w i t h a s h o r t h o r i z o n t a l s t r o k e a t
the top r i g h t hand s i d e , t h i s s t r o k e i s w r i t t e n l a s t and c a r r i e d on
to the f i r s t s t r o k e of t h e n e x t c h a r a c t e r i n a word; when such a
s t r o k e i s p l a c e d on the l e f t hand s i d e of t h e c h a r a c t e r , i t i s w r i t t e n
f i r s t . This h e a d - s t r o k e i s r e f e r r e d t o a s the ' m a t r a ' . The pen shou ld
be l i f t e d as r a r e l y as p o s s i b l e i n w r i t i n g a c h a r a c t e r , or c o n s e c u t i v e
c h a r a c t e r s . A l l the c h a r a c t e r s a r e w r i t t e n be low the l i n e , i f r u l e d
paper i s u s e d , and the r e g u l a r a l i g n m e n t i s by the top of t h e
c h a r a c t e r s .
The p r i n t e d forms of t h e c h a r a c t e r s , g i v e n i n t h e t a b l e s i n
Chapter 2 , are not u s u a l l y u s e d i n m a n u s c r i p t . The c o r r e s p o n d i n g
c u r s i v e forms of the c h a r a c t e r s , u s e d i n w r i t i n g , are g i v e n be low the
1 . See S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n , I n t r o d u c t i o n . N
178 B E N G A L I S E C T I O N
^ i
u \ 5
> V • & i
v5 m
m
p r i n t e d f o r m s , w i t h n o t e s on c a l l i g r a p h y when n e c e s s a r y . The examples
g i v e n "below i l l u s t r a t e t h e g e n e r a l order of s t r o k e s i n w r i t i n g t h e
c h a r a c t e r s , some t y p i c a l f o r m s , and t h e s m a l l "but important d i f f e r -
e n c e s t o he n o t e d b e t w e e n c h a r a c t e r s which have some s i m i l a r i t y o f
form.
C H A P T E R 2
CHARACTERS OP THE SYLLABARY
The Benga l i c h a r a c t e r s a r e d e s c r i b e d i n t l j i s c h a p t e r under the
same headings as t b e Devanagari c h a r a c t e r s i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n :
Consonant C h a r a c t e r s , Vowel C h a r a c t e r s and S i g n s , and M o d i f i e r s . * •
1. Consonant C h a r a c t e r s .
The consonant c h a r a c t e r s a r e a r r a n g e d i n t h r e e g r o u p s : v o r g i i y ©
(borgiyo) c h a r a c t e r s , ©ntssth© ( o n t o s t h o ) c h a r a c t e r s , and uusm©(uj*j6)
c h a r a c t e r s . In the form i n w h i c h t h e y are g i v e n i n the s y l l a b a r y ,
they are r e a l i s e d as s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g of an i n i t i a l consonant
fo l l owed by the f i r s t vowel o f t h e vowe l s e r i e s , r e p r e s e n t e d i n t h e
roman t a b l e as © . The c h a r a c t e r s a r e d e s c r i b e d as '©kar' ( o k a r ) ,
that i s , ' end ing i n © ' . Each c h a r a c t e r i s r e f e r r e d t o as the s y l l a b l e
which i t r e p r e s e n t s , w i t h t h e a d d i t i o n o f t h e p a r t i c l e ' - k a r ' ; f o r
example, k©-kar, t © - k a r , p©-kar . When a c h a r a c t e r i s t o be r e a l i s e d
without the inherent v o w e l , t h a t i s , a s t h e consonant e l ement of t h e
s y l l a b l e o n l y , a s h o r t d i a g o n a l s t r o k e i s w r i t t e n a t the f o o t of the
c h a r a c t e r . This mark i s c a l l e d 'h©s©nt©' ( h o / o n t o ) , and c h a r a c t e r s
w r i t t e n w i t h t h i s mark are r e f e r r e d t o t h u s : ^5 i s 'k©-e hos sn t©'
(ko-e h o / o n t o ) ^ , 9^ i s 'g©-e h©s©nt© ! ( g o - e h o / o n t o ) , and so on. In
reading words , ©kar consonant c h a r a c t e r s are r e a l i s e d i n v a r i o u s
1. Compare S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n , Chapter 2 . 2 . ' ending i n a c o n s o n a n t ' . Cf. S a n s k r i t C h . 2 . 1 . v irameh and h©l©nt©. 3 . 'hsssnt© i n k©' . See a l s o b e l o w , under i .
180 BENGALI S E C T I O N
c o n t e x t s w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , h u t the h o s o n t o i s no t u s u a l l y w r i t t e n w i t h
such c h a r a c t e r s i n modern B e n g a l i , as i t i s assumed t h a t the r e a d e r
can r e c o g n i s e from a knowledge of the spoken language which c h a r a c t e r s
are t o be r e a l i s e d i n t h i s way. In some v e r b a l forms , however , t h e
hosonto i s o f t e n w r i t t e n w i t h c h a r a c t e r s t h a t are r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o -
v o w e l , and i t i s u s e d i n w r i t i n g S a n s k r i t t e x t s i n B e n g a l i s c r i p t .
The absence of t h e h o s o n t o i n a consonant c h a r a c t e r c a n n o t , how-
e v e r , be t a k e n t o i n d i c a t e t h a t t h e c h a r a c t e r i s t o be r e a l i s e d w i t h
the i n h e r e n t v o w e l . A l though the w r i t i n g sys tem of B e n g a l i has much i n
common w i t h the S a n s k r i t w r i t i n g s y s t e m , owing t o i t s o r i g i n , t h e u s e
of a sys t em so c l o s e l y r e l a t e d t o the S a n s k r i t s y s t e m f o r w r i t i n g a
modern spoken l a n g u a g e makes n e c e s s a r y a number o f c o n v e n t i o n s b o t h of
s p e l l i n g and of r e a l i s i n g the c h a r a c t e r s i n r e a d i n g . Some of t h e s e
c o n v e n t i o n s c o n c e r n t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of okar consonan t c h a r a c t e r s . The
B e n g a l i consonan t c h a r a c t e r s , as t h e y are g i v e n i n t h e s y l l a b a r y , are
r e a l i s e d , as d e s c r i b e d a b o v e , i n t h e same way as t h e S a n s k r i t c h a r a c t -
e r s . When they o c c u r i n words , however , they are r e a l i s e d i n v a r i o u s
ways : as c o n s o n a n t s w i t h the i n h e r e n t v o w e l , as c o n s o n a n t s w i t h z e r o -
v o w e l , or as c o n s o n a n t s w i t h a g l i d e - v o w e l . F u r t h e r , t h e i n h e r e n t
v o w e l , r e p r e s e n t e d i n t h e s y s t e m a t i c roman n o t a t i o n by o , i s r e a l i s -
ed i n some c o n t e x t s a s ( o ) and i n o t h e r s as ( o ) . Th i s v a r y i n g r e a l i s -
a t i o n of okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s depends upon c e r t a i n f a c t o r s o f
which a g e n e r a l i n d i c a t i o n i s g i v e n i n t h e n o t e s f o l l o w i n g the f i r s t
t a b l e of c o n s o n a n t characters -^ and i n s p e c i a l n o t e s i n the d i s c u s s i o n
1 . These v e r b a l forms a r e d i s c u s s e d b e l o w , under i i . 2 . Ru le s r e c o g n i s e d by t h e U n i v e r s i t y of C a l c u t t a c o n c e r n i n g t h e w r i t -
i n g of the h o s o n t o are g i v e n i n t h e B e n g a l i d i c t i o n a r y 1 4*1 t
( c o l o n t i k a ) , a p p e n d i x , page 3 8 , s u b - s e c t i o n 1+. 3 . See b e l o w , under i . , R e a l i s a t i o n of okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 181
of vowel c h a r a c t e r s and vowel s i g n s ! . k u t i n r e a d i n g a B e n g a l i t e x t
the r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s i n many words can be de termined
only by a knowledge of the spoken l a n g u a g e .
i . Characters of the v o r g i i y © group (
This group c o n s i s t s o f t w e n t y f i v e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t -
ing s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g of an i n i t i a l p l o s i v e consonant f o l l o w e d by
the i n h e r e n t vowel . These c h a r a c t e r s f a l l i n t o f i v e c l a s s e s ,
vorg©3, accord ing t o the f i v e p o s i t i o n s o f a r t i c u l a t i o n . The t a b l e
of these f i v e c l a s s e s may be compared w i t h t h e S a n s k r i t t a b l e of
vorgi iy© consonant c h a r a c t e r s .
Jko-vorg©^
5 -c©-v©rg©
I - * f t©-v©rg©
t©-v©rg©
* f - M p©-v©rg©
1 k© kh© g© gh©
c© ch© 3"9 jh© -ji©
ft i u th© a;© <th© - n 9
*r t© th© d© dh© n©
*r \» P© ph© b© bh© m©
1 . See be low, under 2 , i i . 2 . ( b o r g i y o ) . C f . S a n s k r i t , Ch.2 . l . i . 3 . ( b o r g o ) . C f . S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , l . i . U. ( k o - b o r g o , e t c . ) .
182 BENGALI S E C T I O N
k o - v o r g o :
c e - v o r g e :
t o - v o r g o :
t a - v o r g o :
p o - v e r g o :
<5
b
6
C a l l i g r a p h y o f c h a r a c t e r s :
ko % < ^ c h o
j h e ~ | ^ Xho f
dho < <f IVf o r < ^ §
C a l l i g r a p h y o f w o r d s :
•f«7 *«fv5 T=f 3 V
6
a*
•r
So \S p e V
C5§
Charac ter s w r i t t e n w i t h t h e h o s o n t o : , k - , v§ » JQ— , Tjf , m- .
The h o s o n t o i s no t w r i t t e n w i t h \*) , t o . The c o n s o n a n t t - w i t h o u t
a f o l l o w i n g v o w e l i s r e p r e s e n t e d as ^ . This c h a r a c t e r i s r e f e r r e d
t o as ' fCS » kh©r]c}a teCkhoijcjo t o ) . 2
1 . See n o t e s on c a l l i g r a p h y , C h . l . 2 . ( k h o ^ o t o ) , 'broken t o '
The c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n t h i s t a b l e are t h o s e used, i n p r i n t i n g .
The c o r r e s p o n d i n g c u r s i v e f o r m s , u s e d i n h a n d w r i t i n g , ar e g i v e n be low.
The c u r s i v e forms d i f f e r from the p r i n t e d forms m a i n l y i n an a d a p t a t -
i o n of the o r d er and d i r e c t i o n of s t r o k e s t h a t makes i t p o s s i b l e t o
j o i n each c h a r a c t e r t o t h e f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r by means of a s m a l l
h e a d - s t r o k e l . The o r d e r of s t r o k e s i s g i v e n w i t h any c h a r a c t e r i n
which t h i s order i s n o t e v i d e n t from the form of t h e c h a r a c t e r i t s e l f .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 183
The c h a r a c t e r $ • rja , d o e s n o t occur i n i t i a l l y , but i t occurs
m e d i a l l y and f i n a l l y i n a few B e n g a l i words and i s o f t e n w r i t t e n w i t h
the hosonto .
The c h a r a c t e r , jia , o c c u r s o n l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , i n
combination w i t h o t h e r c h a r a c t e r s ^ .
The c h a r a c t e r «"| , ne , i s r e a l i s e d as ( n o ) , e x c e p t when i t i s 2
combined w i t h c h a r a c t e r s of t h e t 8 _ V 8 r g 9 • I t o c c u r s o n l y i n S a n s k r i t
loanwords , and never i n i t i a l l y .
The c h a r a c t e r 3J» , pho , i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d as a b i - l a b i a l
f r i c a t i v e . When s t r e s s e d , i t i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d a s a p l o s i v e .
The c h a r a c t e r \5 , bho , i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d as a p l o s i v e when
i n i t i a l , but as a b i - l a b i a l f r i c a t i v e when m e d i a l or f i n a l .
The two c h a r a c t e r s \5" , cLo and Jy , djio occur o n l y i n i t i a l l y .
Modified forms of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r m e d i a l l y and f i n a l l y . These
cjo-e Juunyo po- . They are u s u a l l y p l a c e d a t the end of the vornomala,
R e a l i s a t i o n of the i n h e r e n t v o w e l i n akar consonant c h a r a c t e r s .
The r e a l i s a t i o n of okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s i n v a r i o u s w a y s ,
according to the p o s i t i o n of t h e c h a r a c t e r i n a word, and i n s p e c i a l
phonet i c c o n t e x t s , f o l l o w s c e r t a i n g e n e r a l r u l e s . Some of t h e s e c o n -
t e x t s can be d e f i n e d o n l y by a d e t a i l e d p h o n e t i c s t u d y of the spoken
language , and numerous e x c e p t i o n s o c c u r . The r u l e s s t a t e d below w i l l ,
however, g i v e some g e n e r a l g u i d a n c e f o r r e a d i n g .
1. See Ch.3,3*Class 2 . i i . b . 2 . i b i d . , C l a s s 2 . i i . a . 3. (dja-e /unno p o ) , ' i n 40 a d o t , p a ' , i . e . the pa w r i t t e n by
adding a dot t o 40 . U. F u r t h e r n o t e s on the r e a l i s a t i o n of okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s i n s p e c i a l c o n t e x t s are g i v e n b e l o w , under i i i . , and under 2 . i i .
be ing regarded as s e p a r a t e c h a r a c t e r s from v5 and ]jf .
k
184 BENGALI S E C T I O N
1 . This n o t e r e f e r s t o words c o n s i s t i n g of ©kar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s o n l y ; f u r t h e r n o t e s a re g i v e n b e l o w , under 2 . i i . , f o r t h e r e a l i s a t -i o n of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s i n words i n which vowel s i g n s o c c u r .
2 . See S . K . C h a t t e r j i , v3t^t5J^K "^hftcTf < T 5 t ^ r T • bhasapreka/© banga la vyaksrsn© , p p . 3 2 f f . ; pub. C a l c u t t a U n i v e r s i t y , 1939-
3 . For t h e method u s e d i n t h e p h o n e t i c t r a n s c r i p t i o n of m e d i a l and f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s i n words t o which t h e s e n o t e s r e f e r , s e e a b o v e , C h . l . , and b e l o w , a f t e r n o t e c .
1+. For t h e r e a l i s a t i o n o f ©kar c h a r a c t e r s i n compound w o r d s , s e e n o t e c . be low .
5 . F i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l are n o t u s u a l l y w r i t t e n w i t h the h e s s n t © . T h i s mark i s u s e d i n n o t e s a. and b . t o s i m p l i f y the t r a n s c r i p t i o n o f examples o c c u r r i n g b e f o r e t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s i s d i s c u s s e d .
a. I n i t i a l akar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s .
An i n i t i a l akar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h t h e
vowel ( o ) , as i n s f^ , g o c ( g o c ) , ^j^f , kob(kob) , u n l e s s t h e
c h a r a c t e r i s f o l l o w e d hy a f i n a l n a s a l consonant c h a r a c t e r , when
the i n i t i a l okar c h a r a c t e r i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h t h e vowel ( o ) ,
as i n \ g p ^ , jan( j o n ) .
b . Medial akar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s . 1
i . Medial akar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s i n words of t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s ,
.of which the f i n a l i s a k a r , a re u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h t h e vowel
( o ) , as i n " STpSl , kadam(kodom) , ^ f l ^ > n a g a d ( n o g o d ) 2 .
i i . Medial okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s as the s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r of a
f o u r c h a r a c t e r word , are o f t e n r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h
an o - g l i d e , as i n ^^SXJ^? , c©k©m©k©(cok'mok)3. Two c o n s e c u t i v e
okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s are n o t u s u a l l y b o t h r e a l i s e d w i t h the
vowel ( o ) . . .
c . P i n a l akar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s .
i . P i n a l okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s are r e a l i s e d i n many words w i t h
z e r o - v o w e l , a s i n " x* , c©t©(co{) , , k©b©(kob) .5
i i . P i n a l ©kar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s a re r e a l i s e d i n some words
w i t h t h e vowel ( o ) . T h i s r e a l i s a t i o n o c c u r s i n words of c e r t a i n
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 185
grammatical c a t e g o r i e s , summarised later-*-; and i n c e r t a i n o t h e r
words , u s u a l l y words of two c h a r a c t e r s , which can be r e c o g n i s e d
only by a knowledge o f spoken B e n g a l i , e . g . ^ S " \ 5 , k o t e ( k o t o ) .
\S"5[ , teme( tomo) . When s u c h words o c c u r as t h e f i r s t p a r t of a
compound word, the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r , though m e d i a l i n the compound
word, i s s t i l l r e a l i s e d i n t h i s w a y . 2
The word TF^§ , mote , i s r e a l i s e d i n two w a y s , t h e same
w r i t t e n form r e p r e s e n t i n g two words o f d i f f e r e n t meaning i n the
spoken l a n g u a g e : ^ r \ 5 > ( m o t ) , ' i d e a ' , ' o p i n i o n 1 , or ' p u r p o s e ' ,
and TT\5 , ( m o t o ) , ' s i m i l a r ' , ' l i k e * .
As the r e a l i s a t i o n o f okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s w i t h the vowe l s
(o) and (o) v a r i e s no t o n l y i n t h e c o n t e x t s d e s c r i b e d a b o v e , but a l s o
i n some o ther c o n t e x t s which a r e d e s c r i b e d l a t e r 3 , and some which c a n -
not be d e f i n e d by any g e n e r a l s t a t e m e n t , t h e f o l l o w i n g sys tem i s u s e d
i n the phone t i c t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s i n t h i s work:
a) I n i t i a l okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s are t r a n s c r i b e d w i t h (o) or
w i t h ( o ) , a c c o r d i n g t o n o t e a . above .
b) Medial akar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d as a s y l l a b l e w i t h
the inherent vowel are t r a n s c r i b e d w i t h (o ) or w i t h (.0) ,
accord ing t o n o t e b . a b o v e ; t h o s e r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l or
w i t h an e - g l i d e are t r a n s c r i b e d t h u s : ( k ' ) , ( p ' ) .
c) P i n a l okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l are
t r a n s c r i b e d as f i n a l c o n s o n a n t s ; t h o s e which are r e a l i s e d w i t h
the vowel (0) are t r a n s c r i b e d w i t h ( o ) , a c c o r d i n g t o n o t e c.^"
1 . See be low, under i i i . 2 . For e x a m p l e s of such compound words , s ee b e l o w , under i i . Read ing e x a m p l e s .
3 . Further n o t e s on the r e a l i s a t i o n o f akar consonant c h a r a c t e r s are g iven b e l o w , under i i i . and under 2 . i i . Vowel S i g n s .
1+. V a r i a t i o n s from t h e s e g e n e r a l r u l e s may occur i n c e r t a i n words , but such v a r i a t i o n s are o u t s i d e t h e s c o p e of t h i s work.
186 BENGALI S E C T I O N
Reading examples-*-
1 . One c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , r e a l i s e d as c o n s o n a n t s w i t h t h e vowel ( o ) .
^ ^ 1 * t Tf U T> *t *t
2 . Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s .
1 . F i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l :
•n? ^ tjfe ts^ i i . F i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h ( o ) : .
^ 5 T 3 ^ " v 5 S p l rfl> s f v s vSfvJ " ^ T T s T 5 " v 3
i i i . I n i t i a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h (o),> f i n a l w i t h z e r o - v o w e l :
3 . Three c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; r e a l i s e d as i n n o t e b . i . and c . i .
T F 1 > 3 5 ^ T 5 ? p T S f ^ T ^ * T & 3 ?
2+. Four c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; r e a l i s e d as i n n o t e b . i i . and c . i .
F&'fTj ^*sj> ?FF^E *tT>*tT>
5 f \ 5 S i \ 5 W&^T W W
i i . C h a r a c t e r s o f t h e on tos th© group( ^ ) 2
There are f o u r c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s group , a s s o c i a t e d w i t h f o u r of
the v©rg©, as shown i n t h e roman s y l l a b a r y ^ . They may b e compared w i t h
the Devanagari c h a r a c t e r s o f t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g group**.
y© r©
Curs ive forms: ^
Words: £pf Zf^Jf
1© v©
?r «f *r
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 2 6 . 2 . ( o n t o s t h o ) . 3 . See roman t a b l e , Chapter 1 . U. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , l . i i .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 187
The c h a r a c t e r TJ , t r a n s c r i b e d i n t h e roman n o t a t i o n as yo ,
i s r e a l i s e d as ( j o ) . I t c o r r e s p o n d s , a s the f i r s t c h a r a c t e r i n t h i s
group, t o the o n t e s t h o c h a r a c t e r Z[ , y© , i n t h e S a n s k r i t s y l l a b a r y .
I t i s r e f e r r e d t o as ' o n t o s t h o y o ' ( o n t o s t h o j o ) , t o d i s t i n g u i s h i t
from v5f , jo , r e f e r r e d t o as ' v o r g i i y © j©'(bo .rg iyo j o ) . The s e m i -
vowel correspond ing t o t h e S a n s k r i t c h a r a c t e r If i s r e p r e s e n t e d i n
Bengal i by a m o d i f i e d form o f t h i s c h a r a c t e r . |J , r e f e r r e d t o a s
'ontss th© y o ' ( o n t o s t h o o ) . T h i s c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d i n v a r i o u s ways
according to i t s p o s i t i o n and p h o n e t i c c o n t e x t , and i s d i s c u s s e d l a t e r
i n a s p e c i a l n o t e ^ .
The c h a r a c t e r ^ , t r a n s c r i b e d i n the roman n o t a t i o n as vo , i s
r e a l i s e d as ( b o ) . I t c o r r e s p o n d s , a s t h e f o u r t h c h a r a c t e r i n t h i s
group, t o the o n t o s t h o c h a r a c t e r , vo , i n t h e S a n s k r i t s y l l a b a r y .
I t i s r e f e r r e d t o i n t h i s work a s ' o n t o s t h o v o ' ( o n t o s t h o bo) i n order
to d i s t i n g u i s h i t , i n d i s c u s s i o n , from t h e t h i r d c h a r a c t e r i n the
p o - v e r g o , ' v o r g i i y © b © ' ( b o r g i y o b o ) . A l though v o r g i i y © b© and
antssth© v© are the same i n form and i n r e a l i s a t i o n , the c h a r a c t e r
i s inc luded i n the s y l l a b a r y i n b o t h t h e vorgiiy'© and the ©ntssth©
groups , and S a n s k r i t l oanwords w h i c h a r e w r i t t e n i n the Devanagari
s c r i p t w i t h i n i t i a l <| , v© , a r e p l a c e d i n B e n g a l i d i c t i o n a r i e s i n
a s eparate s e c t i o n f o l l o w i n g words w i t h i n i t i a l , 1© . A know-
ledge of S a n s k r i t loanwords i s n e e d e d i n order t o r e c o g n i s e which
words are t o be found among words b e g i n n i n g w i t h v o r g i i j f e b© and which
among t h o s e b e g i n n i n g w i t h ©nt©sth© v© . In t h e more modern B e n g a l i
d i c t i o n a r i e s the t endency i s t o p l a c e a l l words b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h i s
charac ter i n one s e c t i o n , a f t e r words b e g i n n i n g w i t h , ph© .
1 . See note on ©nt©sth© y© , unde r 2 . i i . b e l o w .
188 BENGALI S E C T I O N
s a sa and ha
a n t a s t h a va i s , h o w e v e r , r e c o g n i s e d as d i f f e r e n t from v a r g i i y a ha
when i t i s combined w i t h a n o t h e r c h a r a c t e r . 1
Reading e x a m p l e s 2
1 . Of the o n t o s t h a c h a r a c t e r s , o n l y o c c u r s as a word.
2 . Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s .
i . P i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l :
wm *pr ^ TO.vr*\
i i . P i n a l c h a r a c t e r r e a l i s e d w i t h ( o ) :
3 . Three c h a r a c t e r w o r d s . 3
<jt?«?t sr^rif *t*R
i|. Pour c h a r a c t e r w o r d s . ^
^ ^ 3 " ^ ^F^J^S?r 3 ^ 1 ^
i i i . C h a r a c t e r s o f t h e uusma group( ^"SJ ) 5
This group of c h a r a c t e r s i n c l u d e s t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d as
f r i c a t i v e c o n s o n a n t s w i t h t h e vowel ( o ) , and one c h a r a c t e r r e a l i s e d
as an a s p i r a t e w i t h t h e vowel ( o ) . The c h a r a c t e r s ar e a s s o c i a t e d w i t h c
four of t h e v a r g a , a s shown i n the roman s y l l a b a r y . 0 They may be com-
pared w i t h the Devanagar i c h a r a c t e r s o f t h e same g r o u p . ^
Jo
Curs ive forms : *Wf
Words: 1!ST^f
1 . See C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s 3 . i i . 2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 2 6 . 3 . See a b o v e , n o t e s b . i . and c . i . U. See a b o v e , n o t e s b . i i . and
c . i . and i i . ( compounds) . 5 . ( u j / o ) . 6 . See C h . l . 7 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 1 . i i i .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 189
The t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s "*f , ^ and ^ ar e r e a l i s e d , a s ( j o ) , e x -
cept when t h e y are combined i n a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r w i t h c e r t a i n o t h e r
c h a r a c t e r s l . They are d e s c r i b e d , f o r i n s t a n c e , i n s p e l l i n g , a s
' t a l o v y o J"e'(talobbo J o ) , ' m u u r d h a n y a s o ' (murdhonno Jo) and 'dontya s o 1
(donto J o ) . TFJ occurs o n l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s .
The c h a r a c t e r , ho , i s t h e l a s t c h a r a c t e r of t h e B e n g a l i
s y l l a b a r y . Two o ther c h a r a c t e r s , ^ » , k s o and ^ , jjia , each r e -
p r e s e n t i n g s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g o f two c o n s o n a n t s f o l l o w e d by the
vowel ( o ) , are o f t e n p l a c e d a f t e r t h e consonant c h a r a c t e r s i n the
okseromala. They do n o t , however , p r o p e r l y b e l o n g to the s y l l a b a r y ,
and i n t h i s work t h e y are d i s c u s s e d l a t e r , i n the a p p r o p r i a t e c l a s s e s
of conjunct c h a r a c t e r s 2 .
Reading examples-^
1 . Of the uusma c h a r a c t e r s o n l y "*f o c c u r s as a word.
2 . Two c h a r a c t e r words .
i . P i n a l c h a r a c t e r r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l ;
* r t?-*t *r*r i i . P i n a l c h a r a c t e r r e a l i s e d w i t h ( o ) :
*TV5 "SR "$\5 "SIT
3 . Three c h a r a c t e r words**
^ \ 5 F ^H** ^ f * P
If. Pour c h a r a c t e r words"^
i i . *r^F3 " S R v s ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^FT^Sp ^ T ? ^ ?
1 . See C h . 3 . 3 . C l . U . i . a . 2 . i b i d . C 1 . 2 . i i . b . and C l . U . i . b . 3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 2 6 . k - R e a l i s e d a s i n n o t e s b . i . and
c . i . above. 5 . Words i n l i n e i . r e a l i s e d as i n n o t e s b . i i . and c . i . ; words i n l i n e i i . r e a l i s e d a s n o t e c . i i . (compounds) .
190 BENGALI S E C T I O N
R e a l i s a t i o n of okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s i n v e r b a l f o r m s .
The r e a l i s a t i o n o f m e d i a l and f i n a l akar consonant c h a r a c t e r s i n
c e r t a i n grammat ical c a t e g o r i e s i s made a c c o r d i n g t o t h e g e n e r a l r u l e s
g i v e n b e l o w . No comprehens iv e s t a t e m e n t can be made which c o v e r s a l l
c a t e g o r i e s , but t h e s e r u l e s g i v e some g u i d a n c e i n r e a d i n g from t h e
s c r i p t . The o n l y c o m p l e te g u i d e i s a knowledge of the spoken l a n g u a g e ,
a. Verbal b a s e s e n d i n g i n an ©kar consonant c h a r a c t e r .
i . Verbal b a s e s w i t h o u t s u f f i x e s .
The f i n a l ©kar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r of a v e r b a l b a s e i s r e a l -
i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l ; e . g .
^7?T 35-3 F^T ?RS
b©l©(bol ) k©r©(kor) c © l © ( c o l ) baka(bok)
The form of t h e verb d e s c r i b e d g r a m m a t i c a l l y a s t h e ' s e c o n d
p e r s o n s i n g u l a r o f t h e p r e s e n t i m p e r a t i v e , i n f e r i o r form' i s
w r i t t e n i n the same way as the b a s e , and r e a l i s e d i n t h e same
way. The f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of t h i s form of the verb i s o f t e n w r i t -
t e n w i t h the h a s a n t a ; e . g .
b a l a or b a l ( b o l ) kara or k e r ( k o r ) beka or bak(bok)
i i . Verbal b a s e s w i t h s u f f i x e s .
When a s u f f i x b e g i n n i n g w i t h , or c o n s i s t i n g o f , a consonant
c h a r a c t e r i s added t o a v e r b a l b a s e , the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of t h e
b a s e i s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l or w i t h an a - g l i d e . Examples of
t h i s r e a l i s a t i o n a r e g i v e n b e l o w , under n o t e b .
The grammat ica l forms d e s c r i b e d as the 'Second p e r s o n of the
s i m p l e p r e s e n t t e n s e ' and the ' s e c o n d p e r s o n o f t h e p r e s e n t im-
p e r a t i v e ' are w r i t t e n i n the same way as t h e v e r b a l b a s e ; but
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 1 9 1
are d i s t i n g u i s h e d from t h e "base i n r e a d i n g a l o u d hy the r e a l i s -
a t i o n of the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r w i t h t h e vowel ( o ) . Examples:
, b a l a ( b o l o ) , ^SjtJ , k a r a ( k o r o ) , ^ |"^ , p o r o ( p o r o )
This r e a l i s a t i o n o c c u r s w i t h s i m i l a r grammat ical forms o f a l l v e r b s
which have o n l y okar c h a r a c t e r s i n t h e b a s e . In the ' s e c o n d p e r s o n '
of the ' f u t u r e i m p e r a t i v e ' i n w h i c h t h e f i r s t okar c h a r a c t e r i s
r e a l i s e d w i t h ( o ) , t h e f i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s w r i t t e n w i t h the vowel
s i g n of o'L. In the verb , b o s s , the i n i t i a l c h a r a c t e r i n
both grammatical forms i s r e a l i s e d w i t h ( o ) ; e . g . < 3?[ , ( b o j o ) .
The r e a l i s a t i o n of the i n i t i a l akar c h a r a c t e r of a v e r b a l base
wi th the vowel ( o ) i s somet imes shown by w r i t i n g the mark * a f t e r
the c h a r a c t e r , as i n <35$J » kare (kor io ) , ^CS^T » k a r o ( k o r o ) ! .
b . Verbal forms w i t h s u f f i x e s c o n s i s t i n g o f akar consonant c h a r a c t e r s .
The v e r b a l s u f f i x e s ^ 5 , t a ( t o ) , , b a ( b o ) and c«T ,
l a ( l o ) are added to v e r b a l b a s e s t o form v a r i o u s ' t e n s e s ' 2 , In
these v e r b a l forms the f i n a l akar c h a r a c t e r o f the base i s r e a l i s -
ed as d e s c r i b e d i n n o t e a . i . , and i f t h e b a s e c o n s i s t s o f two akar
consonant c h a r a c t e r s t h e i n i t i a l c h a r a c t e r a l s o i s r e a l i s e d w i t h
the vowel ( o ) . Examples:
^ ^ \ 5 35 5*1
k o r o - b o ( k o r ' b o ) k a r a - t a ( k o r ' t o ) 3 k a r a - l a ( k o r ' l o ) ^
1 . See be low, 2 . i i , n o t e a . i i . 2 . S u f f i x e s of the t e n s e s d e s c r i b e d as ' fu ture s i m p l e ' ( b o ) , ' p a s t h a b i t u a l ' ( t o ) and ' p a s t i n d e f i n i t e ' ( l o ) .
3 . In c o l l o q u i a l B e n g a l i the s e q u e n c e T^f^T , - r l - , a r i s i n g from the a d d i t i o n of a s u f f i x b e g i n n i n g w i t h e?| N , or the sequence 7 t K 5 * - r t -a r i s i n g from the a d d i t i o n of a s u f f i x b e g i n n i n g w i t h \ 5 , t o a v e r b -a l base ending i n ^ , are r e a l i s e d r e s p e c t i v e l y as ( - 1 1 - ) and ( - t t - ) , as i n the v e r b a l forms ^S^cTf , ( k o l l o ) and ?|5j5"t5 , ( k o t t o ) . This r e a l i s a t i o n would be made i n r e a d i n g from a B e n g a l i t e x t w r i t t e n i n the c o l l o q u i a l s t y l e . See f u r t h e r n o t e s on the r e a l i s a t i o n of verbal forms under 2 . i i , and l a t e r i n C h . 3 » 3 . C l . l .
192 BENGALI S E C T I O N
i . Vowel C h a r a c t e r s .
a i
r2 e r2 Curs ive forms:
2 . Vowel C h a r a c t e r s and Vowel S i g n s .
Vowel c h a r a c t e r s a r e w r i t t e n i n B e n g a l i , as i n S a n s k r i t , t o
r e p r e s e n t s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g o f a vowel o n l y , and vowel s i g n s are
added t o consonant c h a r a c t e r s t o r e p r e s e n t s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g of an
i n i t i a l consonant f o l l o w e d by one o f the vowe l s i n t h e s e r i e s g i v e n
be low . These c h a r a c t e r s may be compared w i t h the Devanagar i vowel
c h a r a c t e r s and vowel s i g n s , g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
i i u - uu
5 3 <J ey o ' av
^ a S v3 &
^ ^ %*T «W v3Si The s u p e r s c r i b e d s t r o k e s i n t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s are w r i t t e n l a s t , s t a r t -
i n g from t h e matra and w r i t i n g upwards.
The c h a r a c t e r s "^f , a , and 5 j j , a , are r e f e r r e d t o as ^|<^ \5f ?
s v a r i i a ( J o r i o) and ^5f| , s v a r i i a ( . for i a)->. The o t h e r vowel
c h a r a c t e r s are r e f e r r e d t o as the vowel which each r e p r e s e n t s .
The c h a r a c t e r s ^ and v§ a re d e s c r i b e d as , hrasva**,
' s h o r t ' , and the c h a r a c t e r s ^ and 5 are d e s c r i b e d as y J ,
d i i r g h a ^ , ' l o n g ' . The ' s h o r t ' and t h e ' l o n g ' v o w e l s ar e r e a l i s e d i n
r e a d i n g w i t h v e r y l i t t l e d i s t i n c t i o n of q u a l i t y , but c e r t a i n words
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 2 . i . and i i . 2 . ' s y l l a b i c r ' ; s e e C h . l . V o w e l s . 3 . s v o r a , ' v o w e l ' ; s v a r i i a , ' v o w e l - c h a r a c t e r a ' . For t h e r e a l i s a t -
i o n of t h e f i r s t vowe l c h a r a c t e r i n c e r t a i n c o n t e x t s , s e e s p e c i a l n o t e s under i i . b e l o w . U. ( h r o j f o ) . 5 . ( d i r g h o ) .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 193
are always w r i t t e n w i t h the ' s h o r t 1 v o w e l s and o t h e r s always w i t h the
' l o n g ' v o w e l s . Examples of p a i r s o f words of wh ich t h e meaning i s
d i s t i n g u i s h e d hy t h e w r i t i n g o f t h e ' s h o r t ' or t h e ' l o n g ' v o w e l , and
i n which a c o r r e s p o n d i n g d i s t i n c t i o n must he made i n r e a d i n g , are
g iven l a t e r . 1
The vowel , s y l l a h i c r , o c c u r s o n l y i n some S a n s k r i t l o a n -
words. The vowel c h a r a c t e r s , s y l l a h i c r r , <fo , s y l l a h i c 1 , and
^ , s y l l a h i c 11 , are u s e d i n p r i n t i n g S a n s k r i t t e x t s i n B e n g a l i
s c r i p t . The c h a r a c t e r I s r e a l i s e d a s ( r i ) .
The c h a r a c t e r 4 » e , i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d a s ( e ) , hut v a r i e s
in c e r t a i n c o n t e x t s which are d e s c r i b e d b e l o w , under Vowel S i g n s .
The c h a r a c t e r tip , ©y , i s r e a l i s e d a s t h e d iphthong ( o i ) , and
the c h a r a c t e r \ ^ , ©v , i s r e a l i s e d a s the d i p h t h o ng ( o u ) .
Reading examples2
1 , Vowel c h a r a c t e r s o n l y
W | ^ ^ 4 i ? \3 $ 2. Vowel c h a r a c t e r s and ©kar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s
i . P i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d wi th , z e r o - v o w e l :
^ r r & ^ § ^ m i ^ \s?i
^ 1 > * T ^SH ^TpF
V 3 v 5 ^ f v § ? T 5 N § ^ < 1
i i . P i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h ( o ) :
^"*T VSv5 V3^T v^-q ^ T5 ^ s f
\3^f
1 . See be low, under i i . Vowel S i g n s , R e a d i n g examples . 2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s , s e e p . 2 2 7 .
o
194 BENGALI S E C T I O N
1 . For examples o f s p e l l i n g w o r d s , s e e h e l o w , end of C h . 3 .
i i . Vowel S i g n s .
Vowel s i g n s , c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e vowel c h a r a c t e r s , are g i v e n
he low added t o t h e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r . As t h e vowel © i s t h e
i n h e r e n t vowel of e a c h of t h e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s i n t h e form i n
which t h e y are g i v e n i n the s y l l a h a r y , t h e r e i s no vowel s i g n c o r r e s -
ponding t o t h e vowe l c h a r a c t e r \5f .
ka k i k i i ku kuu kr ke koy ko k©v
S p e c i a l forms of some o f t h e c h a r a c t e r s w i t h vowel s i g n s :
« *P ?» • » ^ ^ gu r u ruii J*u hii hr
The vowel s i g n s c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e c h a r a c t e r s ^ , and ^ ,
u s e d i n w r i t i n g S a n s k r i t , added t o ^ , are <^ , ^ and < »> .
Vowel s i g n s which a re p l a c e d on t h e l e f t s i d e of t h e c o n s o n a nt
c h a r a c t e r w i t h which t h e y are t o he r e a l i s e d are w r i t t e n h e f o r e the
consonant c h a r a c t e r ; o t h e r s i g n s are added a f t e r the c o n s o n a n t
c h a r a c t e r has heen w r i t t e n . The order of w r i t i n g the s t r o k e s i n
c h a r a c t e r s w i t h vowel s i g n s i s i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e s e c u r s i v e f o r m s :
(5T T V *PnT gfl" C*C O f £ f C*fr
3T§r ejpf cWl~ ^trzfm ^rc-rcr ^nrw z m o s
C h a r a c t e r s w i t h vowel s i g n s are r e f e r r e d t o i n s p e l l i n g t h u s :
C* , ( k o - e ekar) , ' t h e s i g n of v£) i n ^5 '; ^ , ( g o - e h r o j / o u k a r ) .
The s i g n of s y l l a h i c r i s r e f e r r e d t o as ( r i k a r ) or ( r i p h o l a ) . l
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY i9S
Reading examples
\S^g *Nfa ^ r f C ^ t Tftvs ^ C F ^ 3 # f ^ t $?P
c rfSr f*ra ?jm tc r ^f*r ftf^ ^fl c^t^t c^rr^ #f%^t f^tft YWWf%r wrrf^*rr fSnF*rrfV
R e a l i s a t i o n of okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s , and c e r t a i n vowel
c h a r a c t e r s i n s p e c i a l c o n t e x t s .
In r e a d i n g B e n g a l i words from t h e s c r i p t , t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of
okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s i n words w h i c h have vowel c h a r a c t e r s or
vowel s i g n s p r e s e n t s c e r t a i n d i f f i c u l t i e s ; and t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of
some of the vowel c h a r a c t e r s and s i g n s v a r i e s i n s p e c i a l c o n t e x t s ,
such as the occurrence of c e r t a i n o t h e r v o w e l s i n f o l l o w i n g s y l l a b l e s .
The n o t e s g i v e n be low p r o v i d e some g e n e r a l g u i d a n ce i n r e a d i n g from
the s c r i p t , but a knowledge of B e n g a l i p r o n u n c i a t i o n i s n e c e s s a r y f o r
c o r r e c t r e a l i s a t i o n of s u c h w o r d s .
a. R e a l i s a t i o n of okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s . 2
i . When an okar c o n s o n a nt c h a r a c t e r o c c u r s a s the s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r
of a t h r e e c h a r a c t e r word p r e c e d i n g a f i n a l c h a r a c t e r w i t h a vowel
s i g n , i t i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an a - g l i d e ;
e. g. amora(am'ra) b a d a l e ( b o d ' l e )
•J;ukari( t u k ' r i ) mamala(mam'la)
j h a g a r a ( j h o g ' r a )
J"amane( Jam'ne)
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 2 7 . 2 . These n o t e s complete t h e d i s c u s s i o n of t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of akar
consonant c h a r a c t e r s ; s e e a b o v e , n o t e s g i v e n on p p . 1 8 3 and 190 .
BENGALI S E C T I O N
When t h e f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of such words i s o k a r , t h e m e d i a l
c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d a s d e s c r i b e d i n p r e v i o u s n o t e s . The
f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e t h i s r e a l i s a t i o n a f t e r an i n i t i a l
c h a r a c t e r w i t h a vowel s i g n :
vSl^S f^ \s *T QFtFf bhare.t ( b h a r o t ) p i t e l e ( p i t o l ) k e b o l a ( k e b o l )
When an okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r o c c u rs i n a word of f o u r or more
c h a r a c t e r s , i t i s r e a l i s e d w i t h o , w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an
o - g l i d e , a c c o r d i n g t o i t s p o s i t i o n i n r e l a t i o n t o c h a r a c t e r s w i t h
vowel s i g n s . The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e t h e v a r y i n g r e a l -
i s a t i o n of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s i n d i f f e r e n t c o n t e x t s :
kamobe/©(kom'be/ ) g o l e j o g e ( g o l 1 jog) maropi{o(mar 'pi-j;)
J"atokara( J o t ' k o r a ) same jodaro( Jomo j ' d a r )
i i . The r e a l i s a t i o n o f t h e f i n a l okar consonant c h a r a c t e r of v e r b -
a l bases has b e e n d e s c r i b e d a b o v e 1 . The f o l l o w i n g v e r b a l forms a re
f u r t h e r i l l u s t r a t i o n s o f t h i s r e a l i s a t i o n :
*rr?re w f s r e p a r e b e ( p a r ' b o ) J*unele( J u n ' l o ) aseteCaJ"'to)
The s u f f i x e s i n t h e s e forms may be w r i t t e n w i t h t h e o k a r ; e . g .
p a r e b o ( p a r ' b o ) J u n e l o ( J u n ' l o ) a s a t o ( a j ' t o )
S i m i l a r l y t h e forms i n which the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r o f t h e b a s e are
r e a l i s e d w i t h ( o ) may be d i s t i n g u i s h e d from t h e forms i n which
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 197
1 . A proper name. 2. ' i n c o m p a r a b l e ' .
the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l by w r i t i n g t h i s
c h a r a c t e r w i t h the okarj e . g .
koro(kor) k o r o ( k o r o ) k o r o ( k o r o ) k o r e ( k o r o ) k o r o ( k o r o)
maro(mar) maro(maro) maro(maro) l e k h o ( l e k h o ) l e k h o ( l e k h o )
i i i . When two words of d i f f e r e n t meaning are w r i t t e n i n t h e same
way and d i s t i n g u i s h e d o n l y by t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of the f i n a l okar
c h a r a c t e r of one of the words w i t h ( o ) , t h i s r e a l i s a t i o n i s o f t e n
i n d i c a t e d by w r i t i n g the o k a r , a s i n t h e s e p a i r s : <3*tc7f ( k a l ) ,
' t i m e ' , ^5"pf ( k a l o ) or ^f(j^ft ( k a l o ) , ' b l a c k ' ; \5fc*f ( b h a l ) , ' f o r e -
h e a d ' , \ \e?f ( b h a l o ) or \5tG*Tf ( b h a l o ) , ' g o o d ' .
b . The r e a l i s a t i o n of c e r t a i n v o w e l c h a r a c t e r s and s i g n s i s a f f e c t e d
by the occurrence of o t h e r v o w e l s i n f o l l o w i n g s y l l a b l e s .
i . The c h a r a c t e r n3J , or t h e i n h e r e n t vowel o f an akar consonant
c h a r a c t e r , i s r e a l i s e d as ( o ) when i t i s f o l l o w e d by one of the
c h a r a c t e r s , or c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n s , f o r i , i i , u or uu .
e . g . \5ff3 *pf|- ^3njc?I a t i ( o t i ) d h o n i i ( d h o n i ) a t u l a ( o t u l ) ! J"abu ja( Jobuj)
When the c h a r a c t e r " 3f r e p r e s e n t s t h e n e g a t i v e p r e f i x , however ,
the u s u a l r e a l i s a t i o n o f i t a s ( o ) i s n o t a f f e c t e d by the o c c u r -
rence of one of t h e s e v o w e l s i n t h e f o l l o w i n g s y l l a b l e ; e . g .
^3T^7J, a d h i i r a ( o d h i r ) , ^3f\JpT , a t u l a ( o t u l ) 2 .
i i i . The c h a r a c t e r S\ , or t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n , i n i n i t i a l
p o s i t i o n i s of t e n r e a l i s e d a s (ae) u n l e s s i t i s f o l l o w e d by a
198 BENGALI S E C T I O N
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s , s e e p . 2 2 7 .
c h a r a c t e r w i t h the v o w e l s i , i i , u or uu ; e . g .
h e l a ( h s 3 l a ) nek©Fa(neek'pa) em©n©(eemon) e m e n i ( e m ' n i )
ek©(eek) ek©ta(sekT \a) ek©-|;ii( ek' f i ) ek©-J;u( e k 1 -j;u)
The v e r h a l formOfC^fis r e a l i s e d i n two ways . When i t r e p r e s e n t s
the form d e s c r i b e d g r a m m a t i c a l l y as ' s i m p l e p r e s e n t , t h i r d p e r s o n '
i t i s r e a l i s e d as (dsskhe). When i t r e p r e s e n t s the form d e s c r i b e d
as ' p a s t p a r t i c i p l e ' , i t i s r e a l i s e d as ( d e k h e ) .
Reading e x a m p l e s , i l l u s t r a t i n g the n o t e s g i v e n a b o v e . 1
1 . i . F i n a l ©kar c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l f o - q p #f*t c f t ^ t c ^ r *jsrr*r ^ ^ f C ^ i i . F i n a l ©kar c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h ( o )
. ^ S f % \ 5 C^tfe Y F c rT r CTff i C*ft\5 2 . Medial ©kar c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d as d e s c r i b e d i n n o t e a . i .
st^Ti *tt*ta *IT«f*r c * M « . 0 ? ^
3 . Verbal f o r m s , r e a l i s e d a s d e s c r i b e d i n n o t e a. i i .
( 7 W *IT^ *Th£ vgrt^ vsffq % v 5 ^ f l 5 F 3 C T t
W v 5 W C S t •^BftfST ^ft^rC^Tt f ^ 3 f v 5 T g * R
U. ©kar c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d as d e s c r i b e d i n n o t e b . i .
? t ^ ^ ^ft ^ ift ^ ^ f ^ R
^* j ? r ^ j ^ s TpTj^r
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY *99
R e a l i s a t i o n of t h e m o d i f i e d c h a r a c t e r , ' o n t o s t h o y o ' . 1
The c h a r a c t e r , r e f e r r e d t o a s ' o n t o s t h © y © ( o n t o s t h o o) i s
a modi f ied form of the ©nt©sth© c h a r a c t e r 1»J , y© . This m o d i f i e d
character has been i n t r o d u c e d i n t o t h e B e n g a l i s c r i p t as a g r a p h i c
dev ice for r e p r e s e n t i n g sounds w h i c h c a n n o t he r e p r e s e n t e d hy the
©ntssth© c h a r a c t e r s and , s i n c e i n modern B e n g a l i ©nt©sth© y©
i s r e a l i s e d hy the same sound as v o r g i i y © j© and ©nt©sth© v© i s r e a l -
i s e d hy the same sound as v o r g i i y © h © . 2
The c o n t e x t s i n which t h i s c h a r a c t e r o c c u r s , and the r e a l i s a t i o n
of i t i n r e a d i n g , are i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e f o l l o w i n g n o t e s ,
a. As the c h a r a c t e r <£J i s r e a l i s e d i n modern B e n g a l i as ( j o ) , a means
of r e p r e s e n t i n g the B e n g a l i e q u i v a l e n t of the s e m i - v o w e l y© which
occurs i n S a n s k r i t loanwords b e c o m e s n e c e s s a r y . S a n s k r i t loanwords
which are w r i t t e n i n the D e v a n a g a r i s c r i p t w i t h t h e c h a r a c t e r ZJ"_,
y© , are w r i t t e n i n B e n g a l i w i t h ©nt©sth© y©, and t h i s c h a r a c t e r
i s r e a l i s e d i n v a r i o u s w a y s , i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e examples g i v e n
below-^:
i , r e a l i s e d a s an i n t e r s y l l a b i c v o c a l i c g l i d e , as i n
^tf^RS *rh|3r TftSPP mayiko(mayik) mayur©(mayur) niy©m©(niyom) day©k©( dayok)
deya(doya) maya(maya) ayoj©n©(ayojon )
1. See above , under l . i i . ©nt©sth© c h a r a c t e r s . 2 . For a h i s t o r i c a l d i s c u s s i o n of t h i s c h a r a c t e r , s e e S . K , C h a t t e r j i , The O r i g i n and Development of the B e n g a l i L a n g u a g e , pub. U n i v e r s i t y of C a l c u t t a .
3 . A d e t a i l e d p h o n e t i c a n a l y s i s i s o u t s i d e the scope o f t h i s work, and t h e r e f o r e t h i s v o c a l i c g l i d e , t h e q u a l i t y of which may vary according to the vowe l s p r e c e d i n g o r f o l l o w i n g i t , i s r e p r e s e n t e d in the p h o n e t i c t r a n s c r i p t i o n by ( y ) i n t h e examples g i v e n i n n o t e s a . , b . and c .
200 BENGALI S E C T I O N
1 . Compare t h i s r e a l i s a t i o n w i t h the words w r i t t e n i n the same way i n no te c . i i . b e l o w .
2 . The c h a r a c t e r <f\ r e p r e s e n t s - r g - . See C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s 3 . i i i . a . 3 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , Conjunct C h a r a c t e r s , C l a s s 3 . i .
i i . ][J r e a l i s e d f i n a l l y as a v o c a l i c g l i d e of an e - l i k e q u a l i t y ,
as i n
j©y©(;joy) s©m©y©( Jbmoy) v i s © y © ( b i J o y ) <9tf^r ^tn 35171 atn
p©ric©y©(por icoy) daye (day) k a y s ( k a y ) r a y s ( r a y )
or r e a l i s e d as an i n t e r v o c a l i c g l i d e f o l l o w e d by the i n h e r e n t
vowel r e a l i s e d as ( o ) , a s i n
om (Tin c^tti (%n d e y o ( d e y o ) 1 n e y o ( n e y o ) 1 p e y o ( p e y o ) dheyo(dheyo)
q jeyo-(o j e y o ) komoni iyo(komoniyo) v o r g i i y o ( b o r g i y o ) 2
b . o n t o s t h o yo i s w r i t t e n t o r e p r e s e n t t h e B e n g a l i e q u i v a l e n t of
c e r t a i n d i p h t h o n g s i n loanwords from o t h e r modern l a n g u a g e s , and
i s u s e d i n c o m b i n a t i o n w i t h o t h e r c h a r a c t e r s t o r e p r e s e n t t h e
B e n g a l i e q u i v a l e n t o f i n i t i a l c h a r a c t e r s combined w i t h y©2 i n
such l o a n w o r d s : -
i . The r e a l i s a t i o n i n modern B e n g a l i of the vowel c h a r a c t e r ,
ey , i s ( o i ) . Loanwords from o t h e r l a n g u a g e s i n which t h e Deva-
n a g a r i e q u i v a l e n t o f t h i s d iphthon g o c c u r s , or i n which t h e
c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t i n g y© i n t h e s e l a n g u a g e s i s r e a l i s e d w i t h
the p r e c e d i n g vowel a s a d i p h t h o n g , are w r i t t e n i n B e n g a l i w i t h
©ntssth© y©, a s i l l u s t r a t e d i n the examples g i v e n b e l o w .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 20I
3>J , okar , r e a l i s e d m e d i a l l y a s a f r o n t v o c a l i c g l i d e w i t h an
e - l i k e q u a l i t y , as i n
kayada(kayda)
p a y e s a ( p a y j )
\Srtsr<siT jay©ga( jayga)
, e k a r , r e a l i s e d m e d i a l l y a s an i n t e r s y l l a b i c v o c a l i c
g l i d e , as i n
kayedo(koyed) a y e s a ( a y e / )
i i . o n t o s t ho y© i s w r i t t e n a l s o i n some E n g l i s h loanwords as a
means of r e p r e s e n t i n g the E e n g a l i p r o n u n c i a t i o n of the d iphthongs
in such words as ' c h a i r ' , CS^Jl^ ( c e y a r ) , and ' c a r e ' (, «Kj| f ( k e y a r ) .
i i i . When the c h a r a c t e r T[ , y© , i s combined w i t h an i n i t i a l
consonant c h a r a c t e r i n a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r ^ , i t i s r e a l i s e d as
zero . Some loanwords u s e d i n modern B e n g a l i are w r i t t e n i n H i n d i ,
in the Devanagari s c r i p t , w i t h i n i t i a l c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s of
C lass 3 « i . j t h a t i s , combined w i t h t h e c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t i n g y© .
Such words , as loanwords i n B e n g a l i , a r e w r i t t e n i n B e n g a l i s c r i p t
w i th an i n i t i a l ekar c h a r a c t e r f o l l o w e d by ©ntssth© y©, as i n
t h e s e words: C?fV] | ©ffj p e y a l a ( p e y a l a ) , C^jSJt^f p e y a r s ( p e y a r ) .
c. ©ntssth© y© i s w r i t t e n i n some words i n order t o a v o i d w r i t i n g
a vowel c h a r a c t e r i n a m e d i a l or f i n a l p o s i t i o n . This use of
©ntssth© y© occurs i n words and i n grammat ica l forms .
1. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s 3 . i . , and b e l o w , C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s 3 . i .
BENGALI SECTION
i . JJ i n words , r e a l i s e d as an i n t e r s y l l a b i c v o c a l i c g l i d e
f o l l o w e d by the i n h e r e n t vowel or the vowel r e p r e s e n t e d by the
vowel s i g n , as i n
OTOI meye(meye) koyeko(koyek) p h o t u y a ( p h o t u y a)
J i y o r o ( J i y o r ) J* iya( j iya) p o y a l o ( p o y a l )
i i . i n grammat ical f o r m s , i n which i t i s w r i t t e n m e d i a l l y
w i t h a vowel s i g n r e p r e s e n t i n g the vowel of a p a r t i c l e , when
a p a r t i c l e c o n s i s t i n g of a vowel o n l y i s added t o a word ending
i n a vowe l . The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e t h i s u s e of H '
Verbal forms i n which f i n a l "5J , akar or e k a r , i s r e a l i s e d
as an i n t e r s y l l a b i c v o c a l i c g l i d e a f t e r the vowel i and a f t e r
the i n h e r e n t v o w e l , which i n t h i s c o n t e x t i s r e a l i s e d a s ( o ) ;
as i n t h e s e forms which are d e s c r i b e d g r a m m a t i c a l l y as ' p a s t
p a r t i c i p l e s ' , o c c u r r i n g i n the l i t e r a r y language -
b o l i y a ( b o l i y a ) d e k h i y a ( dekhiya) J"uiya( Juiya) g i y a ( g i y a )
and i n t h e s e c o l l o q u i a l f orms , d e s c r i b e d i n the same way -
g i y e ( g i y e ) d i y e ( d i y e ) hoye (hoye) J u y e ( j u y e ) p e y e ( p e y e )
Verbal forms i n which f i n a l "1 i s r e a l i s e d as a v o c a l i c
g l i d e w i t h an e - l i k e q u a l i t y , as i n t h e s e forms which a re d e s -
c r i b e d g r a m m a t i c a l l y as ' p r e s e n t t e n s e , t h i r d p e r s o n ' -
n s y o ( n o y ) r o y o ( r o y ) payo(pay) j a n a y e ( j a n a y ) b e r o y e ( b e r o y )
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 203
The verba l forms ($fj$ and C t T a r e r e a l i s e d r e s p e c t i v e l y as (deey)
and (neey). 1
Noun forms i n which t h e ' g e n i t i v e 1 s u f f i x vi}<J , e r e ( e r ) i s
added t o nouns ending i n a v o w e l , and noun and pronoun forms i n
which the ' l o c a t i v e ' s u f f i x v£} , e ( e ) i s w r i t t e n as o n t o s t h o yo
a f t e r a f i n a l vowe l ; o n t o s t h o yo r e a l i s e d as a v o c a l i c g l i d e -
*rtan* f%oj?r ^fcsra i%<m mayero(mayer) j h i y e r © ( j h i y e r ) b©uyer©(bouyer) d u i y e r © ( d u i y e r )
^ru srr mr wr srm g & k u i
payo(pay) t h a n a y o ( t h a n a y) amayo(amay) tomay©(tomay)
d. As the o n t o s t h o c h a r a c t e r <| , vo , i s r e a l i s e d as (bo) i n modern
B e n g a l i , t h a t i s , i n t h e same way a s t h e v o r g i i y © c h a r a c t e r <| ,
b© , a graphic method o f r e p r e s e n t i n g word s t r u c t u r e i n v o l v i n g
the semivowel vo i n l o a n w o r d s becomes n e c e s s a r y . This semivowel
i s r e p r e s e n t e d i n B e n g a l i by w r i t i n g the vowel c h a r a c t e r \3 , o ,
f o l l o w e d by ©ntssth© y©. T h i s c o m b i n a t i o n of c h a r a c t e r s i s u se d
i n the f o l l o w i n g examples of l o a n w o r d s , i n which i s r e a l i s e d
as a back v o c a l i c g l i d e , t r a n s c r i b e d h e r e p h o n e t i c a l l y as ( - v )
haoya(haova) poya(poova) d.ak©oyala( c |akovala) d e o y a l i ( d e o v a l i )
This method of r e p r e s e n t i n g a back v o c a l i c g l i d e i s u s e d a l s o i n
verba l forms i n which a s u f f i x b e g i n n i n g w i t h (a ) i s added to a
base c o n s i s t i n g of one c h a r a c t e r , a s i n
hooya(hoova) yaoyan©( jaovano ) paoya(paova)
1 . Compare the r e a l i s a t i o n o f t h e s e form s w i t h t h a t of the two words w r i t t e n i n the same way, g i v e n above i n a . i i .
204 BENGALI SECTION
3 . M o d i f i e r s .
Three m o d i f i e r s a r e u s e d i n w r i t i n g B e n g a l i . These a r e marks
added t o c h a r a c t e r s t o r e p r e s e n t some m o d i f i c a t i o n o f t h e s y l l a b l e
i t r e p r e s e n t s . The f i r s t two m o d i f i e r s r e p r e s e n t n a s a l i s a t i o n , and t h e
t h i r d r e p r e s e n t s a s p i r a t i o n . These m o d i f i e r s may be compared w i t h t h e
c o r r e s p o n d i n g m o d i f i e r s of t h e Devanagari s c r i p t 1 .
i . T>3f-f^P5. > c e n d r o - b i n d u , and v5pJ^f?T » onus v a r a ,
a. c e n d r o - b i n d u 2
VI/
When the mark i s w r i t t e n above a c h a r a c t e r , t h e vowel of t h e
s y l l a b l e which the c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t s i s r e a l i s e d w i t h n a s a l i s a t i o n .
This mark c o r r e s p o n d s i n form, though not i n the way i n which i t i s
r e a l i s e d , w i t h the mark c a l l e d e n u n a s i k e i n S a n s k r i t ,
c e n d r e - b i n d u added t o vowel c h a r a c t e r s :
vsrr f ^ T5 W a i ? ^3 e a I Ii u uu e ey 6 ev
c e n d r e - b i n d u added t o t h e consonant c h a r a c t e r w i t h vowel s i g n s :
w w w t ^ ^ o ^ ^ o ^ r c ^ T ke ka k i k i i kii K U U ke key ko k e v
C h a r a c t e r s w r i t t e n w i t h c e n d r e - b i n d u are r e f e r r e d t o i n s p e l l i n g
t h u s : ( j o r i a - e c o n d r o b i n d u ) , ( k o - e condrobindu h r o j J o i k a r ) .
Reading examples-^
I*• "Ss ft ft dr I «r % ctr f* ^ 5 ^ 5 t E C ^ F T5t v5 C7lt& f Tpf C ? C * f
sfw editor f$*r - tffen fr rfe 1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i . and i i . 2 . ( c o n d r o - b i n d u ) . 3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e page 228 . F i n a l ekar consonant c h a r a c t e r s
r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY 205
1. ( o n u j j o r ) . In the t r a n s c r i p t i o n o f e x a m p l e s , i n roman n o t a t i o n , the ©nusvar i s t r a n s c r i b e d as rr) i n o r d e r t o d i s t i n g u i s h i t from the c h a r a c t e r ^ , t r a n s c r i b e d a s n . 2 . Cf. S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 ,3. i . c .
3. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s , s e e p . 2 2 8 .
b . ©nusvar©!
The term anusvara i s u s e d i n B e n g a l i t o r e f e r t o the mark £ ,
r e a l i s e d as ( n ) . I t may occur f i n a l l y , or m e d i a l l y , w r i t t e n as an
a l t e r n a t i v e t o the h o s o n t o form o f t h e c h a r a c t e r \§ , no . These
examples i l l u s t r a t e the w r i t i n g o f t h e onusvar :
ehorrj(ebon) s i m ( j i n ) arrjti( an-J;i) irrjraj©( i n r a j ) sarrj(jan)
Some words may he w r i t t e n e i t h e r w i t h the onusvar or w i t h :
rorrj(ron) or ran(ron) barrjla(banla) or b a n l a ( b a n l a )
The ©nusvar occurs i n many S a n s k r i t loanwords p r e c e d i n g a c h a r a c t -
er of the ©ntssth© or the uusm© g r o u p , and e s p e c i a l l y i n words which
have the S a n s k r i t p r e f i x w r i t t e n i n Devanagar i a s Tflq , s©m . The
r e a l i s a t i o n of the ©nusvar i n B e n g a l i , a s -n , may he compared w i t h
the var ious ways of r e a l i s i n g t h e ©nusvar of t h e Devanagari s c r i p t i n p
the same S a n s k r i t loanwords i n o t h e r p a r t s of I n d i a .
Examples: f C jT t s©rrjyog©( Jon j o g ) "ST^T^f s©mrag©( Jonrag)
^f^^tf s©myad©( Jonhad) v5f5"Sf ©rr) J©( on Jo)
Sfo'Sff^ s©msar©( Jon Jar) f % ° ^ sirrjh©( J inho)
Reading examples^
'Tv fes i t s ^rt«r *f$H*r *rs^rr fefo
"SR^KS *TT$33 T ^ ^ T - ^ ^ 3 ^
2o6 BENGALI S E C T I ON
i i . "f^^^T , v i s a r g © . 1
The s i g n g w r i t t e n a f t e r a c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t s a s p i r a t i o n f o l l o w -
i n g the vowel of t h e s y l l a b l e w i t h which t h e c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d .
I t occurs m a i n l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , and i s w r i t t e n i n a few
B e n g a l i e x c l a m a t i o n s t o e x p r e s s e m p h a s i s . When t h e v i s a r g e i s w r i t t e n
w i t h a f i n a l c h a r a c t e r , i t i s r e a l i s e d as a s p i r a t i o n a f t e r the f i n a l
s y l l a b l e . When i t o c c u r s m e d i a l l y , i t i s r e a l i s e d as the d o u b l i n g of .
the f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r , as i n TJg^T , duhkhe(dukkho) .
Examples:
bah(bah) uh(uh) punah(punoh) n i h j e ^ a ( n i J" J*e J") a tahpara( o toppor )
Reading e x a m p l e s 2
*f*T8 ^ T S fto^T ^STWRT
*f\5ffs ^wp? ^C5\5tg i jg^Ti ?rrgw? f rg ran f%gc*m wfrm t g^m f i jg^
U. The Complete S y l l a b a r y .
The comple t e s y l l a b a r y , arranged i n t h e t r a d i t i o n a l o r d e r , i s
g i v e n on the f o l l o w i n g p a g e . The S a n s k r i t vowel c h a r a c t e r s , " Jj
and ffc a r e n ° t i n c l u d e d i n the s y l l a b a r y . This t a b l e , w i t h t h e order
of c h a r a c t e r s w i t h vowel s i g n s g i v e n above under Vowel S igns-5 , shows
the order i n which the c h a r a c t e r s are p l a c e d as the i n i t i a l c h a r a c t e r s
of words i n d i c t i o n a r i e s . C h a r a c t e rs w i t h t h e onusvar p r e c e d e t h e
same c h a r a c t e r s w i t h t h e c a n d r a - b i n d u , and b o t h p r e c e d e c h a r a c t e r s
w i t h o u t t h e anusvar or c a n d r a - b i n d u but f o l l o w e d by a n o t h e r consonant
c h a r a c t e r .
1 . ( b i j o r g o ) . Cf. S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i i . 2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 2 8 . 3 . See a b o v e , under 2 . i i .
CHARACTERS OF THE SYLLABARY
^1
w
5f
5. Numerals
The Benga l i numerals a r e w r i t t e n t h u s :
"i * U 8 tt Kb <l l r fc> i o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 10
6. Punctuat ion
In Benga l i prose w r i t i n g t h e end o f a s e n t e n c e i s marked hy an
upr ight s t r o k e of the same h e i g h t a s t h e u p r i g h t s t r o k e o f a c h a r a c t -
e r . This mark i s r e f e r r e d t o a s "Cfff^j , d a r i . Other p u n c t u a t i o n
marks are used as i n E n g l i s h . T h i s s y s t e m i s i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e
prose passage a t the end o f t h i s s e c t i o n 1 . The s y s t e m of p u n c t u a t i o n
used i n Benga l i v e r s e i s the same a s t h a t u s e d i n S a n s k r i t 2 , hut i n
much modern v e r s e the p r o s e s y s t e m i s u s e d .
1 . See end of Ch.3 . 2 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i i . Reading examples .
C H A P T E R 3
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
Consonant c h a r a c t e r s may be combined t o r e p r e s e n t two or more
c o n s o n a n t s which a r e t o be r e a l i s e d c o n s e c u t i v e l y , w i t h o u t an i n t e r -
v e n i n g v o w e l . C h a r a c t e r s formed i n t h i s way are r e f e r r e d t o i n
B e n g a l i a s ^SrPF.^ » y u k t a k ^ o r o l .
1 . C o n s t r u c t i o n o f Conjunct C h a r a c t e r s .
B e n g a l i c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s a re c o n s t r u c t e d t o some e x t e n t by
the same methods as t h e Devanagar i c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s , d e s c r i b e d i n 2
the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n . These methods vary a c c o r d i n g t o t h e form of
the c h a r a c t e r s t o be combined.
i . The c h a r a c t e r which i s r e a l i s e d as the s e c o n d c o n s o n a n t may be
s u b s c r i b e d t o t h e f i r s t c h a r a c t e r ; e . g .
^ ^ 3 ^ kko n t a p t e hmo
i i . The c h a r a c t e r s t o be j o i n e d may be w r i t t e n c o n s e c u t i v e l y ,
w i t h o u t the u s u a l i n t e r v e n i n g s p a c e ; e . g .
m *m m
ngha echo dgo dhvo
i i i . I f the f i r s t c h a r a c t e r h a s a s t r o k e which can be u s e d a s p a r t of
the s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r , t h e c h a r a c t e r s may be j o i n e d as i n t h e s e
e x a m p l e s : *5f
ddo bde ndo b j o
1 . ( j u k t a k k h o r ) . 2 . See S a n s k r i t , Ch.3. 1 .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 209
i v . The form of e i t h e r t h e f i r s t or t h e s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r may "be modi-
f i e d i n order t o make p o s s i b l e t h e w r i t i n g of the two c h a r a c t e r s
as one c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r . These m o d i f i c a t i o n s vary a c c o r d i n g t o
the form of the c h a r a c t e r s t o be j o i n e d ; e . g .
t t o t t h o k t o Jlt^9 ^t* 1 8
v . The c h a r a c t e r s \5 > T\ , and , have s p e c i a l forms which are
used when they are combined w i t h o t h e r c h a r a c t e r s ; e . g .
3 * ^ \ ^ 4 ^
t k o 1 tpo kya t y o rko kro
v i . I f any c h a r a c t e r s cannot be combined by any of t h e s e m e t h o d s ,
the r e a l i s a t i o n of them w i t h o u t an i n t e r v e n i n g vowel i s i n d i c a t -
ed by w r i t i n g the f i r s t c h a r a c t e r w i t h the h o s o n t o .
The modi f i ed forms of some o f t h e c h a r a c t e r s , w r i t t e n as t h e
second part of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r , a r e r e f e r r e d t o as the s y l l a b l e
which the f u l l c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t s and the p a r t i c l e *|»©ir , p h o l a
(phola) ; e . g . TfTp^ft" , y o - p h o l a ( j o p h o l a ) , <Hj»5TT » v o - p h o l a ( b o p h o l a ) .
The modi f i e d forms of the c h a r a c t e r s Tf , , <S| , 55| , u s e d i n
forming conjunct c h a r a c t e r s , a r e a l s o r e f e r r e d t o i n t h i s way.^
2 . Contexts and R e a l i s a t i o n o f C o n j u n c t C h a r a c t e r s .
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s i n B e n g a l i o c c u r i n t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n t e x t s :
i . In Benga l i words , t h a t i s , words n o t borrowed from S a n s k r i t or
from modern l a n g u a g e s ; e . g .
ba<^o(boa$o) p o t t o n ( p o t t o n ) mui^a(mur]DJ3)
1 . See above , C h . 2 , l . i . khan^o t o . 2 . For s p e l l i n g terms u s e d i n r e -f e r r i n g t o conjunct c h a r a c t e r s , s e e end of t h i s c h a p t e r .
p
210 BENGALI S E C T I O N
1 . See a b o v e , C h . 2 . 2 . i i .
i i . In S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , e i t h e r words u s e d commonly i n B e n g a l i , or
words u s e d i n t h e l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e o n l y ; e . g .
n r 3T§>
p o n t h a ( p o n t h a ) J*ebde( Jobdo) ra^-J;re(ras"l;ro)
In t h e c l a s s e s o f c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n b e l o w , under 3 . ,
c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s a r e i n c l u d e d which are u s e d o n l y i n w r i t i n g
S a n s k r i t . Some of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s do n o t occur i n B e n g a l i t e x t s ,
though words i n c l u d i n g them are found i n B e n g a l i d i c t i o n a r i e s ,
i i i . I n loanwords from o t h e r l a n g u a g e s ; e . g .
khaji j a r a ( k h o n j o r ) ma^-(;ara(ma^-j;ar) c a r b b i ( c o r b b i )
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s a re r e a l i s e d as s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g of two
or more c o n s o n a n t s f o l l o w e d by a v o w e l . The r e a l i s a t i o n of ekar c o n -
junct c h a r a c t e r s i n v a r i o u s p o s i t i o n s f o l l o w s i n g e n e r a l the r u l e s
a l r e a d y g i v e n f o r t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of ekar consonant c h a r a c t e r s . In
d e s c r i b i n g the r e a l i s a t i o n of i n d i v i d u a l c h a r a c t e r s , t h e i n h e r e n t
vowel i s p h o n e t i c a l l y t r a n s c r i b e d as ( o ) , as i n t h e t r a n s c r i p t i o n o f
t h e c h a r a c t e r s o f t h e s y l l a b a r y .
The r e a l i s a t i o n i n modern B e n g a l i o f ekar consonant c h a r a c t e r s
w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an e - g l i d e , i n c e r t a i n p o s i t i o n s i n words
g i v e s r i s e t o a prob lem of s p e l l i n g . Th i s r e a l i s a t i o n of such c h a r a c t -
e r s i n words of t h r e e or more c h a r a c t e r s , and i n v e r b a l b a s e s w i t h
s u f f i x e s added, has b e e n i l l u s t r a t e d above^-. The r e a l i s a t i o n of ekar
consonant c h a r a c t e r s w i t h z e r o - v o w e l i n such c o n t e x t s o f t e n r e s u l t s
i n t h e s p e a k i n g o f two c o n s e c u t i v e c o n s o n a n t s i n a way s i m i l a r t o t h e
r e a l i s a t i o n of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r . Examples of B e n g a l i words i n
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 211
The Benga l i c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s a r e arranged i n t h i s c h a p t e r i n
the same four c l a s s e s as t h e D e v a n a g a r i c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n the
Sanskr i t s e c t i o n . A l l t h e c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n
have e q u i v a l e n t s i n t h e B e n g a l i s c r i p t , and a l l t h e examples g i v e n i n
that s e c t i o n can be w r i t t e n i n B e n g a l i s c r i p t . The r e a d i n g examples
g i v e n w i t h each c l a s s of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s i n c l u d e some l e a r n e d
loanwords which may be found i n l i t e r a r y t e x t s .
Class 1 . Two s i m i l a r c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d . 1
These c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g of a ' d o u b l e d '
consonant f o l l o w e d by a v o w e l .
-kko -kkha - g g s - g g h o
t - t t * - t t h a -q.dha
-ppo -ppho -bba -bbho
m -cca -echo -JDS - 3 jho —
ft -tto -ttho -ddo -ddha -nna
-yyo — - l i s — - J J o —i - s s a
The c h a r a c t e r ?j i s r e a l i s e d a s ( n n o ) . The c h a r a c t e r TJ3 i s
r e a l i s e d as ( j j o ) , or when i t i s a k a r , a s ( j j e e ) . The c h a r a c t e r >|>J ,
which occurs on ly i n l o a n w o r d s , i s r e a l i s e d a s ( s s o ) .
1 . Compare S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 . 3 . C l a s s 1 .
which the r e a l i s a t i o n of s e p a r a t e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s i s s i m i l a r t o
that of conjunc t c h a r a c t e r s a r e g i v e n be low w i t h the v a r i o u s c lasses" .
3 . C l a s s e s of Conjunct C h a r a c t e r s i n B e n g a l i .
212 BENGALI S E C T I O N
i . sir W - k t o - t k o - t k h o - g d o -dg© - g d h o -dgha
i i . f "5 I f - t p a - t p h o - p t o -dbo -bda - d b h e -bdh©
1 . These forms a re sometimes* w r i t t e n , f o r i n s t a n c e , i n d i a l o g u e , w i t h c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s . Cf. n o t e s i n C h . 2 , 1 . i i i .
2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 2 8 . 3 . Cf. S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 2 . i . - i v .
When a s u f f i x w i t h an i n i t i a l consonan t c h a r a c t e r i s added t o a
v e r b a l b a s e w i t h a f i n a l okar consonant c h a r a c t e r , t h e r e a l i s a t i o n o f
t h e c o n s e c u t i v e c h a r a c t e r s i n the v e r b a l form i s s i m i l a r t o t h e r e a l -
i s a t i o n of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s . Examples :
<P" "v3 , k o r o t a ( k o t t o ) , TfT^«TT'^| , p a r o l a m a ( p a l l a m ) . 1
Reading e x a m p l e s 2
i f ^ t r i ? ^ 9 f v 5 rasr f ^rfB^r Sttr \STsfhf *w?P3 §®a ceK ^rnr
C l a s s 2 . Two vorgi iy^o c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d . ^
These c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r m a i n l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s . The s e r i e s
of Devanagar i c h a r a c t e r s o f t h i s c l a s s , g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n ,
i n c l u d e s many c h a r a c t e r s which occur i n t h e j o i n i n g of words i n com-
pounds , i n p h r a s e s and i n s e n t e n c e s i n a S a n s k r i t t e x t . The c h a r a c t e r s
o c c u r r i n g i n a S a n s k r i t t e x t p r i n t e d i n B e n g a l i s c r i p t can be r e c o g n i s
ed w i t h a knowledge o f S a n s k r i t ; but i t i s beyond t h e s c o p e o f t h i s
work t o i n c l u d e a l l t h e p o s s i b l e c o m b i n a t i o n s of c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s
c l a s s . The c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n be low may o c c u r i n a B e n g a l i l i t e r a r y t e x t
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 213
i i . a . ^1 2? 3? -nke -rjkh© -rjgh© -J1C9 -jichg -P-j© -jijh©
f % nj *T -iit 9 -nth s -ri^h© - n t 9 - n t h 9 -nd9 -ndh9
*f S p e c i a l ukar form -mp© -mph© -mbs -mbh© n t u
The n a s a l consonant of t h e k©-v©rg©, i n the f i r s t group a b o v e ,
may be r e p r e s e n t e d a l t e r n a t i v e l y by the o n u s v a r 1 . The c h a r a c t e r
<£p , j o i n e d w i t h a c h a r a c t e r o f t h e c o - v o r g o , i s r e a l i s e d a s
( n - ) . The c h a r a c t e r <f , j o i n e d w i t h a c h a r a c t e r of the
• [o-vergo, i s r e a l i s e d a s (n_-) . % w w -cjio jjio - t n © - d n e
The c h a r a c t e r o c c u r s o n l y i n t h e S a n s k r i t loanword "SjnEfef »
yacjia, r e a l i s e d as ( jacna) or a s ( j a c i n g a ) .
The c h a r a c t e r ^ i s r e a l i s e d i n i t i a l l y as ( g o ) ; and m e d i a l l y
as ( g o ) , w i t h n a s a l i s a t i o n o f t h e f o l l o w i n g v o w e l , as i n
T ^ j p y jjiano(gsen) , and ^ j \ o & f , a jna (aggse ) . This c h a r a c t e r
i s not c a l l i g r a p h i c a l l y a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r , and i t i s o f t e n
i n c l u d e d i n the oksoromala a f t e r t h e consonant c h a r a c t e r s ^ .
i n . ^ ?f *U ^ I f ^ ^ -kma -gno -gmo -ghn© -tmo -dm© -pn©
The c h a r a c t e r ^ , tm©, i s r e a l i s e d as ( t t o ) , o f t e n w i t h n a s a l -
i s a t i o n of the f o l l o w i n g v o w e l , a s i n " TTlfl" , a t m a ( a t t a ) .
The c h a r a c t e r T\f , dm©, i s r e a l i s e d as (ddo) , w i t h n a s a l i s a t i o n
1. See above , C h . 2 , 3 . i . b . 2. Words b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h i s c h a r a c t e r are p l a c e d in d i c t i o n a r i e s a f t e r words b e g i n n i n g w i t h O^f .
214 BENGALI S E C T I O N
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p.228. 2. Cf. S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 » 3 . C l a s s 3 . i .
of t h e f o l l o w i n g v o w e l , e x c e p t i n words i n common u s e , s u c h a s
"*i>V| , pedmo(podd6, p o d d o ) .
l v - <SJ ^ **T
-nmo -nmo -nmo -mno The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of c o n s e c u t i v e
consonant c h a r a c t e r s , when the f i r s t i s e k a r , i n a way s i m i l a r t o t h e
r e a l i s a t i o n of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s :
Verbal forms ^Pr^T ^ftvS ^SFTOT*?
k a d e b e ( k a d t b o ) k a p e t e ( k a p ' t o ) Junetame( J"un'tam)
Other words *|'MWf^b ^TFS^rT ^Tv5^Tf^ panemeric e ( p a n 1 m o r i c ) p a t e k u y a ( p a t 1 k u y a ) h a t e c h a n i ( h a t 1 c h a n i )
Reading e x a m p l e s 1
i- " 1 % ^T^fT^ T g ^ ^ R %WTv5 ^Rgv5 n^i T ^ ^ T F^i
^^TT 5 * ^ 3 ^*JTv3 ^ f e ^
i i . - ^ j s f T O ^ - ^ f ^vfT^ TSf^cff *rr^rr
^ *rni *rsr ^ 3 f l r ^ n " *r^t *rtffe
C l a s s 3 . C h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d w i t h e n t e s t h e c h a r a c t e r s ,
i . Charac ter s j o i n e d w i t h f o l l o w i n g . 2
A l l the. c h a r a c t e r s o f the B e n g a l i s y l l a b a r y occur i n t h i s c l a s s
e x c e p t V§ . ne and £fi , no . These c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s ar e formed
by adding the s t r o k e $ , r e f e r r e d t o a s y e p h e l a ( j o p h o l a ) t o a n o t h e r
c h a r a c t e r , t h u s : ^ , k y e ,\*>^ , t y e ,^(3 , pye , **f$ , / y e .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 215
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s may he formed hy comhin ihg t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s ; e . g .
t k t y o , » n t y o , , ndhyo, , tmyo.
Characters w r i t t e n w i t h y o p h o l a a r e r e a l i s e d i n v a r i o u s ways;
and the occurrence of a c h a r a c t e r combined w i t h yopho la i n c e r t a i n
c o n t e x t s a f f e c t s the q u a l i t y o f some o f the v o w e l s .
a. R e a l i s a t i o n of c h a r a c t e r s w i t h y o p h o l a .
When an i n i t i a l c h a r a c t e r i s w r i t t e n w i t h y o p h o l a i t i s r e a l i s e d as
as zero -yopho la and t h e vowe l o f t h e s y l l a b l e , e . g .
nyuuno(nun) dhyey©(dheyo) j y o t i s o ( j o t i j )
When a medial or a f i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s w r i t t e n w i t h y o p h o l a , the
c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d as the d o u b l i n g of the consonant r e p r e s e n t e d
by the c h a r a c t e r w i t h which y o p h o l a i s written.1; e . g .
vakkyo(bakko) r a j y o ( r a j j o ) puny-o(punno)
b . R e a l i s a t i o n of vowe l s a f f e c t e d by y o p h o l a .
An okar c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d i n g a c h a r a c t e r w i t h yopho la i s r e a l i s e d
wi th the inherent vowel a s ( o ) , e . g .
^ T O M \53 vsr^ra onye(onno) sobhyo(Jobbho) k o l y o ( k o l l o ) 2 t a l © v y © ( t a l o b b o)
I f an i n i t i a l c h a r a c t e r w i t h y©ph©la i s ©kar, the vowel i s r e a l -
i s e d as (ee) , u n l e s s t h e ©kar c h a r a c t e r i s f o l l o w e d by an ikar or
an i i k a r c h a r a c t e r , when i t i s r e a l i s e d as ( e ) 3 ; e . g .
vyotha(b8etha) v y © t h i i ( b e t h i ) vysj i j©n©(bien jon) v y © t i i t © ( b e t i t o )
1 . For examples of media l c h a r a c t e r s , s e e b e l o w , under n o t e b . 2 . Cf. the v e r b a l form ^5^«?f , k © r © l © ( k o l l o ) , Ch. 2 , 1 . i i i . n o t e b . 3 . Cf. no te on r e a l i s a t i o n of v o w e l c h a r a c t e r s and s i g n s , C h . 2 , 2 . i i . b .
216 BENGALI S E C T I ON
1 . Cf. the v e r b a l form r e a l i s e d as (neey) i n the n o t e on o n t o s t h o ye on p . 2 0 3 . 2 . A l s o r e a l i s e d as ( u d d o g ) .
3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 2 9 . U. C f . S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s 3 . i i .
I f a c h a r a c t e r w i t h y o p h o l a i s a k a r , t h e vowel i s r e a l i s e d as (ee) ,
nyayoCnsey)-1- dhyane( dhsen) vyakhyane(bffikkheen) kenya(konnee)
In t h e word^C^T^T > udyogo , a S a n s k r i t loanword i n which t h e
conjunc t c h a r a c t e r a r i s e s from the j o i n i n g of t h e p r e f i x
, u t - ,
w i t h the word C ft T > yoga , t h e m e d i a l c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d a s ( d j o ) ,
the word b e i n g r e a l i s e d a s ( u d j o g ) 2 . This r e a l i s a t i o n may be c o n -
t r a s t e d w i t h the r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e c h a r a c t e r w i t h y o p h o l a i n f<Pf5T,
v idya(b iddee) . Note a l s o "Sf?^ , sohyo( Jo j jho) .
Reading examples-^ <TT^ ^Tv5 C^rfnS\5t gSv5 C5otf3 CS^Jt S
yc&n f s ^ T ^ r a f t ^ r e r o q s r r oth ^
i i . Charac ters w i t h f o l l o w i n g "?f .h
This c l a s s of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s c o n s i s t s of c h a r a c t e r s combined
w i t h o n t o s t h o v o , c o r r e s p o n d i n g w i t h t h e Devanagari c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d
w i t h the o n t o s t h o c h a r a c t e r , vo . These c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s occur
on ly i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s . When < , or i t s m o d i f i e d form, o c c u r s
as the s e c o n d p a r t of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r , i t i s r e f e r r e d to as
v o p h o l a ( b o p h o l a ) . I t i s w r i t t e n w i t h some c h a r a c t e r s i n t h e f u l l
form, j o i n e d to the p r e c e d i n g c h a r a c t e r by the matra , as i n iffi ,
dhvo, , hvo ; or i n t h e m o d i f i e d form, added t o t h e f o o t of a
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 217
c h a r a c t e r , as i n f , kv© , , tv© , , jv© . The form of the
character <f , rvo , i s d i s c u s s e d , l a t e r , under i i i . a .
The f o l l o w i n g are examples o f c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s formed hy com-
b i n i n g three c h a r a c t e r s : ^ , t t v o , , ddhv© , ^ , k t v o .
In the conjunct c h a r a c t e r s o f t h i s c l a s s , ©ntssth© v© i s r e -
garded as a s e p a r a t e c h a r a c t e r from v o r g i i y © b©, a l t h o u g h i n the
s y l l a b a r y the two c h a r a c t e r s a r e t h e same. Words b e g i n n i n g w i t h an
i n i t i a l conjunct c h a r a c t e r o f t h i s c l a s s are p l a c e d i n d i c t i o n a r i e s
a f t e r words b e g i n n i n g w i t h c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s formed by combining a
consonant c h a r a c t e r w i t h a f o l l o w i n g .
When vophs la i s w r i t t e n w i t h an i n i t i a l c h a r a c t e r , i t i s r e a l -
i s e d as zero.; e . g .
^t^t w w r
svami i ( jami ) j v a l © ( j a l ) t v © k t © ( t o k t o ) dvad©J©( dadoj )
When v©ph©la i s w r i t t e n w i t h a m e d i a l or a f i n a l c h a r a c t e r , i t
i s r e a l i s e d as the f i r s t p a r t o f the c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r d o u b l e d , w i t h z e r o - r e a l i s a t i o n of v©ph©la, a s i n t h e f o l l o w i n g examples :
©nv©h©(onnoho) i i J v © r © ( i J J o r ) v i J v © ( b i J J o ) konv©(konno)
The c h a r a c t e r "5 " , hv© , i s r e a l i s e d as a v - g l i d e f o l l o w e d by a
b i l a b i a l a s p i r a t e , as i n p j^qcTf , b i h v © l © ( b i v v h o l ) .
In Sanskr i t words , u se d as l e a r n e d loanwords i n l i t e r a r y B e n g a l i ,
a p r e f i x ending i n a h©s©nt© c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r may be added t o a
word w i th i n i t i a l ©ntssth© v s . In t h e c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r which
r e s u l t s , and i n the c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s which a r i s e from the j o i n i n g
2*8 BENGALI S E C T I O N
of two words i n a compound, vopho la i s r e a l i s e d as ( b - ) ; e . g .
u d v i g n o ( u d b i g n o ) s o d v y e v o h a r e ( / o d b e b o h a r ) r g v e d o ( r i g b e d )
The words t^^ff*^ , udvano(uddan) , and f ^ ^ l , v i d v a n o ( b i d d a n )
are e x c e p t i o n s t o t h i s g e n e r a l r u l e .
The r e a l i s a t i o n , of v e p h o l a , i l l u s t r a t e d by the above e x a m p l e s ,
r e s u l t s i n a s i m i l a r i t y o f r e a l i s a t i o n of two or more words which a r e
the same i n the spoken l a n g u a g e and d i s t i n g u i s h e d o n l y i n w r i t i n g ;
e . g . , d h a n i i , and $fl<jp| , d h v a n i , r e a l i s e d a s ( d h o n i ) ,^
f*r3 T?T » J i k a r o , and ^Wj.^ , s v i i k a r e , r e a l i s e d as ( j i k a r ) , 2
*f«J , J"oro, ' n<r , s o r a , and , s v o r o , r e a l i s e d as ( / o r ) 5
Reading examples^-
i i i . C h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g or w i t h f o l l o w i n g ^ .
a. ^ p r e c e d i n g a n o t h e r c h a r a c t e r . 5 * s Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s o f t h i s c l a s s are formed by w r i t i n g a s t r o k e
r e f e r r e d t o a s (,<jp , r e p h s ( r e p h) , above the c h a r a c t e r b e f o r e which
<J i s t o be r e a l i s e d .
This s t r o k e i s p l a c e d a t the r i g h t hand s i d e o f any o t h e r s u p e r -
s c r i b e d s t r o k e , and i s t h e l a s t s t r o k e of the c h a r a c t e r t o be w r i t t e n . e,g* ^ £ ^ \s• Y a4 c¥f
- r k o - r c o -v\o - r t o - r p a - r k i i - r k e - r k o v
The c h a r a c t e r s > F > \ S l » T 3 , , p F , ^ f , , s T , ^ I and ^
1 . ' m a s t e r ' and ' s o u n d ' , 2 . ' h u n t i n g ' and ' a g r e e m e n t ' . 3 . ' a r r o w ' , ' cream' and ' v o i c e ' . U. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 2 9 . 5 . C f . S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 3 . i i i . a .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 219
are o f t e n w r i t t e n i n t h e i r d o u b l e d form w i t h reph©l; e . g .
, r t t o , , r g g o , *zf , rmmo, , rvvo
In some words , i n c l u d i n g v e r b a l f o r m s , the r e a l i s a t i o n of okar
consonant c h a r a c t e r s w i t h z e r o - v o w e l i n c e r t a i n p o s i t i o n s l e a d s to the
r e a l i s a t i o n of j ^ " b e f o r e a n o t h e r c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i n a way s i m i l a r
to the r e a l i s a t i o n of r e p h e , a s i n t h e s e e x a m p l e s : -
Verbal f orms: *Pf|"<<p3 » p a r o t a ( p a r ' t o , p a t t o ) , ^sf^<f , mar© 2v©( m o l l o)
Other words : T f ^ ^ j " ^ , derobaro( d o r ' b a r ) , ^ f ^ ^ t ^ f , s e r o k a r o ( Joir'kar)
Reading examples*r
\54 *j*f ^T*T ^ifi ^jt^
?fl^v5 ^p f t f%M*f stfrta
b . f o l l o w i n g a n o t h er c h a r a c t e r . 3
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s a r e formed by s u b s c r i b i n g the
s t roke r e f e r r e d to as r o p h o l a ( r o p h o l a ) t o a consonant c h a r a c t e r . The
c h a r a c t e r s wi th r o p h o l a which o c c u r i n B e n g a l i , m o s t l y i n S a n s k r i t
loanwords , are i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e r e a d i n g examples g i v e n be low.
The f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r s i l l u s t r a t e t h e c a l l i g r a p h y of c h a r a c t -
ers wi th r o p h o l a , w i t h some s p e c i a l f o r m s ; and some c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t -
ers formed by j o i n i n g t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s :
kro gro jro t r o dro p r o bhro Jr© hr©
5 » * 5 -3T "5 W 1 dru dhruu Jru t r u -r)gr© -ndr© -ktr© -ndhr©
1 . The r u l e s of or thography o f C a l c u t t a U n i v e r s i t y , g i v e n i n the Bengal i d i c t i o n a r y T>*jf!^ , p . 5 9 7 , recommend t h a t t h i s p r a c t i c e be d i s c o n t i n u e d . 2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 3 0 . 3*. C f . S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 3 . i i i . a .
220 BENGALI S E C T I O N
Reading e x a m p l e s !
s r m cm ^ t$ 5 ^ a t m fSs
f s v 5 ^ tfrsfar ^ 1 ^ t § 3 ^ 1 * 3
i v . Charac ters w i t h p r e c e d i n g c5| or w i t h f o l l o w i n g c*f . 2
a. cv| p r e c e d i n g a n o t h e r c h a r a c t e r .
Charac ters j o i n e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g «*J are formed hy w r i t i n g the
second c h a r a c t e r e i t h e r immedia te ly a f t e r , or b e l o w , *f , t h u s : -
% , I k s , f [ , l g s , ^ , lp© , ^ , lm© . Only a few of
the B e n g a l i c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r w i t h p r e c e d i n g of\ , and t h e s e are
i l l u s t r a t e d below i n t h e r e a d i n g examples .
b . c?J f o l l o w i n g a n o t h e r c h a r a c t e r .
These c h a r a c t e r s are formed by w r i t i n g 5 f a t the f o o t of the
c h a r a c t e r a f t e r which i t i s t o be r e a l i s e d , thus -
^ , kl© , £T , gl© , $ , pi© , $ , ml© , $f , Jl© . The
c h a r a c t e r i s no t combined w i t h «<f i n a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r , b u t
the two c h a r a c t e r s a re w r i t t e n c o n s e c u t i v e l y , thus • When «*f ,
or a m o d i f i e d form of i t , i s added to a n o t h e r c h a r a c t e r a s t h e second
par t of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r , i t i s r e f e r r e d to as l a p h a l a ( l o p h o l a ) .
Only a few of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r , m o s t l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s .
Those which occur are i l l u s t r a t e d be low i n the r e a d i n g e x a m p l e s .
The r e a l i s a t i o n of c o n s e c u t i v e consonant c h a r a c t e r s , when the
f i r s t i s ©kar and i n c e r t a i n p o s i t i o n s , i n a way s i m i l a r t o the r e a l -
i s a t i o n of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s i s i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e s e
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 3 0 . 2 . Cf. S a n s k r i t , Ch. 3 , 3 . C I . 3 . i v . a . and b .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 221
words : f^T<pYf , b i l 9 k u l 9 ( b i l ' k i l l ) , " ^ p 3 c ^ , m a t g l g b g d n o t ' l o b ) .
Reading examples-*-
3Fte c s w s r m a m csrr^ ^ s f f a ^ r r ?
Class U. v o r g i i y g c h a r a c t e r s j o i n e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g or f o l l o w i n g
u u s m 9 c h a r a c t e r s ,
i . Characters combined w i t h p r e c e d i n g "*]" , ^ or "9\
a. •*]" , or "5f p r e c e d i n g a n o t h e r c h a r a c t e r . 2
Characters which occur w i t h p r e c e d i n g "*f : -
- J c 9 - J c h 9 - J n a Jmo
Characters which occur w i t h p r e c e d i n g : -
-^ko ~ ? t 8 ~ ? t n s "~ s r l 8 ~ ^ P 9 -sph9 - s m 9
Words wi th c u r s i v e forms:
The c h a r a c t e r combined w i t h t h e c h a r a c t e r s of the \9-vorg9 ,
except w i t h , 'no , i s r e a l i s e d a s ( s o ) . When combined w i t h f(
the conjunct c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d a s ( j n o ) . The c h a r a c t e r s "Sip" ,
sko , "^^j" , sp9 , and , spho a r e r e a l i s e d a s (Jko) , ( j p o ) and
(jpho) i n ordinary s p e e c h , b u t may be r e a l i s e d as ( s k o ) , ( spo ) and
(spho) i n formal s p e e c h . "*J , Jno , i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d as ( s n o ) .
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 3 0 . 2 . Cf. S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 , C l a s s h. i .
2 2 2 BENGALI S E C T I O N
C h a r a c t e r s which o c c u r w i t h p r e c e d i n g "Sf : -
^ ^ ^ ^ ™fN "tr sko skho st© sth© sn© sp© sph© sm©
The c h a r a c t e r combined w i t h c h a r a c t e r s of t h e t©-v©rg© i s
r e a l i s e d as ( s ) . Note t h e form of the c h a r a c t e r , s t u .
The c h a r a c t e r s , Jm© , and ^ , sm© , ©kar or a k a r , are
r e a l i s e d i n i t i a l l y a s (J5) and (J"a) , as i n the words ^Cf^f , Jm©J*ru
( j o s r u ) and ^fjSJ^S , smar©k©( J a r o k ) . These two c h a r a c t e r s , and ^ ,
sm© , are r e a l i s e d m e d i a l l y and f i n a l l y as ( / J o ) , a s i n t h e words '^'"Q' , uusm©(uJ".fo) and \3~*t\ , bh©sm©(bho j Jo) .
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s of C l a s s e s 1 . , 2 . and 3 . may occur w i t h p r e -
c e d i n g uusm© c h a r a c t e r s , such a s -
^ , - s t v © , § , - £ t r s > I f » - s t r © , , - s t v © .
The f o l l o w i n g words i l l u s t r a t e the r e a l i s a t i o n of c o n s e c u t i v e
consonant c h a r a c t e r s , when t h e f i r s t i s ©kar i n c e r t a i n p o s i t i o n s , , i n
a way s i m i l a r t o t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s :
"!:3:rr^|v5 > a s s t s C a T ' t o ) 1 f>*f*Tt > c©J"©ma ( c o J"'ma)
Reading e x a m p l e s 2
b . Characters j o i n e d w i t h f o l l o w i n g "5J or "SJ . 3
Three c h a r a c t e r s occur i n t h i s g r o u p , i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s :
^ , ks© , , - t s © and , -ps© . In w r i t i n g S a n s k r i t i n B e n g a l i
1 . Verbal form. 2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 3 0 . 3 . Cf. S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s k . i . b .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 223
1. Cf. note on 3 under Clas-s 2 . a b o v e . 2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 3 0 .
s c r i p t , however , c h a r a c t e r s c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o a l l the c h a r a c t e r s
g iven i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n a r e u s e d . The c h a r a c t e r "^J" , - k s o ,
occurs i n E n g l i s h l o a n w o r d s .
Cursive forms i n words -
£ ^ n * r f * w r w r « w l < § N > ( • w f r f a
The c h a r a c t e r i s n o t c a l l i g r a p h i c a l l y a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r ,
and i t i s o f t e n i n c l u d e d i n t h e s y l l a b a r y a f t e r the consonant
c h a r a c t e r s . I t does n o t , h o w e v e r , b e l o n g p r o p e r l y t o the s y l l a b a r y ,
as i t r e p r e s e n t s a s y l l a b l e c o n s i s t i n g o f two c o n s o n a n t s f o l l o w e d by
the vowel o . W o r d s b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h i s c h a r a c t e r are p l a c e d in
d i c t i o n a r i e s a f t e r words b e g i n n i n g w i t h ^ , kvo . I t i s r e a l i s e d
i n i t i a l l y as (kho) and m e d i a l l y and f i n a l l y as ( k k h o ) . The r e a l i s a t -
ion of the c h a r a c t e r s , ksrjo , and "^f , ksmo , i s i l l u s t r a t e d i n
these examples:
3j^r kgnuto(khnuto) t i i k s n o ( t i k k h n o ) suuksmo( Jukkho)
When an okar c h a r a c t e r i s f o l l o w e d by ^* , t h e i n h e r e n t vowel
i s r e a l i s e d as ( o ) , as i n Jff T , J l o k s n o ( J lokhno) j and i f ^ i s
akar, the vowel s i g n may be r e a l i s e d a s (se) , as i n t h e s e words -
<f^t , r eksa (rokkha , rokkhse) , "SJ JT > yok^ma( jokkhss).
Reading examples 2
^nra *rftftre x s ^ f h t ^ *j*r *t*&?t
224 BENGALI S E C T I O N
i i . ^ j o i n e d w i t h ©nunasik© ( ' n a s a l ' ) c h a r a c t e r s 1 .
Three of t h e ©nunasik c h a r a c t e r s are j o i n e d w i t h
J T -hn© -hn© -hm©
The c h a r a c t e r s ^ and are r e a l i s e d as ( n h o ) , and t h e
c h a r a c t e r "5Jf i s r e a l i s e d a s (mho) .
Reading e x a m p l e s 2
B e n g a l i p r o s e p a s s a g e ^
^*rc*rt w(7Tt ^cafe ^ r r f tvs i ^c*r gc*r ^ * r r ^cs ^sf rcafu ^rrms csffisrar ^c? r f § i s m o s h * r i $ i ^srar f N n ^ ^c?r-
^c?rfSi *Trf%c3ra ^n*rr xsrera ^ c ^ r qc=? m^cs?
*m?r etches i ^ f fas -ft^ ^cafSt s s w ^ r f ^ - ^faft
ewer t%^re3 * n f 5 o f^ra . vb ( s f t ^ ^ t
f ^Tra •HJ*flN C^TQ3 ^PT, v3*R G5T<5ft ^3 a*RTS "R TS-
«IW # r & t - ^ ! ^ C^t\5S \5T3 TOUTS OSWSiS
TO^TO ^f%v5 Tf t f t ^ < fq&Cv5 FIT! TT I ^ m t -
g s i w s c * r 5 ^ r r c ? * r e f 5 * ? t t o w
1. C f . S a n s k r i t , Ch. 3 , 3 . CI. i i . 2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 3 0 . 3 . Rahindranath T a g o r e , g i k s a n a V i k i r a n a , an a d d r e s s on u n i v e r s i t y -
t r a i n i n g , puh. U n i v e r s i t y of C a l c u t t a , 1 9 3 3 .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS 225
( p o , goe g o , cjoe Junno po)
(hoe h r o j j o i k a r , donto Joe h o j o n t o , donto Joe akar)
( t o e h r o j j o i k a r , boe b o p h o l a , khor]c(o t o )
( t a l o b b o J o , koe t o t a t e h r o j j o i k a r )
( b o r g i y o joe jioe a k a r , d o n t o no)
( b o r g i y o j o , donto noe mophola)
(c|hoe h r o j j o u k a r , murdhonno noe djho t a t e h r o j j o i k a r , t o )
( j o e jopho lae condrob ind u t a t e akar)
TO (donto J o , donto noe dhoe j o p h o l s . , t a t e akar)
(d i rgho i , t a l o b b o Joe b o p h o l a , reph ro )
( j o r i a , o n t o s t h o joe reph)
(donto Jo , boe b o p h o l a t a t e r e p h)
( h r o j j o u , coe choe r o p h o l a , o n t o s t h o 0)
( t a l o b b o Joe l o p h o l a t a t e o k a r , ko)
(donto J o , o n u j j o r , d o n t o Joe ko t a t e r i p h o l a , t o )
(noe h r o j j o i k a r , t a l o b b o Joe e o , o n t o s t h o 0)
* (donto Joe t o e r o p h o l a t a t e d i r g h o i k a r )
( t a l o b b o Joe h r o j j o i k a r , khyoe akar)
(goe rophola t a t e d i r g h o i k a r , murdhonno Joe mophola)
TO, fl^f CT-^rtCT c%5u <7r rf(7T ^ ^ Q J T T re m ^ i
Examples of Benga l i s p e l l i n g t e r m s , i n c l u d i n g c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s :
226 BENGALI S E C T I O N
T r a n s c r i p t i o n of Reading E x a m p l e s 1
Chapter 2.
l . i . kg che ng pg1 dg cjhg ko cho no po do c|ho t 9
DO F °
t g kho thg t o kho tho
ngdg ngkhg T 9 ^ 9 pgdg khgrg nod nokh -|;ok pod khor
jhoro gh©"];© pgthg tg^g jhop ghof p o t h t o {
k g t g b o f o ghong pet© g o t g koto boro ghono p o f o g o t o
p o t o joro p o t o joro
n g t g t g t g n o t o t o t o
bong j ene mans kene bon jon mon kon
phe-(;gkg ko tgk g j e g e t phojjok k o t o k j o g o t
ghg-j;gkg ghofok
ce^opg^g ko^eke^© kgcgmgco cjhekemeke khg^gkhg^g c o f ' P 0 ! k o f ' k o f koc'moc djiok'mok k h o - f k h o t
thekothgk© gepeggp© ^gpg^opg t h o k ' t h o k g o r ' g o p T ° P ' T ° P
t g k g t g k g t o k ' t o k
dhopgdhgpg dhop'dhop
l . i i . k g l g ghgrg malg pgrg b g l g rgkg k o l ghor mol por b o l rok
d g l g r g t h g phol© d o l r o t h pho l
j o t o •joto
bodo lg g o l g d o m©l©j© bodol g o l o d m o l o j
nggorg nogor
g g l o n g g o l o n
k h e r e t o r o p h o l g k g r g k h o r o t o r p h o l o k o r
k g l g r g v g k o l o r o b
l . i i i . Jovg sgbg Job Job
dojg d o j
sgkhg Jokh
Jgtg sgmg / o t o Jomo
h g t g h o t o
hgrg horo
sohgrg sohoj© Johor Johoj
s g r g l g J o r o l
h o l g p h g h o l o p h
1 . B r a c k e t s are o m i t t e d i n the p h o n e t i c t r a n s c r i p t i o n i n order t o make i t p o s s i b l e t o p l a c e t h i s t r a n s c r i p t i o n immedia te ly be low each word i n t h e s y s t e m a t i c t r a n s c r i p t i o n .
TRANSCRIPTION 227
khos©kh©s© k h o / ' k h o /
8©hocore /ohocor
2 . i .
t©s©t©s© t o / ' t o j
s©m©t©l© Jomotol
i l i l
t©l©t©l© t o l ' t o l
gh©n©r©s© g h o n o r o /
e e
cjh©l©cjh©l© d h o l ' dho l
gh©n©k©ph© ghonokoph
oy o i
m©d©k©t© modokof
©v ou
j e l s k s r © j o l o k o r
at© *t is© i / el©m© elora i i / o i / o i t© i t o
2.11.
i t© i t
i t © l o i t o l
otsn© oton
ut© » t
am© am
it©r© i t o r
rn© r i n
i s © t i / o t
uun© un
ut©r© u t o r
er© er
or© or-
i id© i d
ud©k© udok
op© opo
ib© ibo
ca ca
r s i r i / i
/ i / u / i / u
©r© oro
evssdh© oujodh ©p© opo
en© eno
ukh© ukho
ut© u t o
©vr©t© o u r o t
ogh© ogho
©yk© o i k o
©vs©n© o u / o n
ot© o t o
©vm© oumo
i i t © i t o
e t © t e t o t
©g© ogo
o l o o l o
otu otu
mot a raofa
godhul i godhul i
p. 198. t in© t i n
thu thu
a l o a l o
se / e
go go
kuu ku
dao dao
y u i j u i
j h i j h i
c|heu djieu
ruupa rupa
j i i v i l c a j j b i k a
dudh© dudh
mane mane
kumari i kumari
duur© dur
n i i l © n i l
h r d i h r i d i
d a g a b a j i d a g a b a j i
cokh© cokh
m / i r u t i r u f i
n i i t i n i t i
m©v mou
krpa k r i p a
hur i i hur i
os© 0/0
nr n r i
c h i c h i
k o p o t i k a k o p o t i k a
guru guru
novka nouka
n i rupadhi n i rupadhi
megho / r g a l © motaleb© megh J r i g a l mota leb
jut© t i t © guurh© juto t i t o gurho
mrg© chot© dr^h© m©vn© so l© dhsvt© mrt© mrigo c h o t o d r i p h o mouho / o l o dhouto m r i t o
caker© cakor
tomora tom'ra
l e k h lekh
/unot© / u n ' t o
b©i bo i
sahss© Jaho/
tuk©ra fuk 'ra
lekh© lekho
/un©to / u n ' t o
pather© p a t h o r
pago l© p a g o l
kamera kam'ra
cup©pi c u p 1 p i
mucoki m u c f k i
k©v/©l© k o u / o l
ta l©pat© t a l ' p a t
dev©r© dehor
g©g©n©bhela g o g o n ' b h e l a
thak thak
thak© thako
jan jan
k©i k o i
kh©i khoi
jags l© j a g ' l o
n o d i i nod i
j a g o l o j a g ' l o
y©di j o d i
jan© jano
b h i j©t© b h i j ' t o
j i tob© j i t ' b o
tul©b© t u l ' b o
y s t i j o t i
b o l i b o l i
b e s i b o / i
j i t o b o j i t ' b o
/unol© J u n ' l o
so- l i l© / o l i l
228 BENGALI S E C T I O N
c a l i t a c o l i t
s a h i t o J o h i t
jamidara jomidar
abhidhana obhidhan
g a l i t a g o l i t o
p a l i t a p o l i t o
p o l u p o l u
p©tu pofu
madhura marut modhur morut
ba luka b o l u k
phatura photur
bahut bohut
3 . i . a. era er
ora or
Ska ha c i ak ha c i
co t^ C O \v.
t a dha t a dha
ro bhui ro bhui
yu i ju i
t u s a t u f
t h a i t h a i
caca cheka d ar a cac chek djar
ghota ghof
kudala bedhe kudol bedhe
jaka jaka
dar i dar i
khopa khopa
dhudhula dhudhul
p o c i / o pocij"
hakapi hakapi
b . nam nor) t s n ]
t 3 r J gam arrjja gan onJo
damJana donjon
Jarrjsa ^ J i 9 r r j t ; h srrj vamjo Jorjja t h o 9 t ^ o n DarjJo
samghata Jorjghat
sarrjyamana Jorj jomon
i i . aruh oruh
Jatayuh Jotayuh '
n ihkarana nikkaron
s a m v i t Jorjbit
pamju parjju
vamJadhara borj Jodhor
s a r a h Joroh
nabhahsad nobhoJJod
s u t a r a r r j J u t o r a r j
samjodhana Jorj Jodhon
pun ah punoh
sahah Johoh
avatarrjsa oboton Jo
sairjghatika Jarjghatik
n ihsukha n iJJukh
narrjjuka norj Juk
karrjsaha korj Joha
a tahpara o toppor
a c e t a h o c e t a h
duhsamaya dujjomoy
bahsadana bajJodon
h a v i h J e s a h o b i j j e j
vanavkah bonoukah
n ihkasana n i k k a j o n
duhsaha dujJoho
Chapter 3« C l a s s 1 .
pakka pokko
kakkhata kokkhof
paggara poggo£
k a c c a r a k o c c o r
i c c h a i c c h a
l a j ja l o j ja
k u j j h a t i k a kuj j h o f i k a
tha t t a udjLiina sar^r^avata t h a t t a ucJdJLn Jonnoboto
chappara choppor -
v i sani \a bi-Jonno C l a s s 2 . i . J a k t i -
J o k t i
chabbi Ja chabbiJ
sahayya J a h a j j o
ummeda ummed
saddara Joadar
vagdana bagdan
udgamana udgomon
gupta gup to
u tkara utkor
u t p h u l l a u t p h u l l o
u t t a r a u t t o r
Joyya Jo 0 d«
u t t h a n a u t t h a n
cavdda couddo
Juddha Juddho
kanna kanna
p h u l l a m a n a j j a n t i p h u l l o monoj'janti
h i s s a h i j j a , h i s s a
t i b b a t t i b b o t
udghata udghat
utpanna utponno
par icchanna por icchonno
adbhuta odbhut
camatkara comotkar
Jabda Jobdo
vrddha br iddho
u t p a t h a utp.oth
c i t t a c i t t o
u t k h a t a u t k h a t
dagdha dogdho
satkorja Jofkon
TRANSCRIPTION 229
i i . ©lankar© J"©nkh© s s n g s t © s s n g h s t s n © ©jicsl© l a n c h s n a ©j i j s l i o lonkar /onkho Jorjgoto / o n g h o f o n o n c o l l anchona o n j o l i
jhQjijhato kon^oki i kon^ha parjcja. a^hur|dhitg J a n t i p a n t h i i n inda jhonjhaj; konjjoki kor^fha panc^a c]hur]c{hito / a n t i p o n t h i n inda
©ndha sompgdg lgmphg gmbgrg sgmbhgvg jpang j i j j i a s a p g t n i i pgmkti ondlio /ompod lompho ombor Jorabhob gsen j iggee/a p o t n i p o n k t i
i i i . /9kma Jokka
i v . unmogn© unmogno
Class 3 . i «
sonlsgn© Jorjlogno
jonm© jonmo
atma a t t S
pna pna
nimnokt© nimnokto
v a g m n b a g g i
vanmey© banrjoy
ssnmas© JonmaJ"
vaky© bakko
khyat© kheeto
thyan qhyaqa
y o g y o t a j o g g o t a
pur]y© punno
cygvgng cobon
y g t y a c a r g jo t t secar
bhrtyer© b h r i t t e r
mi t thya mitthes
ggdyg goddo
dyumgni dumoni
c y u t g c u t o
j y o t i j o t i
j y e t h a jeatha
g tyut tgmg o t t u t t o m o
g tygyg o t t o y
s g t y g / o t t o
gbadhyg dbyang dhyey© nyay© obaddho dheen dheyo ntsy
nyuune upsnyas© pyang rsvpy© g b h y a sa myao k g l y a n o t a l o v y g nun uponnse/ peen rouppo obbheaj meeo kolleen t a l o b b o
vyonjsn© /yam© monusyo syoda sshy© udyana sgndhya sonkbyeyo bsenjon J*8=m monuJ"/o Jod J o j j h o uddsen /ondhss Jonkheyo
Class 3 . i i .
k v o c i t k o c i t
i i J v o r o iJJor
pokvo ucchvaso jva l© t v s r a pokko ucchaj* j a l t o r a
svocche ©nves©r[© s v o d e / e Joccho onne /on / o d e j
t o t t v o t o t t o
s o r o s v o t i i / o r o / / o t i
dhvonsa dhonfo
v i l v o b i l l o
/ v a s o j i h v a / a / j ibha
Class 3 « i i i .
a. terk© muurkhe v o r g i i y o d i i r g h g varcc© muurcchong s a r j j u v©rn© torko murkho b o r g i y o d i r g h o b a r c c o raurcchon / o r j u borno
k o r t t g v y g kor tobbo
podarthg kerdd©-];© ©rddh© durnam© ssrp© s©m©rp©n© dh©rm© msryyada podartho kordot ordho durnam / o r p o /omorpon dhormo morjseda
durlgbh© durlobh
230 BENGALI S E C T I O N
C l a s s U. i i .
gpsgra khinng k^viiirjg o p / o r a khinno khinno
gpgrahng ahnikg c i h n g mgdhyahng brghma prahr]g puurvvahng oporanho anhik c i n h o moddhanho bromba pranho purbbanho
vgh irbhutg s s r v v a mgr/gng msrssr^a ggrhgrjg aryyg v i s g r g g sgrddarg bohirbfruto / o r b o mor/on mor/on gorhon a r j o b i J o r g e Jordar
i i i . b . kruddbg gramg ghreyg v a j r g putrg drgvyg prg:qamg p r i y g kruddho gram ghreyo b o j r o putro drobbo pronam p r i y o
bhrgmgrg vyggrg a / r a y g sgmra-J;g s r u t g srmi vgdhrg v r g t g J r i i bhromor beegro a s r o y J"omra{ s r u t o s m bodhro b r o t s r i
h r i t a g / r u p r a r t h g n a andhrg ucchrgyg sarjkrantg p a k t r g sgrjgrghg h r i t o o s r u p r a r t b o n a andhro u c c h r o y /orjkranto p o k t r o /orjgroho
C l a s s 3 . i v .
u l k a v g l g i t a phalgurjg ul-|;a g g l p g gulpbg prggg lbh g gulmg u l b g u l k a b o l g i t o pha lgun u l f a g o l p o gulpho progo lbho gulmo u l b o
k l a n t a g l e p g n g p l a v o n g t a b l a k g mlang J lokg g j l i i l g h la d g k l a n t o g l e p o n p l a b o n t o b l o k mlan J lok o / l i l h l a d
C l a s s U. i .
a. p o / c a t n i / c e y g n i / c h i d r g a / c g r y g p r a j n g n i s k r t g ngs"tg j y e s t h g p o j c a t n i j c o y n i j c h i d r o a / c o r j o prosno n i / k r i t o noJ-J;o j e J " t n o
nip^n-urg krsng n i ^ p g t t i n i s p h g l g gr i i^mg skgndg s k h g l i t g n i / f h u r k r i j n o n i f p o t t i n i / p h o l g r i j / o skondo s k h o l i t o
s t g b d b a s p o r / g s tobdho s p o r / o
smgrgr^g s v a s t h g snano sn igdhg spgs"J;g sphu-J;itg v ismgyg Joron J o s t h o snan sn igdbo spoT^o s p h u t i t o b i / J o y
s m r t i s t r i i r a s j r o s r l t i s t r i r a j f r o
b . gksarg p a r i k s i t g tg tksgrjat suuk^mg arksg mgtsgrg v i p s a okkhor p o r i k k h i t o t o t k h o n a t Jukkho arkkho m o t / o r b i p / a
TRANSCRIPTION
Bengal i p r o s e p a s s a g e
231
ekedine epeksakr t e e l p e v e y a s e yekhane amare J e k t i c h i l e t ekhene sekdin opekkhakr i to o l p o b o y j e jokhon amar J o k t i c h i l o tokhon
kekhane kekhene i m r e j i s a h i t y a mukhe mukhe bamla kare J u n i y e c i . amare kokhono kokhono i n r e j i J a h i t t o mukhe mukhe h a n l a kore J u n i y e c i . amar
Jrotara i m r e j i j a n e t e n e s a v a i . t a v u t a r a s i i k a r a karecen a i m r e j i s r o t a r a i n r e j i j a n ' t e n J o b a i . t o h u t S r a f i k a r k o r e c e n i n r e j i
s a h i t y e r a v a n i i bamlabha^aye t a d e r e mahe s e h e j e s a r a p e y e c e . v a s t u t a J a h i t t e r hani ban labhajay t a d e r mone Johoje Jara p e y e c e . h o s t u t o
adhunika / i k ^ a i m r e j i h h a s a v a h i n i i h a l e i amadera manera p r o v e J e p e t h e adhunik Jikkha i n r e j i h h a / a b a h i n i h o l e i amader moner probe J" 'po the
tara anekakhani mara y a y e . i m r e j i khanara { ^ b i l e aharera j a ^ i l a tar onek'khani mara j a y . i r j r e j i khanar -j^elslXe aharer jo j ; i l
paddhati yara abhyasta nay emana b a i p l i i r e c h e l e b i l e t e p a r i debara poddhoti jar i obbhosto noy gemon b a n a l i r c h e l e b i l e t e pap i debar
pathe p i encjo o kompaniira cj inare kameray yakhana kheta b a s e takhana pothe p i end^ o kompanir acinar kam'ray jokhon k h e t e b o j e tokhon
bhojyo o rosonaro modhyapathe ka"|;a c h u r i r a d e v t y e t a r a pekpe badha-bhojjo o r o / o n a r moddhopothe k a f a c h u r i r d o u t t o t a r pokkhe badha-
gras ta b o l e i bheropuuro b h o j e r a majhakhaneo k s u d h i t e je"|;herere d a v i i gros to b o l e i bhor 'pur b h o j e r majh 'khaneo k h u d h i t o j o { h o r e r dabi
sempuurne mi"|;0te caye na. amadera Pik^ara b h o j e o s e i daj*a, - ache Jompurno m i f ' t e cay na . amader f ikkhar b h o j e o J e i d o j a , - ache
savai o theca majhepathe anekakhani e p e c e y e haye yaya . e ya b a l e c i e Jobi o thoco majh'pothe o n e k ' k h a n i opocoy hoye j a y . e ja b o l ' c i e
k e l e j i ye j j i ere k o t h a , amara a j a k e r a a l o c y a v i ^ a y a e n i y e n e y e . k o l e j i jogger k o t h a , amar a j ' k e r a l o c c o b i j o y e e n i y e noy.
amare visoye"|;a s e r v v e s a d h a r o n e r e J i k s a n i y e . J i k s a r e j a l e r a kala . amar b i / o y | ;a J orb o /adhar oner J ikkha n i y e . Jikkhar j o l e r k o l
ca lanoro kotha noye , pa ipa yekhane pavchaye na sekhane p a n i i y e r a calanor kotha noy, p a i p j ekhane pouchoy na Jekhane p a n i y e r
vyavasthara kotha . matrbhasaye s e i v y a v a s t h a y a d i gospedere ceye p r o -bsebosthar kotha . m a t r i b h a j a y J e i beebostha j o d i gojpoder ceye p r o -Jest© na heye t e v e e i v i d y a h a r a d e j e r e m e r u v a s i i menere upaye hobe k i i Josto na hoy tobe e i biddashara d e j e r morubaj i moner upay hobe k i .